MELSEC System Q

Programmable Logic Controllers

Users Manual

Hardware Description

Art. No.
10 03 2011 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Version F
 About this manual

The texts, illustrations, diagrams and examples in this manual are provided for
information purposes only. They are intended as aids to help explain the
installation, operation, programming and use of the MELSEC System Q modules.

If you have any questions about the installation and operation of any of the products
described in this manual please contact your local sales office or distributor (see
back cover). You can find the latest information and answers to frequently asked
questions on our website at www.mitsubishi-automation.com.

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. reserves the right to make changes to this
manual or the technical specifications of its products at any time without notice.
 Users Manual
MELSEC Q Series Modules
Art. No.:

Version Changes / Additions / Corrections

A 06/2001 First edition
B 02/2002 Additions:
CPU modules: Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
Power supply modules: Q62P and Q64P
Base units: Q52B and Q55B
Extension cable: QC05B
Digital input modules: QX40, QX40-S1, QX41, QX42
Digital output modules: QY40P, QY41P, QY42P, QY50, QY68A
C 10/2003 Additions:
CPU modules: Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU
Digital input modules: QX41-S1, QX42-S1, QX82 and Q82-S1
Memory card: Q2MEM-2MBS
Sections 4.3.6 and 4.4

Partial correction:
Sections 6.2, 10.3.1 and 11.3
D 09/2004 Additions:
Combined I/O modules: QH42P and QX48Y57
CPU module battery: Q7BAT (page 3-3, sections 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 10.3.1, 10.3.2)
Notes on devices FX and FY (table 4-1)
Footnote fig. 9-5

Partial corrections:
Section 4.3.4
Notes on troubleshooting (pages 11-12 and 11-13)
Error codes (section 11.2.1) added
E 02/2006 Additions:
CPU modules: Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q06CCPU
Power supply modules: Q63RP and Q64RP
Base units: Q38RB-E and Q68RB

Partial corrections:
MT-series modules deleted (Overview, section 3.2.1)
ST-series modules addad (Overview, section 3.2.1)
F 03/2011 akl Additions:
CPU modules: Universal model QCPU, Process CPUs Q02PHCPU and
Q06PHCPU
Power supply modules: Q61P, Q61P-D, Q61SP and Q64RN
Base units: Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38DB, Q321DB, Q65WRB
Digital input modules: QX10-TS, QX40-TS, QX80-TS
Digital output modules: QY10-TS, QY40-TS, QY80-TS
Memory cards: Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS

Partial corrections:
Error code list (section 11.3)
Notes on troubleshooting (section 11.4.1); new section 11.4.2
 Safety guidelines
For use by qualified staff only
This manual is only intended for use by properly trained and qualified electrical technicians who
are fully acquainted with the relevant automation technology safety standards. All work with the
hardware described, including system design, installation, configuration, maintenance, service
and testing of the equipment, may only be performed by trained electrical technicians with
approved qualifications who are fully acquainted with all the applicable automation technology
safety standards and regulations. Any operations or modifications to the hardware and/or
software of our products not specifically described in this manual may only be performed by
authorised Mitsubishi Electric staff.

Proper use of the products

The MELSEC System Q modules are only intended for the specific applications explicitly
described in this manual. All parameters and settings specified in this manual must be observed.
The products described have all been designed, manufactured, tested and documented in strict
compliance with the relevant safety standards. Unqualified modification of the hardware or
software or failure to observe thewarnings on the products and in this manual may result in
serious personal injury and/or damage to property. Only peripherals and expansion equipment
specifically recommended and approved by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC may be used with the
programmable logic controllers of the MELSEC System Q.
All and any other uses or application of the products shall be deemed to be improper.

Relevant safety regulations

All safety and accident prevention regulations relevant to your specific application must be
observed in the system design, installation, setup, maintenance, servicing and testing of these
products. The regulations listed below are particularly important in this regard.
This list does not claim to be complete; however, you are responsible for knowing and applying
the regulations applicable to you in your location:
VDE Standards
VDE 0100
Regulations for the erection of power installations with rated voltages below 1000 V
VDE 0105
Operation of power installations
VDE 0113
Electrical installations with electronic equipment
VDE 0160
Electronic equipment for use in power installations
VDE 0550/0551
Regulations for transformers
VDE 0700
Safety of electrical appliances for household use and similar applications
VDE 0860
Safety regulations for mains-powered electronic appliances and their accessories for
household use and similar applications.
Fire safety regulations
Accident prevention regulation
VBG No. 4
Electrical systems and equipment

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 5

 Safety warnings in this manual
In this manual special warnings that are important for the proper and safe use of the products
are clearly identified as follows:

DANGER:

P Personnel health and injury warnings. Failure to observe the safety warnings identified
with this symbol can result in health and injury hazards for the user.

CAUTION:

E Equipment and property damage warnings. Failure to observe the safety warnings
identified with this symbol can result in damage to the equipment or other property.

6
 General safety information and precautions
The following safety precautions are intended as a general guideline for using PLC systems to-
gether with other equipment. These precautions must always be observed in the design, in-
stallation and operation of all control systems.

DANGER:

P Observe all safety and accident prevention regulations applicable to your specific
application. Always disconnect all power supplies before performing installation
andwiringwork or opening any of the assemblies,components and devices.
Assemblies, components and devicesmust always be installed in a shockproof
housing fitted with a proper cover and fuses or circuit breakers.
Devices with a permanent connection to the mains power supply must be integrated
in the building installations with an all-pole disconnection switch and a suitable
fuse.
Check power cables and lines connected to the equipment regularly for breaks and
insulation damage. If cable damage is found immediately disconnect the equipment
and the cables from the power supply and replace the defective cabling.
Before using the equipment for the first time check that the power supply rating
matches that of the local mains power.
You are responsible for taking the necessary precautions to ensure that programs
interrupted by brownouts and power failures can be restarted properly and safely.
In particular, you must ensure that dangerous conditions cannot occur under any
circumstances, even for brief periods. EMERGENCY OFF must be switched forcibly,
if necessary.
EMERGENCY OFF facilities conforming to EN 60204/IEC 204 and VDE 0113 must
remain fully operative at all times and in all control system operating modes.The
EMERGENCY OFF facility reset function must be designed so that it cannot ever
cause an uncontrolled or undefined restart.
You must implement both hardware and software safety precautions to prevent the
possibility of undefined control system states caused by signal line cable or core
breaks.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 7

 Symbols used in the manual
Use of instructions
Instructions concerning important information are marked separately and are displayed as fol-
lows:

NOTE Text of instruction

Use of numbering in the figures

Numbering within the figures is displayed by white numbers within black circles and is explained
in a table following it using the same number, e.g.:
   

Use of handling instructions

Handling instructions are steps that must be carried out in their exact sequence during startup,
operation, maintenance and similar operations.
They are numbered consecutively (black numbers in white circles):
 Text.
 Text.
 Text.

Use of footnotes in tables

Instructions in tables are explained in footnotes underneath the tables (in superscript). There is
a footnote character at the appropriate position in the table (in superscript).
If there are several footnotes for one table then these are numbered consecutively underneath
the table (black numbers in white circle, in superscript):
Text

Text

Text

8
 Contents

Contents

1 Introduction

2 Basics

2.1 Features of the MELSEC System Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 Specification comparison of CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.2.1 Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU and Q02CPU. . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.2 High performance model QCPU (H types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.3 Universal model QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.4 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.5 Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.6 Motion CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.7 PC CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.8 C-Controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3 System configuration

3.1 Overall configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Overall system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.2.1 Modules of MELSEC System Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.2.2 Outline of system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

4 CPU modules

4.1 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 High performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.3 Universal model QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.4 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.1.5 Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.2 Memory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.3 Notes for handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9

Contents

4.4 Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.4.1 Part names of CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.4.2 DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3 Transfer of a program with a programming device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.4.4 Latch clear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.4.5 Data transfer from memory card to standard ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.5 Part names and settings of universal CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4.5.1 Part names of CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.2 Transfer of a program with a programming device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.3 Reset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.5.4 Latch clear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

4.6 Checking serial number and function version of the CPU module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

5 Memory cards and batteries

5.1 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.2 Handling the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.3 Installing and removing a memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.4 Setting the write protect switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.2.1 Battery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.2 Battery installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.3 Battery installation into the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.4 Handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

6 Input and output modules

6.1 Selecting I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 Part names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

10
 Contents

7 Power supply modules

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2 Selecting the power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module. . . . . 7-2
7.2.2 Output currents of the power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.3 Life detection power supply module Q61P-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.3 Part names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7.4 Wiring of power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

8 Base units

8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1.1 Extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Precautions on using the base units Q52B and Q55B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.2 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.3 Part names and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.3.1 Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.2 Setting the extension stage number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3.3 Connection and disconnection of extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8.4 I/O Number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

9 Installation

9.1 Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9.3 Calculating heat generation of programmable controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9.4 Mounting the base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9.4.1 Direct mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.4.2 Mounting a DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

9.5 Installation and removal of module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

9.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

9.6.1 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11

Contents

10 Maintenance and inspection

10.1 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2 Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.3 Battery life and replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.3.1 Battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3.2 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.3.3 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

10.4 Resuming operation of CPU after storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

11 Troubleshooting

11.1 Troubleshooting basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.2.1 ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.2 The MODE LED does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.3 When the MODE LED is flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.2.4 When the POWER LED has turned off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.2.5 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned on in red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.2.7 When the LIFE LED has turned off or turned on in red/is flickering in red 11-10
11.2.8 When the RUN LED has turned off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.2.9 When the RUN LED is flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.2.10 When the ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.2.11 When the USER LED has turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.2.12 When the BAT.ARM LED has turned on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.2.13 When the BOOT LED is flickering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.2.14 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.2.15 When output load of the output module does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.2.16 When unable to read a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.2.17 When unable to write a program into the CPU module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.2.18 When program is rewritten unintentionally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11.2.19 When unable to perform boot operation from the memory card . . . . . . . . 11-19
11.2.20 When "UNIT VERIFY ERR." has occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.2.21 When "CONTROL BUS ERR." has occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.2.22 When the CPU module does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
11.2.23 When the CPU cannot communicate with
GX Developer/GX IEC Developer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

12
 Contents

11.3 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25

11.3.1 Error code list (1000 to 1999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.3.2 Error code list (2000 to 2999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11.3.3 Error code list (3000 to 3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
11.3.4 Error code list (4000 to 4999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
11.3.5 Error code list (5000 to 5999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83
11.3.6 Error code list (6000 to 6999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-85
11.3.7 Error code list (7000 to 10000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-93

11.4 I/O circuit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-97

11.4.1 Input circuit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-97
11.4.2 Output circuit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-100

12 Specifications

12.1 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2 Hardware specifications of the CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.2.1 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.2 High performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.3 Universal model QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.4 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5 Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

12.3 Input/output module specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

12.3.1 Digital input module QX10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.3.2 Digital input module QX10-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.3.3 Digital input module QX28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.3.4 Digital input module QX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.3.5 Digital input module QX40-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.3.6 Digital input module QX40-S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.3.7 Digital input module QX41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.3.8 Digital input module QX41-S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.3.9 Digital input module QX42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.3.10 Digital input module QX42-S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.3.11 Digital input module QX70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.3.12 Digital input module QX71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.3.13 Digital input module QX72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.3.14 Digital input module QX80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.3.15 Digital input module QX80-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.3.16 Digital input module QX81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 13

Contents

12.3.17 Digital input module QX82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28

12.3.18 Digital input module QX82-S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.3.19 Relay output module QY10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.3.20 Relay output module QY10-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12.3.21 Relay output module QY18A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
12.3.22 Triac output module QY22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12.3.23 Transistor output module QY40P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.3.24 Transistor output module QY40P-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12.3.25 Transistor output module QY41P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.3.26 Transistor output module QY42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12.3.27 Transistor output module QY50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
12.3.28 Transistor output module QY68A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
12.3.29 Transistor output module QY70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
12.3.30 Transistor output module QY71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44
12.3.31 Transistor output module QY80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
12.3.32 Transistor output module QY80-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46
12.3.33 Transistor output module QY81P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47
12.3.34 Combined I/O module QH42P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49
12.3.35 Combined I/O module QX48Y57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
12.3.36 Dummy module QG60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53

12.4 Power supply module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54

12.5 Base unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61

A Appendix

A.1 External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1.1 CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.2 Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.1.3 Main base units and extension base units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.1.4 I/O modules and dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

14
 Introduction

1 Introduction
This manual describes the following modules and units of the MELSEC System Q:
CPU modules ( Chapter 4),
Memory cards ( Chapter 5),
Input and output modules ( Chapter 6),
Power supply modules ( Chapter 7) and
Base units ( Chapter 8).

The manual comprises also detailed descriptions of:

Installation ( Chapter 9),
Maintenance and Inspection ( Chapter 10) and
Troubleshooting ( Chapter 11).

The MELSEC System Q is user-friendly and offers a wide range of communications facilities.

NOTES For further information about programming of the programmable logic controllers refer to the
programming manual of MELSEC System Q and MELSEC A/Q series (Art. No. 87432).

For further information about application and operating of intelligent function function mod-
ules of MELSEC System Q refer to the Users Manual of the modules.

Chapter 3 of this manual describes examples, when using the CPU in independant systems.
The CPU can also be used in other system configurations (Data-Link systems or Computer-Link
systems). These systems are described in different manuals.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11

Introduction

12
Features of the MELSEC System Q Basics

2 Basics
2.1 Features of the MELSEC System Q
CPU modules
The MELSEC System Q offers a wide range of CPU modules:
Basic model QCPU
Q00JCPU Q00CPU
Q01CPU
High performance model QCPU
Q02CPU Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Universal model QCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU
Q04UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDHCPU Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDHCPU Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Process CPU
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU

NOTE Talking in this manual about Q-CPU means, that all mentioned CPUs are of MELSEC System Q.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 21

Basics Features of the MELSEC System Q

Base units
The Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU include power supply, CPU and main base unit with five slots.
All other CPUs have to be mounted on a main base unit. Additionally one or two power supplies
can be mounted and up to twelve modules.
Extension base units can be connected to the main base unit via bus cable. The extension base
units are available with or without slots for a separate power supply and with slots for up to twelve
modules.
The Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU can adress max. 16 modules on one main base unit and two
extension base units.
The CPU modules Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU and Q02UCPU are extendable
with up to four extension base units and totally 24 modules (36 modules with Q02UCPU).
Except for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU, all other CPU types can be extended with seven
extension base units with maximum 64 slots total. The maximum distance between main base
unit and last extension base unit is 13.2 m, so that the base units can be mounted inside the cab-
inet with some distance between each other.
Connecting extension base units to a redundant PLC system
It is not possible to connect an extension base unit to a main base unit with a redundant
CPU up to serial no. 09012... The expansion can be done by remote I/O station via
MELSECNET/H network.
It is possible to connect a main base unit with a redundant Q12PRHCPU or Q25PRHCPU
beginning at serial no. 09012 up to maximum seven extension base units with totally
63 modules.
The first extension base unit must be the type Q65WRB, the second to seventh unit can be
of type Q68RB.

Up to 8192 inputs and outputs

The CPU types Q02(H) to Q25H, the universal model CPUs from Q03UD(E)CPU on, all process
CPUs and redundant CPUs can address up to 4096 in/outputs directly on the base unit.
Together with remote I/Os these CPUs can address up to 8192 I/O points.
A Q02UCPU can address up to 2048 in/outputs directly and up to 8192 I/Os totally.
The Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU address 256 I/O points directly. The Q00CPU, Q00UCPU,
Q01CPU or Q01UCPU addresses 1024 I/O points. With these CPU types the number is
extended to 2048 points and to 8192 points with the universal model PLC CPUs by remote I/Os.

22
Features of the MELSEC System Q Basics

High speed program processing

CPU types with an additional "H" (like Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU or Q12PHCPU) do a faster
processing of the program. The operation time for the LD instruction (load) by the Q02CPU is
79 ns. The same instruction is done in 34 ns by the H type CPU.
An universal model PLC CPU increases the processing speed additionally. The operation time
of the above mentioned LD instruction takes only 20 ns with the Q03UDCPU and only 9.5 ns with
CPU modules from Q04UDCPU on.
With the new MELSEC System Q main base units with integrated memory and processor the
data transfer to I/O modules, intelligent function modules and network modules is much faster
compared to the previous base units. The access of the Q02HCPU to an intelligent function
module is with 20 s per word 7 times faster than with the Q2ASHCPU. The refresh cycle of the
MELSECNET/10 network is around 4.3 times faster compared to the Q02HCPU and needs only
4.6 ms for 8 kwords.

Multi CPU operation

Except Q00JCPU all CPU modules of System Q are suitable fr multi-CPU operation. Up to four
CPU modules can be mounted on one main base unit to which the mounted I/O and intelligent
function modules are assigned. The data transfer between the CPU modules can run automat-
ical and cyclic. Also mixed configurations are possible with PLC CPU, Motion Controller CPU
and Q PC. But Q00CPU and Q01CPU cant be combined with H type CPUs.
By multi-CPU operation the cycle time is decreased, the performance is increased and the appli-
cation is wider.

Redundant operation
The operation of a redundant system is continued, even if single components have a failure. This
increases performance and outage and shutdown times are minimized.
The redundant PLC of MELSEC System Q consists of two controllers with identical configura-
tions (power supply, Q12PRHCPU or Q25PRHCPU, network modules, etc.), which are con-
nected by a so called tracking cable. One PLC controls the system, while the other one is in
standby mode. In case of an error the system switches from the control system to the standby
system and the process continues without any interruption.
Also a PLC with a standard CPU can be protected with two redundant power supplies against
failures. Therefore a main base unit and an extension base unit with two types of power supply
are available, one with 24 V DC input and one with 100240 V AC input.

Range of instructions
Instructions for a Q-CPU are divided into two categories, basic instructions and comprehensive
dedicated instructions. The process CPUs and redundant CPUs have additionally 52 process
control instructions. Therefore these CPU types are particularly suitable for applications of proc-
ess technology.
The capacity for the PLC programm is between 8 and 252 k steps depending on the CPU type.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 23

Basics Features of the MELSEC System Q

Memory
In addition to the internal memory (RAM and FlashROM) all CPU types (except Q00(U)JCPU,
Q00(U)CPU and Q01(U)CPU) have an extension slot for a RAM or a ROM memory card. The
RAM card is protected against data loss with a battery. ROM memory cards are available with
capacities up to 32 Mbyte for permanent storage of programs and other data.

Programming
The instructions in MELSEC System Q for programming of the CPU are according IEC1131 and
there are additional MELSEC instructions depending on the programming tools.

Fast data transfer with programming devices

The connection of the programming device to the CPU module is done by USB interface except
the basic model CPUs Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU. The datatransfer speed is then
12 Mbps.
For the Q-CPUs the datatransfer speed via RS232 interface is 115.2 kBaud.

Mounting
The base unit can be mounted directly by screws or on a DIN rail by adapter. The small dimen-
sions of the modules of System Q allow, that the needed space for system mounting is reduced
by 60 % compared with the MELSEC AnS series.

Direct connection to the ETHERNET

The universal model PLC CPUs (modules with an "E" in the model name like Q10UDEHCPU)
are equipped with an ETHERNET interface allowing the direct connection of the PLC to the
ETHERNET network.

Compatibiliy
Concerning the general programming all the modules of MELSEC System Q are compatible to
the other Systems of the MELSEC PLC familiy. For information about programming of intelligent
function modules refer to the User's Manual of the module.

24
Specification comparison of CPU Basics

2.2 Specification comparison of CPU

The following table gives an overview about the characteristics of each CPU. Chapter 4
describes the detailed performance.

2.2.1 Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU and Q02CPU

The Q00CPU, Q01CPU and Q02CPU can be used in a multi-CPU system from version B on.
Combinations of Q00CPU and Q01CPU are only possible with Motion Controller CPUs and Q-
PC. These CPUs cant be operated in one system together with other PLC CPU modules.
Refer to section 4.6 for checking the function version of the CPU module.

Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU

No. of I/O device points 2048 2048 2048 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 7FF X/Y000 to 7FF X/Y000 to 7FF X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 256 1024 1024 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y00 to FF X/Y000 to 3FF X/Y000 to 3FF X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible Possible Possible Possible
Processing speed 200 ns 160 ns 100 ns 79 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 700 ns 560 ns 350 ns 237 ns
(MOV instruction)
Program memory 8 k steps 8 k steps 14 k steps 28 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 64 kByte 64 kByte 64 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 56 kByte 94 kByte 240 kByte 112 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi- 8 kByte 8 kByte 8 kByte
CPU operation
Shared memory for high
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards Not usable Not usable Not usable RAM, Flash card
and ATA cards
Power consumption 0.22 A 0.25 A 0.27 A 0.60 A
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.66 kg 0.13 kg 0.13 kg 0.20 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) 98x245x98 98x27.4x89.3
[mm]

Tab. 2-1: Specification comparison of Q00J, Q00, Q01 and Q02

 One of the following memory cards can be installed for a Q02CPU:
RAM: Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB) or Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB)
Flash card: Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB) or Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA card: Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB), Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB) and Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 25

Basics Specification comparison of CPU

2.2.2 High performance model QCPU (H types)

All of the following CPU modules can be used in a multi-CPU system.

Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU

No. of I/O device points 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible
Processing speed 34 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 102 ns
(MOV instruction)
Program memory 28 k steps 60 k steps 124 k steps 252 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 64 kByte 256 kByte 256 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 112 kByte 240 kByte 496 kByte 1008 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi- 8 kByte
CPU operation
Shared memory for high
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards RAM:
Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB)
Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB)
Flash card:
Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB)
Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA card:
Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB)
Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB)
Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)
Power consumption 0.64 A
(5 V DC)
Weight [kg] 0.20
Dimensions (HxWxD) 98x27.4x89.3
[mm]

Tab. 2-2: Specification comparison of Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H and Q25H

26
Specification comparison of CPU Basics

2.2.3 Universal model QCPU

All of the following CPU modules can be used in a multi-CPU system.

Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU and Q03U(E)CPU

Q03UCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UECPU 
No. of I/O device points 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 256 1024 1024 2048 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y00 to FF X/Y000 to 3FF X/Y000 to 3FF X/Y000 to 7FF X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible
Processing speed 120 ns 80 ns 60 ns 40 ns 20 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 240 ns 160 ns 120 ns 80 ns 40 ns
(MOV instruction)
Program memory 10 k steps 10 k steps 15 k steps 20 k steps 30 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 128 kByte 192 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 256 kByte 512 kByte 1024 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi- 8 kByte 8 kByte
CPU operation
Shared memory for high 8 kByte
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards Not usable RAM, Flash card, ATA card
Power consumption 0.37 A 0.33 A 0.33 A 0.23 A Q03UCPU:
(5 V DC) 0.33 A
Q03UECPU:
0.46 A
Weight 0.70 kg 0.15 kg 0.15 kg 0.20 kg Q03UCPU:
0.20 kg
Q03UECPU:
0.22 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) 98x245x98 98x27.4x89.3 Q03UCPU:
[mm] 98x27.4x89.3
Q03UECPU:
98x27.4x115

Tab. 2-3: Specification comparison of Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U and Q03U(E)
 One of the following memory cards can be installed for a Q02UCPU or Q03U(E)CPU:
RAM: Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB), Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB), Q03MEM-4MBS (4 MB),
Q03MEM-8MBS (8 MB)
Flash card: Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB) or Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA cards: Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB), Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB) or Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)
 The universal model PLC CPUs modules with an "E" in the model name are equipped with an Ethernet interface.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 27

Basics Specification comparison of CPU

Q04UD(E)CPU to Q26UD(E)CPU*

Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU

Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
No. of I/O device points 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible
Processing speed 9.5 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 19 ns
(MOV instruction)
Program memory 40 k steps 60 k steps 100 k steps 130 k steps 200 k steps 260 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 256 kByte 768 kByte 1024 kByte 1280 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 512 kByte 1024 kByte 2048 kByte 4096 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi- 8 kByte
CPU operation
Shared memory for high 32 kByte
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards RAM:
Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB)
Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB)
Q03MEM-4MBS (4 MB)
Q03MEM-8MBS (8 MB)
Flash card:
Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB)
Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA card:
Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB)
Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB)
Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)
Power consumption Q04UDH-, Q06UDH-, Q10UDH-, Q013UDH-, Q20UDH-, Q26UDHCPU: 0.39 A
(5 V DC) Q04UDEH-, Q06UDEH-, Q10UDEH-, Q013UDEH-, Q20UDEH-, Q26UDEHCPU: 0.49 A
Weight Q04UDH-, Q06UDH-, Q10UDH-, Q013UDH-, Q20UDH-, Q26UDHCPU: 0.20 kg
Q04UDEH-, Q06UDEH-, Q10UDEH-, Q013UDEH-, Q20UDEH-, Q26UDEHCPU: 0.22 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) Q04UDH-, Q06UDH-, Q10UDH-, Q013UDH-, Q20UDH-, Q26UDHCPU:
[mm] 98x27.4x89.3
Q04UDEH-, Q06UDEH-, Q10UDEH-, Q013UDEH-, Q20UDEH-, Q26UDEHCPU:
98x27.4x115

Tab. 2-4: Specification comparison of Q04UD(E)CPU to Q26UD(E)CPU

* The universal model PLC CPUs modules with an "E" in the model name are equipped with an Ethernet interface.

28
Specification comparison of CPU Basics

2.2.4 Process CPU

All of the following CPU modules can be used in a multi-CPU system.

Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU

No. of I/O device points 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible
Processing speed 34 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 102 ns
(MOV instruction)
Program memory 28 k steps 60 k steps 124 k steps 252 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 128 kByte 256 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 112 kByte 240 kByte 496 kByte 1008 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi- 8 kByte
CPU operation
Shared memory for high
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards RAM:
Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB)
Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB)
Flash card:
Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB)
Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA card:
Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB)
Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB)
Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)
Power consumption 0.64 A
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.20 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) 98x27.4x89.3
[mm]

Tab. 2-5: Specification comparison of Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH and Q25PH

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 29

Basics Specification comparison of CPU

2.2.5 Redundant CPU

It is not possible to connect an extension base unit to a main base unit with redundant CPU. The
expansion can be done by remote I/O station via MELSECNET/H network.
A standard main base unit of MELSEC System Q can be used, if you dont need redundant
power supplies.
The redundant CPU modules Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU cant be used with a multi-CPU
system.

Q12PRHCPU Q25HCPU
No. of I/O device points 8192
(usable on program)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to 1FFF
(Hex)
No. of I/O points 4096
(accessible to the actual
I/O module)
No. of I/O device points X/Y000 to FFF
(Hex)
SFC (MELSAP-3) Possible
Processing speed 34 ns
(LD instruction)
Processing speed 102 ns
(MOV instruction)
Data transfer time to the Device memory 48 k words: 10 ms
Standby system Device memory 100 k words: 15 ms
The cycle time increases by the data tranfer time to the Standby system.
Program memory 124 k steps 252 k steps
(Drive 0)
Standard RAM 256 kByte 256 kByte
(Drive 3)
Standard ROM 496 kByte 1008 kByte
(Drive 4)
Shared memory for multi-
CPU operation
Shared memory for high
speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards RAM:
Q02MEM-1MBS (1 MB)
Q02MEM-2MBS (2 MB)
Flash card:
Q02MEM-2MBF (2 MB)
Q02MEM-4MBF (4 MB)
ATA card:
Q02MEM-8MBA (8 MB)
Q02MEM-16MBA (16 MB)
Q02MEM-32MBA (32 MB)
Power consumption 0.64 A 0.64 A
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.3 kg 0.3 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) 98x52.2x89.3
[mm]

Tab. 2-6: Specification comparison of Q12PRH and Q25PRH

NOTE For more informations about redundant CPU modules refer to the technical catalogue
MELSEC System Q and to the User's Manual of the module.

2 10
Specification comparison of CPU Basics

2.2.6 Motion CPU

The motion controller CPU of System Q controls extensive movements by the connected servo
amplifiers and servo motors. They only work in a multi-CPU system together with minimum one
PLC CPU. Therefore maximum three Motion CPU modules can be mounted on one main base
unit.

Q172CPUN and Q173CPUN

Q172CPUN Q173CPUN
No. of I/O device points (usable on program) 8192 8192
Real I/O points 256 256
(I/O in Main and Extension Base Units)
No. of control axes 8 32
Operation cycle With software SV13 0.88 ms (1 to 8 axes) 0.88 ms (1 to 8 axes)
1.77 ms (9 to 16 axes)
3.55 ms (17 to 32 axes)
With software SV22 0.88 ms (1 to 4 axes) 0.88 ms (1 to 4 axes)
1.77 ms (5 to 8 axes) 1.77 ms (5 to 12 axes)
3.55 ms (13 to 24 axes)
7.11 ms (25 to 32 axes)
Program memory 14 k steps 14 k steps
Shared memory for multi-CPU operation 8 kByte 8 kByte
Shared memory for high speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards Not usable Not usable
Power consumption (5 V DC) 1.14 A 1.25 A
Weight 0.22 kg 0.23 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 98x27.4x114.3

Tab. 2-7: Specification comparison of Q172CPUN and Q173CPUN

Q172HCPU and Q173HCPU

Q172HCPU Q173HCPU
No. of I/O device points (usable on program) 8192 8192
Real I/O points 256 256
(I/O in Main and Extension Base Units)
No. of control axes 8 32
Operation cycle With software SV13 0.44 ms (1 to 3 axes) 0.44 ms (1 to 3 axes)
0.88 ms (4 to 8 axes) 0.88 ms (4 to 10 axes)
1.77 ms (11 to 20 axes)
3.55 ms (21 to 32 axes)
With software SV22 0.88 ms (1 to 5 axes) 0.88 ms (1 to 5 axes)
1.77 ms (6 to 8 axes) 1.77 ms (6 to 14 axes)
3.55 ms (15 to 28 axes)
7.11 ms (29 to 32 axes)
Program memory 14 k steps 14 k steps
Shared memory for multi-CPU operation 8 kByte 8 kByte
Shared memory for high speed data transfer in
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards Not usable Not usable
Power consumption (5 V DC) 1.14 A 1.25 A
Weight 0.22 kg 0.23 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 104.6x27.4x114.3

Tab. 2-8: Specification comparison of Q172HCPU and Q173HCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 2 11

Basics Specification comparison of CPU

Q172DCPU and Q173DCPU

It is only possible to mount a Q172DCPU or Q173DCPU on a Q38DB or Q312DB type main base
unit. The PLC CPU must be an universal model CPU (QnUD(H)).

Q172DCPU Q173DCPU
No. of I/O device points (usable on program) 8192 8192
Real I/O points 256 256
(I/O in Main and Extension Base Units)
No. of control axes 8 32
Operation cycle With software SV13 0.44 ms (1 to 6 axes) 0.44 ms (1 to 6 axes)
0.88 ms (7 and 8 axes) 0.88 ms (7 to 18 axes)
1.77 ms (19 to 32 axes)
With software SV22 0.44 ms (1 to 4 axes) 0.44 ms (1 to 4 axes)
0.88 ms (5 to 8 axes) 0.88 ms (5 to 12 axes)
1.77 ms (13 to 28 axes)
3.55 ms (29 to 32 axes)
Program memory 14 k steps 14 k steps
Shared memory for multi-CPU operation 8 kByte 8 kByte
Shared memory for high speed data transfer in 14 kByte 14 kByte
multi-CPU operation
Memory cards Not usable Not usable
Power consumption (5 V DC) 1.14 A 1.25 A
Weight 0.33 kg 0.33 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 98x27.4x119.3

Tab. 2-9: Specification comparison of Q172DCPU and Q173DCPU

NOTE For more informations about motion controllers and operating system software refer to the
technical catalogue MELSEC System Q and to the User's Manual of the module and the
software.

2 12
Specification comparison of CPU Basics

2.2.7 PC CPU module

The PC CPU module is a compact personal computer of high value which can be installed on
the main base unit. Combinations with other CPU modules in a multi-CPU system are possible.
Besides typical functions of a PC, the PC CPU can also handle PLC functions.

PC-CPU
CPU Ultra low voltage Intel Celereon M processor
Processing frequency 600 MHz
Memory 512 MB (main)/2 x 32 kB L1 (cache), 1 x 512 kB L22 (cache)
Video Integrated graphics board for a maximum resolution of 1280x1024
pixels, 16 mio. colours
Serial (RS232C) 2 (1 integrated 9-pin D-SUB connector and 1 optional interface at
the extension box which is connnected to "EX I/F")
Parallel 1
USB 4 (3 integrated 9-pin D-SUB connector and 1 optional interface at the
Interfaces extension box which is connnected to "EX I/F")
Keyboard/mouse 1 x PS/2 connector (keyboard and mouse can be used at the same
time with the Y junction cable)
LAN 1 x ETHERNET interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Monitor 1 x 15-pin H-DSUB
Connections for drives 1 x disk drive, 2 x hard disk (silicon hard disks are supported)
PC card slots 2 PCMCIA, CardBus
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 98x55.2x115

Tab. 2-10: PC CPU module of MELSEC System Q

NOTE For more informations about PC CPU modules refer to the technical catalogue MELSEC
System Q.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 2 13

Basics Specification comparison of CPU

2.2.8 C-Controller CPU

The C-Controller CPUs Q06CCPU and Q12DCCPU with the powerful VxWorks operating sys-
tem are programmed in C or C++. Therefore they are suitable especially for complex tasks in
data processing.
The C-Controller CPUs have the same compact dimensions as the other CPU modules of
MELSEC System Q and can be combined with them in a multi-CPU system or operate stand
alone. Additionally the C-Controller CPUs are compatible with CoDeSys.

Q06CCPU-V-H01 Q12DCCPU-V
CPU SH-4 SH-4A
Operating system VxWorks 5.4 (preinstalled)) VxWorks 6.4 (preinstalled))
Programming language C or C++ C or C++
Development tool Tornado 2.1* Workbench 2.6.1
No. of I/Os 4096 (X/Y0 to X/YFFF) 4096 (X/Y0 to X/YFFF)
Memory User area RAM 3 MB
ROM 6 MB
Work RAM 64 MB 128 MB
Battery-backed-up RAM 128 kB 128 kB
Serial (RS232C) 1 1
Interfaces USB 1
LAN 1 x 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T 2 x 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
PC card slots 1 slot for a TYPE I CF-Card; 1 slot for a TYPE I CF-Card;
Max. 1 GB CF card is suppor- Max. 8 GB CF card is suppor-
ted ted
Power consumption (5 V DC) 0.71 A 0.93 A
Weight 0.17 kg 0.24 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 98x27.4x89.3 98x27.4x115

Tab. 2-11: Specifications of C-Controller CPUs

* Licenses with special conditions for Mitsubishi users are available directly from Wind River

NOTE For more informations about C-Controller CPUs refer to the technical catalogue MELSEC
System Q.

2 14
Overall configuration System configuration

3 System configuration
3.1 Overall configuration
Following figure shows the system configuration for a Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU using a com-
bination of main base unit, CPU and power supply module.

Battery Q00JCPU I/O module and Special

(Q6BAT) Q00UJCPU function module of
MELSEC System Q

Extension base unit Extension cable Extension base unit

Q52B or Q55B (QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, (Q63B, Q65B, Q68B,
QC30B, QC50B, QC100B) Q68RB, Q612B)

I/O module and Special Power supply module, I/O

function module of module and Special function
MELSEC System Q module of MELSEC System Q

QH00075C

Fig. 3-1: System configuration for Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 31

System configuration Overall configuration

Following figure shows the system configuration for a Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU or
Q01UCPU (all without slots for a memory card).

LITHIUM BATTERY
MITSUBISHI

Q-CPU: Battery
Q00, Q01, Q00U, Q01U (Q6BAT)

Main base units Power supply module, I/O

(Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38SB, module and Special function
Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, module of MELSEC System Q
Q38DB, Q312DB, Q38RB)

Extension base unit Connection cable Extension base unit

Q52B or Q55B (QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, (Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q68RB
QC30B, QC50B, QC100B) or Q612B)

I/O module and Special Power supply module, I/O

function module of MELSEC module and Special function
System Q module of MELSEC System Q

QH00074C

Fig. 3-2: System configuration for Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

NOTES It is only possible to mount the redundant power supplies Q63RP and Q64RP on a main
base unit of type Q38RB and Q68RB. Each base unit has two slots for redundant power sup-
plies.

The slim type main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB cant be connected to extension
base unit.

32
Overall configuration System configuration

System configuration for CPU types Q02(P)(H) to Q25(P)H and Q02U to Q26UD(E)H:

MITSUBISHI

LITH IUM BA TTER Y

MITSUBISHI

Q-CPU:
SRAM/Flash/ATA- Q02(H) to Q25H, Battery
Memory card Q02U to Q26UD(E)H, (Q6BAT)
Q02PH to Q25PH

L ITHIU M B AT TER Y
MITSUBISHI

Battery Battery
holder (Q7BAT)
Q7BAT-SET

Main base unit Power supply module, I/O mod-

(Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38SB, ule and Special function module
Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, of MELSEC System Q
Q38DB, Q312DB, Q38RB)

Extension base unit Connection cable Extension base unit

Q52B or Q55B (QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, (Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q68RB or
QC30B, QC50B, QC100B) Q612B)

I/O module and Special function Power supply module, I/O mod-
module of MELSEC System Q ule and Special function module
of MELSEC System Q

QH00001C

Fig. 3-3: System configuration for CPUs Q02(H) to Q25H, Universal CPUs Q02U to
Q26UD(E)H and Process CPUs Q02PH to Q25PH

NOTES Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

It is only possible to mount the redundant power supplies Q63RP and Q64RP on a main
base unit of type Q38RB and Q68RB. Each base unit has two slots for redundant power sup-
plies.

The process CPU modules Q02PHCPU to Q25PHCPU cant be mounted on the slim type
main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB.

The slim type main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB cant be connected to extension
base unit.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 33

System configuration Overall configuration

The following figure shows the system configuration of a redundant PLC with Q12PRH or
Q25PRH CPU types.
The redundant PLC of MELSEC System Q consists of two systems with identical configurations
(power supply, CPU module, network modules, etc.), which are connected by tracking cable.
One PLC controls the system, while the other one is in standby for reserve.
For more informations about configuration and applicable modules refer to the technical cata-
logue MELSEC System Q and to the User's Manual of the redundant PLC module.

MITSUBISHI

L ITHIU M B ATTER Y
MITSUBISHI

SRAM/Flash/ATA Q12PRHCPU, Battery

Memory card Q25PRHCPU (Q6BAT)

LI THIUM B AT TE RY
MI TSUBISHI

Battery holder Battery

(Q7BAT)
Q7BAT-SET

Main base unit Power supply module, I/O mod-

(Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q38RB, ule and Special function module
Q312B) of MELSEC System Q

Fig. 3-4: System configuration for Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU

NOTES Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

It is only possible to mount the redundant power supplies Q63RP and Q64RP on a main
base unit of type Q38RB and Q68RB. Each base unit has two slots for redundant power sup-
plies.

It is not possible to connect an extension base unit to a main base unit with a redundant
CPU up to serial no. 09012... The expansion can be done by remote I/O station via
MELSECNET/H network.
It is possible to connect up to maximum seven extension base units with totally 63 modules
with a redundant Q12PRHCPU or Q25PRHCPU beginning at serial no. 09012 In the first
stage the base unit Q65WRB should be connected directly to the main base unit. The base
units Q68RB should be used for the second to seventh stage.

34
Overall configuration System configuration

Following figure shows the configuration for programming of a Q-CPU:

MITSUBISHI

SRAM/Flash/ATA PLC CPU module of USB cable

Memory card* MELSEC System Q (not for Q00J-, Q00-, Q01-
and Q02CPU)

RS232 cable
(QC30R2)

PCMCIA Adapter unit Personal computer with

Q2MEM-ADP, not for programming software
Q00J, Q00 and Q01

QH00002C

Fig. 3-5: Programming the PLC CPU of MELSEC System Q

* The basic model QCPU, Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU do not support memory cards.

NOTES Programming of the Q-CPUs is done with the following software:

- GX Developer
- GX IEC Developer

For special functions of the Q-CPUs and for transfer of programs to memory cards or over
USB cable please refer to the Users Manuals of GX IEC Developer and GX Developer.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 35

System configuration Overall system

3.2 Overall system

3.2.1 Modules of MELSEC System Q

CPU modules

Power
consumption
Type Description (mA) Note
5 V DC 24 V DC
Basic model QCPU
Q00JCPU Combination of  2048 total I/O points 200  5 slots for I/O
base unit, power  256 direct accessible I/O points modules
supply module  Power supply
and CPU  Memory capacity:
8 k steps specification:
Input:
100-240 V AC
Output:
5 V DC, 3 A
Q00CPU CPU modules;  2048 total I/O points 250
suitable for  1024 direct accessible I/O points
multi-CPU oper-
ation;  Memory capacity:
also refer to 8 k steps
Q01CPU CPU perform-  2048 total I/O points 270
ance specifica-  1024 direct accessible I/O points
tions chapter 12
 Memory capacity:
14 k steps
High performance model QCPU
Q02CPU CPU modules;  8192 total I/O points 600  Slot for
suitable for  4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
multi-CPU oper-
ation;  Memory capacity:
also refer to 28 k steps
Q02HCPU CPU perform-  8192 total I/O points 640  Slot for
ance specifica-  4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
tions chapter 12  USB interface
 Memory capacity:
28 k steps
Q06HCPU  8192 total I/O points 640
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
 Memory capacity:
60 k steps
Q12HCPU  8192 total I/O points 640
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
 Memory capacity:
124 k steps
Q25HCPU  8192 total I/O points 640
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
 Memory capacity:
252 k steps

Tab. 3-1: Overview of the CPU modules

36
Overall system System configuration

Power
consumption
Type Description (mA) Note
5 V DC 24 V DC
Universal model QCPU
Q00UJCPU Combination of  8192 total I/O points 370  5 slots for I/O
base unit, power  256 direct accessible I/O points modules
supply module  USB interface
and CPU;  Memory capacity:
suitable for 10 k steps  Power supply
multi-CPU oper- specification:
ation Input:
100-240 V AC
Output:
5 V DC, 3 A
Q00UCPU Universal model  8192 total I/O points 330  USB interface
QCPU; suitable  1024 direct accessible I/O points
for multi-CPU
operation;  Memory capacity:
also refer to 10 k steps
Q01UCPU CPU perform-  8162 total I/O points 330
ance specifica-  1024 direct accessible I/O points
tions chapter 12
 Memory capacity:
15 k steps
Q02UCPU  8192 total I/O points 230  Slot for
 2048 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
20 k steps
Q03UDCPU  8192 total I/O points 330
Q03UDECPU  4096 direct accessible I/O points 460  Slot for
 Memory capacity: memory card
30 k steps  USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port
Q04UDHCPU  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
Q04UDEHCPU 40 k steps 490  Slot for
memory card
 USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port
Q06UDHCPU  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
Q06UDEHCPU 60 k steps 490  Slot for
memory card
 USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port

Tab. 3-1: Overview of the CPU modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 37

System configuration Overall system

Power
consumption
Type Description (mA) Note
5 V DC 24 V DC
Universal model QCPU (continued)
Q10UDHCPU Universal model  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
QCPU; suitable  4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
for multi-CPU  USB interface
operation;  Memory capacity:
Q10UDEHCPU also refer to 100 k steps 490  Slot for
CPU perform- memory card
ance specifica-  USB interface
tions chapter 12  Built-in
ETHERNET
port
Q13UDHCPU  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
Q13UDEHCPU 130 k steps 490  Slot for
memory card
 USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port
Q20UDHCPU  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
Q20UDEHCPU 200 k steps 490  Slot for
memory card
 USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port
Q26UDHCPU  8192 total I/O points 390  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
Q26UDEHCPU 260 k steps 490  Slot for
memory card
 USB interface
 Built-in
ETHERNET
port

Tab. 3-1: Overview of the CPU modules

38
Overall system System configuration

Power
consumption
Type Description (mA) Note
5 V DC 24 V DC
Process CPU
Q02PHCPU  8192 total I/O points 640  Slot for
 4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
 Memory capacity:  USB interface
28 k steps  Additional
Q06PHCPU  8192 total I/O points 640 process control
CPU modules; instructions
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
suitable for
multi-CPU oper-  Memory capacity:
ation; 60 k steps
Q12PHCPU also refer to  8192 total I/O points 640
CPU perform-
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
ance specifica-
tions chapter 12  Memory capacity:
124 k steps
Q25PHCPU  8192 total I/O points 640
 4096 direct accessible I/O points
 Memory capacity:
252 k steps
Redundant CPU
Q12PRHCPU Redundant  8192 total I/O points 640  Slot for
CPU;  4096 direct accessible I/O points memory card
Multi-CPU oper-  USB interface
ation is not pos-  Memory capacity:
sible 124 k steps  Additional
process control
Q25PRHCPU Redundant  8192 total I/O points 640 instructions
CPU;  4096 direct accessible I/O points
Multi-CPU oper-  For setting up
ation is not pos-  Memory capacity: a redundant
sible 252 k steps system

Tab. 3-1: Overview of the CPU modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 39

System configuration Overall system

Standard modules of System Q

No. of Power
occu- consumption (mA)
Type Description Note
pied I/O
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
Power supply modules
Q61P 5 V DC; 6 A Input:
100240 V AC
Q61P-A1 Input:
100120 V AC
Q61P-A2 Input:
200240 V AC
Q61P-D Input: With life detection
100240 V AC function
Q61SP 5 V DC; 2 A Input: For slim type
100240 V AC main base unit
Q3SB only
Q62P 5 V DC; 3 A Input:
24 V DC; 0.6 A 100240 V AC
Q63P 5 V DC; 6 A Input:
24 V DC
Q63RP 5 V DC; 8.5 A Input: Redundant power
24 V DC supply module
Q64P 5 V DC; 8.5 A Input:
100120 V AC
200240 V AC
Q64PN Input:
100240 V AC
Q64RP 5 V DC; 8.5 A Input:
Redundant power
100120 V AC
supply module
200240 V AC
Digital input modules
QX10 16 Input points, 100120 V AC; 50/60 Hz 16 50
QX10-TS AC voltage
QX28 8 Input points, 100240 V AC; 50/60 Hz 16 50
QX40 16 Input points, 24 V DC 16 50
QX40-TS
QX40-S1 16 Input points, 24 V DC 16 60
Positive common
QX41 32 Input points, 24 V DC 32 75
type
QX41-S1 32 Input points, 24 V DC 32 75
QX42 64 Input points, 24 V DC 64 90
QX42-S1 64 Input points, 24 V DC 64 90
QX70 16 Input points, 512 V DC 16 55
Negative or posi-
QX71 32 Input points, 512 V DC 32 70
tive common type
QX72 64 Input points, 512 V DC 64 85
QX80 16 Input points, 24 V DC 16 50
QX80-TS
Negative com-
QX81 32 Input points, 24 V DC 32 75
mon type
QX82 64 Input points, 24 V DC 64 90
QX82-S1 64 Input points, 24 V DC 64 90

Tab. 3-2: Standard modules of System Q

3 10
Overall system System configuration

No. of Power
occu- consumption (mA)
Type Description pied I/O Note
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
Digital output modules
QY10 Relay output module, 16 Output points 16 430
QY10-TS 24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A
QY18A Relay output module, 8 Output points 16 430
24 V DC/240 V AC, 2 A
QY22 Triac output module, 16 Output points 16 250
100240 V AC, 0.6 A
QY40P Transistor output module, 16 Output points 16 65 10
QY40P-TS 12/24 V DC, 0.1 A
QY41P Transistor output module, 32 Output points 32 105 20
12/24 V DC, 0.1 A
sink type
QY42P Transistor output module, 64 Output points 64 150 20
12/24 V DC, 0.1 A
QY50 Transistor output module, 16 Output points 16 80 20
12/24 V DC, 0.5 A
QY68A Transistor output module, 8 Output points 8 110
source/sink type
5/12/24 V DC, 0.5 A
QY70 Transistor output module, 16 Output points 16 95 90
5/12 V DC, 0.016 A (12 V DC)
sink type
QY71 Transistor output module, 32 Output points 32 150 170
5/12 V DC 0.016 A (12 V DC)
QY80 Transistor output module, 16 Output points 16 80 20
QY80-TS 12/24 V DC 0.5 A
source type
QY81P Transistor output module, 32 Output points 32 95 40
12/24 V DC 0.1 A
Combined I/O modules
QH42P 32 Input points, 24 V DC 32 130 15 Inputs:
32 Transistor outputs 12/24 V DC, 0.1 A positive common
QX48Y57 8 Input points, 24 V DC 16 80 10 type
7 Transistor outputs 12/24 V DC, 0.5 A Outputs:
sink type
Dummy module
QG60 Dummy module for unused slots 16
(vacant)

Tab. 3-2: Standard modules of System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 3 11

System configuration Overall system

Special function modules

No. of Power consump-

occu- tion (mA)
Type Description Note
pied I/O
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
High-Speed counter modules
QD62 2 Inputs (5/12/24 V DC); counting range 16 300
Outputs sink
32 Bit and max. counting frequency
type
200 kHz
QD62E 2 Inputs (5/12/24 V DC); Counting range 16 330
Outputs
32 Bit and max. counting frequency
source type
200 kHz
QD62D 2 differential inputs (5/12/24 V DC); 16 380
Outputs sink
Counting range 32 Bit and max. counting
type
frequency 500 kHz
QD60P8-G 8 Inputs (5/12/24 V DC); Counting range 32 580
16/32 Bit and max. counting frequency
30 kHz
Q63P6 6 Inputs (5 V DC); Counting range 32 Bit 32 590
and max. counting frequency 200 kHz
Positioning modules
QD70P4 4 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 550 65
QD70P8 8 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 740 120
QD75D1 1 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 520
QD75P1 1 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 400
QD75D2 2 axis positioning module with differential 32 560
driver output
QD75P2 2 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 460
QD75D4 4 axis positioning module with differential 32 820
driver output
QD75P4 4 axis positioning module with pulse output 32 580
QD75M1 1 axis positioning module, SSCNET 32 400
SSCNET
QD75M2 2 axis positioning module, SSCNET 32 400
interface
QD75M4 4 axis positioning module, SSCNET 32 400
Analog input/output modules
Q62AD-DGH Analog input module with 2 inputs 16 220
(4 to 20 mA)
Q64AD Analog input modules with 4 inputs 16 630
Q64AD-GH (0 to 20 mA; 10 to +10 V DC) 16 890
Q66AD-DG Analog input module with 6 inputs 16 420 360
(0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) Isolated
Q68AD-G Analog input modules with 8 inputs 16 460 channels
(0 to 20 mA; 10 to +10 V DC)
Q68ADV Analog input module with 8 inputs 16 640
(10 to +10 V DC)
Q68ADI Analog input module with 8 inputs 16 640
(0 to 20 mA)
ME1AD8HAI-Q Analog input module with 8 inputs 32 320 300
(0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) and function of a
HART-Master station
Q62DA Analog output modules with 2 outputs 16 330 120
Q62DA-FG (0 to 20 mA; 10 to +10 V DC) 16 370 300 Isolated
channels
Q62DAN 16 330 150
Q64DA Analog output module with 4 outputs 16 340 180
Q64DAN (0 to 20 mA; 10 to +10 V DC) 16 340 240
Q66DA-G Analog output module with 6 outputs 16 620 220 Isolated
(0 to 22 mA; 12 to +12 V DC) channels
Q68DAV Analog output module with 8 outputs 16 390 190
Q68DAVN (10 to +10 V DC) 16 380 200
Q68DAI Analog output module with 8 outputs 16 380 280
Q68DAIN (0 to 20 mA) 16 380 270

Tab. 3-3: Special function modules

3 12
Overall system System configuration

No. of Power consump-

occu- tion (mA)
Type Description pied I/O Note
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
Temperature control modules
Q64TCRT Temperature control module with 4 chan- 16 550
nels
1 transistor output and 1 Pt100 input per
channel
Q64TCRTBW Temperature control module with 4 chan- 32 640
nels
occupies 2
1 transistor output and 1 Pt100 input per
slots
channel
Broken wire detection
Q64TCTT Temperature control module with 4 chan- 16 550
nels
1 transistor output and
1 thermocouple input per channel
Q64TCTTBW Temperature control module with 4 chan- 32 640
nels
occupies 2
1 transistor output and
slots
1 thermocouple input per channel
Broken wire detection
Temperature acquisition modules
Q64TD Temperature acquisition modules with 4 16 500
Q64TDV-GH channels 16 500
1 thermocouple input per channel
Isolated
Q68TD-G-H01/H02 Temperature acquisition module with 8 16 490
channels
channels
1 thermocouple input per channel
Q64RD Temperature acquisition module with 4 16 600
channels
1 Pt100- or JPt100 input per channel
Q64RD-G Temperature acquisition module with 4 16 620
channels
1 Pt100-, JPt100 or Ni100 input per channel Isolated
Q68RD3-G Temperature acquisition module with 4 16 540 channels
channels
1 Pt100-, JPt100 or Ni100 input per channel
Loop control module
Q62HLC Loop control module with 2 channels, 16 270 70
1 thermocouple input, 1 voltage (100 to
+100 mV DC; 10 to +10 V DC) or current
(0 to 20 mA DC) input per channel
1 current output (4 to 20 mA) per channel
Load cell input module
Q61LD Module for direct connection of load cells 16 480
High speed data logger module
QD81DL96 Module for status logging of PLC devices 32 460
Interrupt module
QI60 Interrupt module with 16 inputs 16 60 Positive com-
mon type

Tab. 3-3: Special function modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 3 13

System configuration Overall system

Communication- , interface- and remote modules

No. of oc- Power consump-

Type Description cupied I/O tion (mA) Note
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
Q series Ethernet interface module
QJ71E71-B5 ETHERNET module (Client/Server) with 32 500
10BASE5 interface
Up to 4
QJ71E71-B2 ETHERNET module (Client/Server) with 32 700
modules per
10BASE2 interface
CPU
QJ71E71-100 ETHERNET module (Client/Server) with 32 500
10BASE-T- and 100BASE-TX interface
Q series MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H network module
QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H module (Master/local sta- 32 750
tion), token bus, coaxial bus system
QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H module (Floating Master) 32 550
QJ71LP21G Token ring, optical ring system Up to 4
modules per
QJ71LP21GE
CPU
QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H module (Slave module) 32 850
QJ72LP25G Token-Ring, optical ring system
QJ72LP25GE
Q80BD71BR11 Interface board for personal computer 670
Token bus, coaxial bus system
Q80BD71LP21G Interface boards for personal computer 450 PC boards
Q80BD71LP21-25 Token ring, optical ring system 460
Q80BD71LP21GE 450
CC-Link communication modules
QJ61BT11N CC-Link Master/local station 32 460 Up to 4
modules per
CPU
A80BDE-J61BT11 Interface board for personal computer 400
CC-Link Master/local station
PC boards
A80BDE-J61BT13 Interface board for personal computer 400
CC-Link local station
AJ65SBTB1-8D Remote module with 8 digital inputs 8
(24 V DC)
AJ65BTB1-16D Remote module with 16 digital inputs 16 60
(24 V DC)
AJ65BTB2-16D Remote module with 16 digital inputs 16 60
(24 V DC)
AJ65SBTB1-16D1 Remote module with 16 digital inputs 16
(24 V DC)
AJ65FBTA4-16DE Remote module with 16 digital inputs 16 Protection
IP67
AJ65BTC1-32D Remote module with 32 digital inputs 32 70
(24 V DC)
AJ65SBTB1-32D1 Remote module with 32 digital inputs 32
(24 V DC)
AJ65BTB1-16DT Remote module with 8 digital inputs 16 70
(24 V DC) and 8 digital outputs
(24 V DC; 0.5 A/channel, 4 A total)
AJ65FBTA42-16DTE Remote module with 8 digital inputs and 8 16 Protection
digital outputs IP67
AJ65SBTB1-8TE Remote module with 8 digital outputs 8
(12/24 V DC; 0.1 A/channel)
AJ65SBTB2N-8R Remote module with 8 relay outputs 8
(24 V DC/240 V AC; 2A)
AJ65BTB1-16T Remote module with 16 digital outputs 16 80
(12/24 V DC; 0.5 A/channel, 4 A total)
AJ65SBTB2N-16R Remote module with 16 relay outputs 16
(24 V DC/240 V AC; 2 A)
AJ65BTC1-32T Remote module with 32 digital outputs 32 115
(12/24 V DC; 0.1 A/channel, 2 A total)

Tab. 3-4: Communication- , interface- and remote modules

3 14
Overall system System configuration

No. of oc- Power consump-

Type Description cupied I/O tion (mA) Note
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
CC-Link communication modules (continued)
AJ65BTB2-16R Remote module with 16 relay outputs 16 85
(24 V DC/240 V AC; 2 A/channel, 8 A total)
AJ65BT-64AD Remote analog input module with 4 inputs 2 Stat. 120
(20 to 20 mA; 10 to 10 V DC)
AJ65BT-64DAV Remote analog output module with 2 Stat. 180
4 outputs (10 to +10 V DC)
AJ65BT-64DAI Remote analog output module with 2 Stat. 270
4 outputs (4 to 20 mA)
AJ65BT-64RD3 Remote module for temperature measure- 4 Stat. 170
ment with 4-channel input (3-wire-type
Pt100)
AJ65BT-64RD4 Remote module for temperature measure- 4 Stat. 170
ment with 4-channel input (4-wire-type
Pt100)
AJ65BT-68TD Remote module for temperature measure- 4 Stat. 81
ment with 8-channel thermocouple input
AJ65BT-D62 Remote High speed counter module 4 Stat. 70
2 Inputs; Counting range 23 Bit and max.
counting frequency 200 kHz
AJ65BT-D62D Remote High speed counter module 4 Stat. 100
2 Inputs; Counting range 23 Bit and max.
counting frequency 400 kHz
AJ65BT-D62D-S1 Remote High speed counter module 4 Stat. 120
2 differential inputs; Counting range 23 Bit
and max. counting frequency 400 kHz
AJ65BT-R2 Remote interface module with RS232C 1 Stat. 110
interface
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 Remote 2 axis positioning module with 4 Stat. 300
pulse output
FR-A5NC CC-Link interface for frequency inverters 1 Stat.
FR-E5NC FR-A500 and FR-E500
DeviceNet communication module
QJ71DN91 Master for DeviceNet 32 170
PROFIBUS communication modules
QJ71PB92D Master for PROFIBUS/DP 32 570
QJ71PB92V Master for PROFIBUS/DP (V1/V2 protocol) 32 570
QJ71PB93D Slave for PROFIBUS/DP 32 360
AJ95FPBA2-16TE PROFIBUS/DP slave with 16 outputs 16 Protection
(24 V DC; 1 A/channel) IP67
AJ95TB32-16DT PROFIBUS/DP slave with 8 inputs 8+8 18
(24 V DC) and 8 outputs
(24 V DC; 0.8 A/channel)
AJ95FPBA42-16DTE PROFIBUS/DP slave with 8 inputs and 8 out- 8+8
puts
ST1PSD ST series power supply module for supply- 2+2
ing 5 V DC to the head station and to other
modules and distribution of 24 V DC; input
voltage: 24 V DC
ST1PDD ST series power supply module for supply- 2+2
ing the I/O modules with 24 V DC; input
voltage: 24 V DC
ST1H-PB PROFIBUS/DP slave, ST series base mod- 530
ule (head station)
ST1X2-DE1 ST series input module with 2 digital inputs 2+2 85
(24 V DC)
ST1X4-DE1 ST series input module with 4 digital inputs 4+4 95
(24 V DC)
ST1X16-DE1 ST series input module with 16 digital 16 + 16 120
inputs (24 V DC)
ST1Y2-TE2 ST series output module with 2 transistor 2+2 90
outputs (24 V DC; 0.5 A/output; 1 A total)

Tab. 3-4: Communication- , interface- and remote modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 3 15

System configuration Overall system

No. of oc- Power consump-

Type Description cupied I/O tion (mA) Note
points 5 V DC 24 V DC
PROFIBUS communication modules (continued)
ST1Y16-TE2 ST series output module with 16 transistor 16 + 16 150
outputs (24 V DC; 0.5 A/output; 4 A total)
ST1Y2-TPE3 ST series output module with 2 transistor 2+2 95
outputs (24 V DC; 1 A/output; 2 A total)
ST1Y16-TPE3 ST series output module with 16 transistor 16 + 16 160
outputs (24 V DC; 1 A/output; 4 A total)
ST1Y2-R2 ST series output module with 2 relay out- 2+2 90
puts (24 V DC/240 V AC; 2 A/output; 4 A
total)
ST1AD2-V ST series analog input module with 2 volt- 4+4 95
age inputs (10 to +10 V)
ST1AD2-I ST series analog input module with 2 cur- 4+4 95
rent inputs (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA)
ST1DA2-V ST series output module with 2 voltage out- 4+4 95
puts (10 to +10 V)
ST1DA2-I Analog output module with 2 current out- 4+4 95
puts (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA)
ST1TD2 ST series analog temperature input module 4+4 95
with 2-channel thermocouple input
AS-I communication modules
QJ71AS92 Master for AS-I 32 570
MC-ASI-PS AS-I bus power supply module
(Input voltage: 230 V AC
Output 30.5 V DC, 2.8 A)
MC-ASI X4M12 AS-I module with 4 digital inputs 4 max. The stated
(1224 V DC) 250 power con-
MC-ASI X8M12 AS-I module with 8 digital inputs 8 max. sumption is
(1224 V DC) 250 valid with a
supply volt-
age of 26.5
to 31.6 V.
MC-ASI Y4M12-05 AS-I module with 4 digital outputs 4 max.
(Ub0.8 V DC, 0.5 A/output; 2 A total) 50
MC-ASI Y4M12-2 AS-I module with 4 digital outputs 4 max.
(Ub0.8 V DC, 2 A/output; 4 A total) 50
MC-ASI Y8M12 AS-I module with 8 digital outputs 8 max.
(Ub0.8 V DC, 0.5 A/output; 4 A total) 50
see below
MC-ASI X2Y2M12 AS-I module with 2 digital inputs 4 max.
(1224 V DC) and 2 digital outputs 250
(Ub0.8 V DC, 2 A/output; 4 A total)
MC-ASI X4Y4M12 AS-I module with 4 digital inputs max.
(1224 V DC) and 4 digital outputs 250
(Ub0.8 V DC, 0.5 A/output; 2 A total)
The stated power consumption of the modules is valid with a supply voltage of 26.5 to 31.6 V. The output voltage of
the output modules is maximum Ub0.8 V.
Interface modules
QJ71C24N Interface module with 1 RS232C and 1 32 280
RS422/485 interface
QJ71C24N-R2 Interface module with 2 RS232C interfaces 32 240
QJ71C24N-R4 Interface module with 2 RS422/485 inter- 32 390
faces
QD51-R24 High speed Interfaces: 32 310
communication module 1 RS232C
(programmable) 1 RS422/485
QD51 Interfaces: 32 260
2 RS232C

Tab. 3-4: Communication- , interface- and remote modules

3 16
Overall system System configuration

Base units and accessories

Type Description Note

Main base units
Q32SB For power supply module, CPU and up to 2  Slim type main base unit
modules  It is not possible to connect an exten-
Q33SB For power supply module, CPU and up to 3 sion base unit.
modules
Q35SB For power supply module, CPU and up to 5
modules
Q33B-E For power supply module, CPU and up to 3  Connection of extension base units
modules possible
Q35B-E For power supply module, CPU and up to 5
modules
Q38B-E For power supply module, CPU and up to 8
modules
Q38DB For power supply module, CPU and up to 8  Connection of extension base units
modules possible
 Multiple CPU high speed transmission
base unit
Q38RB-E For 2 redundant power supply modules, CPU and  Connection of extension base units
up to 8 modules possible
Q312B-E For power supply module, CPU and up to 12
modules
Q312DB For power supply module, CPU and up to 8  Connection of extension base units
modules possible
 Multiple CPU high speed transmission
base unit
Extension base units
Q52B For up to 2 modules  Without power supply, connect only
Q55B For up to 5 modules with cable QC05B
Q63B For up to 3 modules  Depending on the CPU type are up to
Q65B For up to 5 modules 7 extension base units connectible to
the main base unit with maximum 64
Q65WRB For 2 redundant power supply modules and up to 5 slots totally.
modules (redundant local I/O of a redundant
system)
Q68B For power supply module and up to 8 modules
Q68RB-E For 2 redundant power supply modules and up to 8
modules
Q612B For power supply module and up to 12 modules
Connection cable
QC05B Cable length: 0.45 m  For connecting Q52B and Q55B only
QC06B Cable length: 0.6 m  For connecting the base units
QC12B Cable length: 1.2 m
QC30B Cable length: 3 m
QC50B Cable length: 5 m
QC100B Cable length: 10 m
Tracking cable
QC10TR Cable length: 1 m For connecting the 2 CPU modules of a
QC30TR Cable length: 3 m redundant system.

Tab. 3-5: Base units and accessories

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 3 17

System configuration Overall system

Type Description Note

Memory cards
Q2MEM-1MBS 1 MByte SRAM
Q2MEM-2MBS 2 MByte SRAM
Q3MEM-4MBS 4 MByte SRAM For Universal model QCPU only
Q3MEM-8MBS 8 MByte SRAM
Q2MEM-2MBF 2 MByte Flash card
Q2MEM-4MBF 4 MByte Flash card
Q2MEM-8MBA 8 MByte ATA memory card
Q2MEM-16MBA 16 MByte ATA memory card
Q2MEM-32MBA 32 MByte ATA memory card
Memory card adapter
Q2MEM-ADP Memory card adapter for PCMCIA slot
Batteries
The battery is shipped together with the
Q6BAT Buffer battery for CPU module
CPU.
Q2MEM-BAT Memory card Q2MEM-1MBS buffer battery
Connector disconnection prevention holder for RS232 cable
This is recommended, when a cable is
Q6HLD-R2 Mechanical fixing device for connector connected permanently to the RS232
interface, e. g. for connection to a GOT.

Tab. 3-5: Base units and accessories

3 18
Overall system System configuration

3.2.2 Outline of system configuration

System configuration
The figure shows a configuration with one main base unit and extension base units of the MELSEC System Q. A
High performance model CPU (Q02(H)- to Q25HCPU), a Universal model CPU (Q02U- to Q26UD(E)HCPU) or a
Process CPU (Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU) is used.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot
Extension cable
O
C 00 20 40 60 80 A0 C0 E0 100 120 140 160 Main base units
U
T P (Q312B)
U 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F BF DF FF 11F 13F 15F 17F

1st extension Power supply module

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
O 180 1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 2A0 2C0 2E0
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q612B)
19F 1BF 1DF 1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F 2BF2DF2FF

2nd extension Power supply module

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
O 300 320 340 360 380 3A0 3C0 3E0
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q68B)
31F 33F 35F 37F 39F 3BF 3DF3FF

3rd extension Power supply module

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
O 400 420 440 460 480 4A0 4C0 4E0
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q68B)
41F 43F 45F 47F 49F 4BF 4DF4FF

4th extension Power supply module

40 41 42 43 44
O 500 520 540 560 580
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q65B)
51F 53F 55F 57F 59F

5th extension Power supply module

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
O 5A05C0 5E0 600 620 640 660 680
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q68B)
5BF5DF5FF 61F 63F 65F 67F 69F

6th extension Power supply module

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
O 6A06C0 6E0 700 720 740 760 780
IU Extension base unit
NT (Q68B)
6BF 6DF6FF 71F 73F 75F 77F 79F

7th extension Power supply module

61 62 63
O 7A07C0 7E0 Extension base unit
IU
NT
(Q65B)
7BF7DF7FF

Power
supply
module These slots cant be used, because 64
modules are already mounted.

Tab. 3-6: System configuration

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 3 19

System configuration Overall system

System configuration
Maximum number of extension Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU : 2 extension stages
stages Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU: 4 extension stages
Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU : 7 extension stages
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU; Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25HCPU
Maximum number of mountable Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU : 16
I/O modules Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU : 24
Q02UCPU : 36
Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU : 64
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU; Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25HCPU
Number of occupied I/O points Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU : 256
Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU : 1024
Q02UCPU : 2048
Q02(H)CPU, Q06CPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU : 4096
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU; Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25HCPU
Main base units  Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
 Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
 Q38DB, Q312DB
 Q38RB
Extension base units  Q52B, Q55B
 Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
 Q68RB
Extension cable QC05B (0.45 m), QC06B (0.6 m), QC12B (1.2 m), QC30B (3.0 m),
QC50B (5.0 m), QC100B (10.0 m)
Notes  Note the maximum number of extension base units, which are connectable to
the main base unit.
 Depending on the CPU type, 16, 24, 36 or 64 modules can be mounted on
the main and on the extension base units. An error occurs, when the maxi-
mum number of modules is exceeded.
 The overall length of extension cables must not be longer than 13.2 m.
 Connect the OUT connector of an extension base unit and the IN connector
of the adjacent extension base unit by an extension cable.
 Do not lay tracking cables close together or close to main circuit power lines,
high-voltage power lines, or load lines.
 Set the extension stage numbers consecutively. Set an unique number for
each extension base.
 The extension base units Q38RB, Q68RB have slots for two redundant power
supplies Q63RP or Q64RP.
 The slim type main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB cant be con-
nected to extension base unit.
 The process CPU modules Q02PH-, Q06PH-, Q12PH- and Q25PHCPU cant
be mounted on the slim type main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB.

Tab. 3-6: System configuration

3 20
Devices CPU modules

4 CPU modules
4.1 Devices
The names and data ranges of devices which can be used in the CPU module are shown in the
following tables.

4.1.1 Basic model QCPU

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
X Input X07FF X07FF Input of external signals to the PLC,
(No. of I/O device (total number of I/O points: 2048) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
points: 2048) X03FF switch, binary switch
X0FF (direct (I/O points accessible via base units:
accessible: 256) 1024)
Y Output Y07FF Y07FF Output of signals for control of external
(No. of I/O device (total number of I/O points: 2048) devices by program like magnetic
points: 2048) Y03FF valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
Y0FF (direct (I/O points accessible via base units: digital displays etc.
accessible: 256) 1024)
M Special SM01023 (1024) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L02047 (2048) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S02047 (2048) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link B03FF (1024) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
relay* output directly
F Annuncia- F01023 (1024) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T0511 (512) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instruc- Measurement unit of the low-speed
tions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive Max. 512 unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* The retentive timers are specified by parameters Measurement unit of the high-speed
(preset to 0) retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
the instructions.
C Counter* C0511 (512) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
Interrupt Max. 128 rupt processing
Counter* (0 point by default, setting by parameters)
D Data reg- D011135 (11136) Register for data storage
ister*
SD Special SD01023 (1024) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data

Tab. 4-1: Device list for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 41

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
W Link reg- W07FF (2048) Register for Link data in a network
ister*
R File regis- R032767 (32768) Extension of the data register area
ter ZR032767 (32768)
SB Link spe- SB03FF (1024) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW03FF (1024) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z09 (10) Register for indexing of devices
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P0299 (300) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0127 (128) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can grams
be set up by parameters (2 to 1000 ms, 1 ms unit).
Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Devices for the status of input or output
input bits for subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Only FX0 to FX4 and FY0 to FY4 can
output be used in a program.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
function mod- ory of the intelligent function module
ule device directly.

Tab. 4-1: Device list for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU

* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

42
Devices CPU modules

4.1.2 High performance model QCPU

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
X Input X01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Input of external signals to the PLC,
X00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
switch, binary switch
Y Output Y01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Output of signals for control of external
Y00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) devices by program like magnetic
valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
digital displays etc.
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link relay* B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the Measurement unit of the low-speed
instructions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive Max. 2048, The retentive timers are specified by parame- unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* ters (preset to 0) Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
the instructions. 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or
Interrupt Max. 256 interrupt processing
Counter* (0 point by default, setting by parameters)
D Data D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
register*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of
register special data
W Link W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
register*

Tab. 4-2: Device list for Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- and Q25HCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 43

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
R File regis-  When using the internal RAM: Extension of the data register area
ter R032767 (32768) for Q02CPU,
R065535 (65536) for Q02H- and Q06HCPU, When using a Flash memory card only
R0131071 (131072) for Q12H- and Q25HCPU with reading of the file registers is possible.
block conversion in steps of 32768 registers Its not possible to use an ATA memory
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: card.
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
517120 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 2 MB Flash or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1041408 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card:
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1042432 file registers are accessible.
 When using the internal RAM:
ZR032767 (32768) for Q02CPU,
ZR065535 (65536) for Q02H- and Q06HCPU,
ZR0131071 (131072) for Q12H- and Q25HCPU
(Block conversion is not necessary)
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR0517119 (517120),
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 2 MB Flash- or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR01041407 (1041408),
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card:
ZR01042431 (1042432),
Block conversion is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW07FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z015 (16) Register for indexing of devices
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P04095 (4096) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0255 (256) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit).
Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Device for the status of input bits for
input subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Device for the status of output bits for
output subroutines.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent func- Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
tion module ory of the intelligent function module
device directly.

Tab. 4-2: Device list for Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- and Q25HCPU
* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

44
Devices CPU modules

4.1.3 Universal model QCPU

Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU
X Input X01FFF X01FFF Input of external signals to the PLC,
(No. of I/O device (total number of I/O points: 8192) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
points: 8192) X03FF (I/O points accessible via base switch, binary switch
X0FF (direct units: 1024)
accessible: 256)
Y Output Y07FF Y07FF Output of signals for control of external
(No. of I/O device (total number of I/O points: 2048) devices by program like magnetic
points: 2048) Y03FF (I/O points accessible via base valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
Y0FF (direct units: 1024) digital displays etc.
accessible: 256)
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
relay* output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instruc- Measurement unit of the low-speed
tions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive The retentive timers are specified by parameters (preset to unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* 0). Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
the instructions. 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
rupt processing
D Data reg- D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
ister*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
data reg-
ister*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data
W Link reg- W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
ister*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
link regis-
ter*

Tab. 4-3: Device list for Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 45

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU
R File regis- R032767 (32768) Extension of the data register area
ter With block conversion in steps of 32768
registers, 65536 file registers are acces-
sible.
ZR065535 (65536); Block conversion
is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW01FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z019 (20) Register for indexing of devices
ister
32 Bit- Z018 (10)
Index reg- (Two index registers are each combined
ister in one word)
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P0511 (512) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0127 (128) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit).
Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Devices for the status of input or output
input bits for subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Only FX0 to FX4 and FY0 to FY4 can
output be used in a program.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
function mod- ory of the intelligent function module
ule device directly.

Tab. 4-3: Device list for Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

46
Devices CPU modules

Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU and Q03UDECPU

Range (total number)

Device name Q03UDCPU Explanation
Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
X Input X01FFF (total number X01FFF (total number Input of external signals to the PLC,
of I/O points: 8192) of I/O points: 8192) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
X007FF (I/O points acces- X00FFF (I/O points acces- switch, binary switch
sible via base units: 2048) sible via base units: 4096)
Y Output Y01FFF (total number Y01FFF (total number Output of signals for control of external
of I/O points: 8192) of I/O points: 8192) devices by program like magnetic
Y007FF (I/O points acces- Y00FFF (I/O points acces- valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
sible via base units: 2048) sible via base units: 4096) digital displays etc.
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link relay* B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the Measurement unit of the low-speed
instructions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive The retentive timers are specified by parameters (preset to unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* 0). Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
the instructions. 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
rupt processing
D Data regis- D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
ter*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
data regis-
ter*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data
W Link regis- W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
ter*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
link regis-
ter*

Tab. 4-4: Device list of Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU and Q03UDECPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 47

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Q03UDCPU Explanation
Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
R File regis-  When using the internal RAM: Extension of the data register area
ter R032767 (32768) with block conversion in steps of
32768 registers, 65536 (for Q02UCPU) resp. 98304 (for When using a Flash memory card only
Q03UD(E)CPU) file registers are accessible. reading of the file registers is possible.
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: Its not possible, to use an ATA memory
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers, card.
517120 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 2 MB Flash or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1040384 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 4 MB Flash or 4 MB SRAM memory card:
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
2087936 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 8 MB SRAM memory card:
With block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
4184064 file registers are accessible.
 When using the internal RAM:
ZR065535 (65536) for Q02UCPU,
ZR098303 (98304) for Q03UD(E)CPU
(Block conversion is not necessary.)
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR0517119 (517120),
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 2 MB Flash or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR01041407 (1041408),
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 4 MB Flash or 4 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR02087935 (2087936),
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 8 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR04184063 (4184064),
Block conversion is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW07FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z019 (20) Register for indexing of devices
ister
32 Bit- Z018 (10)
Index reg- (Two index registers are each combined in one word)
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P04095 (4096) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0 255 (256) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit).
Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Device for the status of input bits for
input subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Device for the status of output bits for
output subroutines.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines

Tab. 4-4: Device list of Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU and Q03UDECPU

48
Devices CPU modules

Range (total number)

Device name Q03UDCPU Explanation
Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent func- Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
tion module ory of the intelligent function module
device directly.

Tab. 4-4: Device list of Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU and Q03UDECPU

* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 49

CPU modules Devices

Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU and

Q26UD(E)CPU

Range (total number)

Device name Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Explanation
Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH
X Input X01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Input of external signals to the PLC,
X00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
switch, binary switch
Y Output Y01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Output of signals for control of external
Y00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) devices by program like magnetic
valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
digital displays etc.
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
No. of step relays can be changed in the parameters for marking one step number in a program
CPUs beginning at serial no. 10042... . for step operation of a process.
B Link relay* B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the Measurement unit of the low-speed
instructions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive The retentive timers are specified by parameters (preset to unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* 0). Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms, 0.1
the instructions. ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
rupt processing
D Data regis- D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
ter*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
data regis-
ter*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data
W Link regis- W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
ter*
Extended Specified by parameters (preset to 0).
link regis-
ter*

Tab. 4-5: Device list of CPU types Q04UD(E)H to Q26UD(E)H

4 10
Devices CPU modules

Range (total number)

Device name Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Explanation
Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH
R File regis-  When using the internal RAM: R032767 (32768) Extension of the data register area
ter with block conversion in steps of 32768 registers, When using a Flash memory card only
131072 (for Q04UD(E)HCPU), reading of the file registers is possible.
393216 (for Q06UD(E)CPU), Its not possible, to use an ATA memory
524288 (for Q10UD(E)CPU and Q13UD(E)CPU) or card.
655360 (for Q20UD(E)CPU and Q26UD(E)CPU)
file registers are accessible.
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: with block con-
version in steps of 32768 registers, 517120 file registers
are accessible.
 When using a 2 MB Flash or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
with block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1041408 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 4 MB Flash or 4 MB SRAM memory card:
with block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
2087936 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 8 MB SRAM memory card: with block con-
version in steps of 32768 registers, 4184064 file regis-
ters are accessible.
 When using the internal RAM:
ZR0131071 (131072) for Q04UD(E)HCPU,
ZR0393215 (393216) for Q06UD(E)HCPU,
ZR0524287 (524288) for Q10UD(E)-/ Q13UD(E)CPU
ZR0655359 (655359) for Q20UD(E)-/ Q26UD(E)CPU
Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: ZR0517119
(517120), Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 2 MB Flash or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR01041408 (1041407), Block conversion is not nec-
essary.
 When using a 4 MB Flash or 4 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR02087935 (2087936), Block conversion is not nec-
essary.
 When using a 8 MB SRAM memory card: ZR04184063
(4184064), Block conversion is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW07FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z019 (20) Register for indexing of devices
ister
32 Bit- Z018 (10)
Index reg- (Two index registers are each combined in one word)
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P04095 (4096) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0 255 (256) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit). Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Device for the status of input bits for
input subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Device for the status of output bits for
output subroutines.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines

Tab. 4-5: Device list of CPU types Q04UD(E)H to Q26UD(E)H

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 11

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Explanation
Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent func- Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
tion module ory of the intelligent function module
device directly.

Tab. 4-5: Device list of CPU types Q04UD(E)H to Q26UD(E)H

The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The
table shows the preset values.

4 12
Devices CPU modules

4.1.4 Process CPU

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
X Input X01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Input of external signals to the PLC,
X00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
switch, binary switch
Y Output Y01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Output of signals for control of external
Y00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) devices by program like magnetic
valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
digital displays etc.
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link relay* B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the Measurement unit of the low-speed
instructions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive Max. 2048, The retentive timers are specified by parame- unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* ters (preset to 0) Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
the instructions. 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
Interrupt Max. 256 rupt processing
Counter* The interrupt counters are specified by parameters (preset
to 0).
D Data regis- D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
ter*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data
W Link regis- W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
ter*

Tab. 4-6: Device list of Q02PH-, Q06PH-, Q12PH- and Q25PHCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 13

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
R File regis-  When using the internal RAM: R065535 (65536) for Extension of the data register area
ter Q02PH- and Q06PHCPU, R0131071 (131072) for When using a Flash memory card only
Q12PH- and Q25HCPU with block conversion in steps of reading of the file registers is possible.
32768 registers Its not possible to use an ATA memory
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: with block con- card
version in steps of 32768 registers, 517120 file registers
are accessible.
 When using a 2 MB Flash- or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
with block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1041408 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card: with block con-
version in steps of 32768 registers, 1042432 file regis-
ters are accessible.
 When using the internal RAM:
ZR065535 (65536) for Q02PH- and Q06PHCPU,
ZR0131071 (131072) for Q12PH- and Q25PHCPU
(Block conversion is not necessary.)
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: ZR0517119
(517120), Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 2 MB Flash- or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR01041407 (1041408), Block conversion is not nec-
essary.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card: ZR01042431
(1042432), Block conversion is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW07FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z015 (16) Register for indexing of devices
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P04095 (4096) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0255 (256) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit). Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Device for the status of input bits for
input subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Device for the status of output bits for
output subroutines.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent func- Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
tion module ory of the intelligent function module
device directly.

Tab. 4-6: Device list of Q02PH-, Q06PH-, Q12PH- and Q25PHCPU

* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

4 14
Devices CPU modules

4.1.5 Redundant CPU

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
X Input X01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Input of external signals to the PLC,
X00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) e. g. by key switch, rotary switch, limit
switch, binary switch
Y Output Y01FFF (total number of I/O points: 8192) Output of signals for control of external
Y00FFF (I/O points accessible via base units: 4096) devices by program like magnetic
valves, magnetic contactors, lamps,
digital displays etc.
M Special SM02047 (2048) Predefined devices for special applica-
relay tions and additional functions of the
PLC.
Internal M08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay*
L Latch L08191 (8192) Auxiliary devices of the PLC
relay* Latch relays are buffered at power shut
down
S Step relay S08191 (8192) Application like M device, e. g. for
marking one step number in a program
for step operation of a process.
B Link relay* B01FFF (8192) Bit devices in a network, which cant be
output directly
F Annuncia- F02047 (2048) Flag for marking of an error.
tor* If the error flag is set by an error recog-
nition program during RUN operation,
the corresponding error code will be
stored in the special relay SD.
V Edge V02047 (2048) This relay is set by the negativ or posi-
relay* tiv edge of the operation result,
depending on the instruction.
T Timer* T02047 (2048) Incremental timer
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the Measurement unit of the low-speed
instructions. retentive timers: 1 to 1000 ms, 1 ms
T Retentive Max. 2048, The retentive timers are specified by parame- unit (100 ms by default)
(ST) timer* ters (preset to 0) Measurement unit of the high-speed
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by retentive timers: 0.1 to 100.0 ms,
the instructions. 0.1 ms unit (10.0 ms by default)
C Counter* C01023 (1024) Incremental counter for normal or inter-
Interrupt Max. 256 rupt processing
Counter* (0 point by default, setting by parameters)
D Data regis- D012287 (12288) Register for data storage
ter*
SD Special SD02047 (2048) Predefined register for storage of spe-
register cial data
W Link regis- W01FFF (8192) Register for Link data in a network
ter*

Tab. 4-7: Device list of Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 15

CPU modules Devices

Range (total number)

Device name Explanation
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
R File regis-  When using the internal RAM: R0131071 (131072) with Extension of the data register area
ter block conversion in steps of 32768 registers When using a Flash memory card only
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: with block con- reading of the file registers is possible.
version in steps of 32768 registers, 517120 file registers Its not possible to use an ATA memory
are accessible. card
 When using a 2 MB Flash- or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
with block conversion in steps of 32768 registers,
1041408 file registers are accessible.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card: with block con-
version in steps of 32768 registers, 1042432 file regis-
ters are accessible.
 When using the internal RAM: ZR0131071 (131072)
(Block conversion is not necessary.)
 When using a 1 MB SRAM memory card: ZR0517119
(517120), Block conversion is not necessary.
 When using a 2 MB Flash- or 2 MB SRAM memory card:
ZR01041407 (1041408), Block conversion is not nec-
essary.
 When using a 4 MB Flash memory card: ZR01042431
(1042432), Block conversion is not necessary.
SB Link spe- SB07FF (2048) Bit devices in a network
cial relay
SW Link spe- SW07FF (2048) Register for Link data
cial regis-
ter
Z Index reg- Z015 (16) Register for indexing of devices
ister
N Nesting N014 (15 Steps) Displays the nesting of Master control
processes
P Pointer P04095 (4096) Target of a jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
The common pointer address is set by parameters. CALL, JMP)
I Interrupt I0255 (256) Pointer for branching of interrupt pro-
Pointer The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 grams
to 31 can be set up by parameters (0.5 to 1000 ms, 0.5 ms
unit). Default values:
I28: 100 ms; I29: 40 ms; I30: 20 ms; I31: 10 ms
K Decimal  K -3276832767 (16 bit instructions) For specification of command values
constant  K -21474836482147483647 (32 bit instructions) for timer and counter, pointer, interrupt
pointer, number of bit devices and
instruction values
H Hexadeci-  H0FFFF (16 bit instruction) For specification of instruction values
mal con-  H0FFFFFFFF (32 bit instruction)
stant
FX Function FX0F (16) Device for the status of input bits for
input subroutines.
FY Function FY0F (16) Device for the status of output bits for
output subroutines.
FD Function FD04 (5) Status register for the input and output
register bits for subroutines
Link direct Specified form: J\X, J\Y, J\W, Device for accessing the link device
device J\B, J\SW, J\SB directly. Exclusively used for CC-Link
IE controller network and MELSEC-
NET/H.
Intelligent func- Specified form: U\G Device for accessing the buffer mem-
tion module ory of the intelligent function module
device directly.

Tab. 4-7: Device list of Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU

* The address areas for these devices can be set with a programming device by parameters. The table shows the
preset values.

4 16
Memory capacity CPU modules

4.2 Memory capacity

A CPU of MELSEC System Q can access different memory devices, which differ in the drive
number. In addition to the internal memory (RAM and FlashROM) all CPU types (except
Q00(U)JCPU, Q00(U)CPU and Q01(U)CPU) have an extension slot for a memory card.
Depending on the type of memory card, the access to this slot is by drive 1 or drive 2.

CPU module Memory card

Memory card (RAM)

Program memory (Drive 1)
(Drive 0) Memory card (ROM)
(Drive 2)

The Basic model QCPU (Q00JCPU, Q00CPU,

Standard RAM Q01CPU), Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU do not support
(Drive 3) memory cards.
Unavailable for Q00JCPU
and Q00UJCPU

Standard ROM
(Drive 4

BLOCKD~1

Fig. 4-1: Memory configuration of MELSEC System Q-CPU modules

The next pages show the memory capacities of the CPU modules.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 17

CPU modules Memory capacity

Basic model QCPU and High performance model QCPU

Q02
Drive Memory type Q00J Q00 Q01 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H

No. 0 Program memory [Steps] 8k 8k 14 k 28 k 60 k 124k 252 k

(CPU module built-in Program memory [kByte] 58 94 112 240 496 1008
memory)
Storable number of files 6  28 60 124 252 
No. 1 Memory card (RAM) max. 2 MB
Storable number of files max. 287
No. 2 Flash card (ROM) max. 4 MB
ATA card max. 32 MB
Storable number of files Flash card (ROM): max. 288
ATA card: max. 512
No. 3 RAM [kByte] 64 Q02: 64 256
(CPU module built-in 128  64 128
memory) Q02H:
64
(128 )
Storable number of files 1 2
3
No. 4 Standard ROM [kByte] 58 94 112 240 496 1008
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 6 28 60 124 252
memory)

Tab. 4-8: Storable data and storage locations of Basic model QCPU and High performance
model QCPU
 Each of parameter, PLC parameter, sequence program, SFC program, device comment, and device initial value
files can be stored.
 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs.
 For CPU modules with function version B (serial No. (first 5 digits) is 04122 or later).
For CPU modules with function version B (serial No. (first 5 digits) is 04012 or later).

4 18
Memory capacity CPU modules

Universal model QCPU

Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU and Q03U(E)CPU

Q03U
Drive Memory type Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02U
Q03UE
No. 0 Program memory [Steps] 10 k 15 k 20 k 30 k
(CPU module built-in Program memory [kByte] 40 60 80 120
memory)
Storable number of files 32 64 124
No. 1 Memory card (RAM) max. 8 MB
Storable number of files max. 319
No. 2 Flash card (ROM) max. 4 MB
ATA card max. 32 MB
Storable number of files Flash card (ROM):
max. 288
ATA card: max. 511
No. 3 RAM [kByte] 128 128 192
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 1 3 3
memory)
No. 4 Standard ROM [kByte] 256 512 512 1024
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 128 128 256
memory)

Tab. 4-9: Storable data of Universal model QCPUs Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U and
Q03U(E)

Q04UD(E)CPU to Q26UD(E)CP

Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH

Drive Memory type
Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH
No. 0 Program memory [Steps] 40 k 60 k 100 k 130 k 200 k 260 k
(CPU module built-in Program memory [kByte] 160 240 400 520 800 1040
memory)
Storable number of files 124 252
No. 1 Memory card (RAM) max. 8 MB
Storable number of files max. 319
No. 2 Flash card (ROM) max. 4 MB
ATA card max. 32 MB
Storable number of files Flash card (ROM): max. 288
ATA card: max. 511
No. 3 RAM [kByte] 256 768 1024 1280
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 3
memory)
No. 4 Standard ROM [kByte] 512 1024 2048 4098
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 256
memory)

Tab. 4-10: Storable data of Universal model QCPUs Q04UD(E)CPU to Q26UD(E)CP

 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 19

CPU modules Memory capacity

Process CPU

Drive Memory type Q02PH Q06PH Q12PH Q25PH

No. 0 Program memory [Steps] 28 k 60 k 124k 252 k
(CPU module built-in Program memory [kByte] 112 240 496 1008
memory)
Storable number of files 28 60 124 252 
No. 1 Memory card (RAM) max. 2 MB
Storable number of files max. 287
No. 2 Flash card (ROM) max. 4 MB
ATA card max. 32 MB
Storable number of files Flash card (ROM): max. 288
ATA card: max. 512
No. 3 RAM [kByte] 128 256
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 2
memory)
3
No. 4 Standard ROM [kByte] 112 240 496 1008
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 28 60 124 252
memory)

Tab. 4-11: Storable data of process CPUs

 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs.
 For CPU modules with function version B (serial No. (first 5 digits) is 04122 or later).

Redundant CPU

Drive Memory type Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU

No. 0 Program memory [Steps] 124k 252 k
(CPU module built-in Program memory [kByte] 496 1008
memory)
Storable number of files 124 252 
No. 1 Memory card (RAM) max. 2 MB
Storable number of files max. 287
No. 2 Flash card (ROM) max. 4 MB
ATA card max. 32 MB
Storable number of files Flash card (ROM): max. 288
ATA card: max. 512
No. 3 RAM [kByte] 256
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 2
memory)
3
No. 4 Standard ROM [kByte] 496 1008
(CPU module built-in Storable number of files 124 252
memory)

Tab. 4-12: Storable data of Redundant CPUs

 The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs.
 For CPU modules with function version B (serial No. (first 5 digits) is 04122 or later).

4 20
Notes for handling CPU modules

4.3 Notes for handling

Precautions
Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin. Do not remove
the printed-circuit board of each module from its case.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits.

NOTE Fixing the module with a screw

The modules of MELSEC System Q can be secured with an additional screw (M312) to the
base unit. Under normal conditions this screw is not needed. But it is recommended to use the
screw, if large vibration is expected.
Tighten the module fixing screws within the specified tightening torque range of 36 to 48 Ncm.

CAUTION:

E Do not open the case of a module. Do not modify a module. This may cause fire,
injuries or malfunction.
Use the product in the environment within the general specifications described in
the Hardware Manual of MELSEC System Q. Never use the product in areas with
dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive or flammable gas, vibrations or
impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or wind and rain.
Cut off all phases of the power source externally before starting the installation or
wiring work. Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.
Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module. Doing so
may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the
battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.
After the first use of the product, do not mount or remove the module to or from
the base unit, and the terminal block to or from the module more than 50 times (IEC
61131-2 compliant) respectively. Exceeding this limit may cause malfunction.
Before handling modules, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static
electricity from the human body.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 21

CPU modules Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

4.4 Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

This chapter explains the part names and settings of the PLCs with basic model CPU, high per-
formance model CPU, process CPU and redundant CPU. The following section 4.5 is about the
part names and settings of the PLCs with universal model CPU.

4.4.1 Part names of CPU modules

Q00JCPU





QH00086C

Fig. 4-2: Part names of Q00JCPU

4 22
Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs CPU modules

No. Name Application

 POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5 V DC. Turns on in green during normal output of
5 V DC.
 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
Executes sequence program operation.
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
When an error that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/
STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". The CPU is not in
"RUN" mode.

To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program/parameters, perform the fol-
lowing operations.
- Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
- Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN".

To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program/parameters without per-
forming a reset, perform the following operation:
- Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to
"RUN".
 ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER: When an error is detected that stops operation.
 Base mounting hole This hole is for fixing the Q00JCPU with a screw.
 Battery Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function
and backup power time function.
Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires.
pin Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the
battery from consuming.
 RUN/STOP/RESET  RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
switch  STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like.

RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.

Tab. 4-13: Part names of Q00JCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 23

CPU modules Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

Q00CPU and Q01CPU






BAT.

RESET L.CLR


STOP

E000

Fig. 4-3: Part names of Q00CPU and Q01CPU

4 24
Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs CPU modules

No. Name Application

 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN". Exe-
cutes sequence program operation.
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP". When an
error that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/
STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". The CPU is not in
"RUN" mode.

To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program/parameters, perform the fol-
lowing operations.
- Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
- Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN".

To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program/parameters without per-
forming a reset, perform the following operation:
- Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to
"RUN".
 ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER: When an error is detected that stops operation.
 Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.
 Battery Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function
and backup power time function.
Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires. Lead wires are disconnected from the
pin connector when shipping to prevent the battery from consuming.
 RUN/STOP/RESET Switch for setting the operation mode
switch  RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
 STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like.

RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.
 Module fixing screw Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3x12 screw)
hole
 Module fixing latch Latch used to fix the module to the base unit.

Tab. 4-14: Part names of Q00CPU and Q01JCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 25

CPU modules Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

Q02(P)(H)CPU, Q06(P)HCPU, Q12(P)HCPU and Q25(P)HCPU

 

EJECT

 MODE


RUN
ERR.
USER

 BAT.


BOOT.

ON SW
1


C

 A 2
R 3
D 4
5
STOP RUN


RESET L.CLR





Fig. 4-4: Part names of Q02(P)(H)-, Q06(P)H-, Q12(P)H- and Q25(P)HCPU

No. Name Application

 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 MODE LED Indicates the mode of the CPU module:
 GREEN: Q mode
 ORANGE: A mode

Tab. 4-15: Part names of Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12(P)H- and Q25(P)HCPU

4 26
Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs CPU modules

No. Name Application

 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: During operation with the RUN/STOP switch set to "RUN". Executes
sequence program operation.
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP switch set to "STOP". When an error
that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP switch set
to "STOP" and then the RUN/STOP switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN".
The CPU is not in "RUN" mode.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following
operations:
- Set the RUN/STOP switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
- Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch.
- Restart the programmable controller power.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following
operations.
- Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch.
- Restart the programmable controller power.
(If the RUN/STOP switch is set from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN" after chang-
ing the parameters, intelligent function module parameters will not be
updated.)
 ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER: When an error is detected that stops operation. (Flickers together
with the BOOT LED when automatic write to standard ROM is completed nor-
mally.)
 USER LED Display of user messages:
 ON: Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator (F) turned ON
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER: Execution of latch clear
BAT. LED Displays the status of the battery
 ON: Battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module or
memory card.
 OFF: Normal
 BOOT LED Indication of boot operation
 ON: Start of boot operation.
 OFF: Non-execution of boot operation.
 FLICKER: When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally.
(The ERR. LED flashes too)

Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.
 Memory card Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
EJECT button
 Memory card install- Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
ing connector
 USB connector Connector for connection with USB-compatible programming device.
(Not available for Q02CPU)
 RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.
 DIP switches Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module. For the system protec-
(System settings) tion and the valid parameter drives of the DIP switches, refer to section 4.4.2.
 RUN/STOP switch Switch for setting the operation mode
 RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
 STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET/L.CLR Switch for resetting the CPU and clearing the latches
switch  RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like. After performing reset, always return this switch to the neutral
position.
 L.CLR: Latch Clear, used to turn "Off" or clear to "zero" all latch area data set
in the parameter.
 Module fixing screw Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit (M3x12 screw). (optional).
hole
 Module fixing latch Latch used to fix the module to the base unit.
 Battery Backup battery for use of program memory, standard RAM, clock function and
the backup power time function.
 Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires. Lead wires are disconnected from the
pin connector when shipping to prevent the battery from consuming.

Tab. 4-15: Part names of Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12(P)H- and Q25(P)HCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 27

CPU modules Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU

Compared to the QnHCPU the redundant CPU moduls have additional controls (refer to fig. 4-5),
which are explained in the following section.



EJECT

MODE


RUN
ERR.
USER

 BAT.
BOOT.
ON SW
1
C
A 2
R 3
D 4
5
STOP RUN

RESET L.CLR

Fig. 4-5: Part names of Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU

4 28
Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs CPU modules

No. Name Application

 BACKUP LED Indicates the backup or separate mode while the system is running normally:
 GREEN: Backup mode
 RED: Status in which control (RUN) cannot be continued by system
switching.
 ORANGE: Separate mode
 OFF: Debug mode (e. g. for optimising the program or trouble shooting)
The LED indication is as follows when the memory copy from control system to
standby system is executed:
LED of the standby system flickers (red or orange) during execution of
memory copy, and is on after normal completion.
BACKUP LED of the control system is on (red or yellow) during execution
of memory copy and after completion.
 CONTROL LED Indicates the CPU module operates as control system or standby system.
 ON: Control system (the standby system is normal and system switching is
available); Debug mode
 OFF: Standby system
 SYSTEM A LED System assignment
 ON: System A or debug mode.
 FLICKER: When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs
normally as the system A (keeps on flickering until the system A side tracking
cable is connected).
 OFF: System B (LED "SYSTEM B" LED turns on)
 SYSTEM B LED System assignment
 ON: System B or debug mode.
 FLICKER: When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs
normally as the system B (keeps on flickering until the system B side tracking
cable is connected).
 OFF: System A ("SYSTEM A" LED turns on.)
 TRACKING For data transfer both redundant PLCs are connected with a tracking cable.
connector

Tab. 4-16: Part names of Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU

4.4.2 DIP switches

The DIP switches are used for setting the system protection and the valid parameter drives for
CPU types Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q12P(R)H, Q25H and Q25P(R)H. All switches are preset
to off as factory default. Switches SW4 and SW5 must not be used (without function).

DIP switches SW1 SW2 SW3

System protection Parameter-valid drive
ON SW  OFF: No protection Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM (Drive 3)
1  ON: Protection SW2 SW3 Parameter drive:
2
3 OFF OFF Program memory (Drive 0)
4 ON OFF SRAM card (Drive 1)
5
OFF ON Flash card/ATA card (Drive 2)
ON ON Standard ROM (Drive 4)
QH00025C

Tab. 4-17: DIP switches

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 29

CPU modules Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs

4.4.3 Transfer of a program with a programming device

NOTE Before writing a program to the CPU module, set the system protect setting switch (DIP
switch: SW1) of the CPU module to off (not protected). Enter the correct password, if the
CPU is password secured.

When writing a program with CPU module set to "STOP"

When writing a program with the CPU placed in the STOP status, operate the switches in the fol-
lowing procedure:
To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared:
 Set the RESET/L.CLR switch resp. the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RESET position
once and return it to the original neutral position.
 Set the mode switch to RUN position.
The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held):
 Set the mode switch (RUN/STOP switch or RUN/STOP/RESET switch) to RUN position.
The RUN LED flashes.
 Set the mode switch to "STOP" position.
 Set the mode switch to "RUN" position again.
The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).

NOTES When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the
program to the boot source memory. If the program is not written to the boot source memory,
the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.

If the CPU is stopped and restarted by the programming device after program transfer, no
operation is needed for the switches of the CPU module.

When writing a a program while CPU module is running

When a program is written while CPU module is running, no operation is needed for the switches
of the CPU module.
At this time, the device memory data are not cleared.

NOTE While the CPU module is running (RUN status) program changes are done in the program
memory.
When a program was written to the program memory while CPU module is running, also
write the program to the boot source memory. If the program is not written to the boot source
memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.

4 30
Part names and settings of Qn(P)(R)(H)CPUs CPU modules

4.4.4 Latch clear operation

Latch clear (switch off or set to 0) can be performed for stored Latch data set by parameters.

NOTE The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each
device. The setting can be mode in the device setting of the PLC parameter.

Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU

The CPU modules Q00J, Q00 and Q01 are not equipped with a switch for latch clear operation.
Latch clear can only be performed by the remote latch clear operation of GX (IEC) Developer.

Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12(P)(R)HCPU, Q25(P)(R)HCPU

To perform latch clear, operate the switches in the following procedure:
 Set the RUN/STOP switch to "STOP".
 Set the RESET/L.CLR switch to the L.CLR position several times until the USER LED flashes
(ready for latch clear).
 Set the RESET/L.CLR switch to the L.CLR position one more time.
The USER LED turns off (latch clear complete).

NOTE In addition to the way of using the RESET/L.CLR switch for latch clear, remote latch clear
may be performed from GX (IEC) Developer.

4.4.5 Data transfer from memory card to standard ROM

 Power off the programmable controller.

 Insert the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the
CPU module.
 Set the DIP switches on the CPU module (section 4.4.2) so that the valid parameter drive
is matched with the memory card to be installed.
When a SRAM card is installed: SW2: On, SW3: Off
When a Flash card/ATA card is installed: SW2: Off, SW3: On
Power on the programmable controller.
 The BOOT LED will flash when automatic write to standard ROM is completed.
 Turn off the programmable controller.
 Remove the memory card, and then set the valid parameter drive to the standard ROM with
the CPU module's DIP switches.
Standard ROM: SW2: On, SW3: On
The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory
when the programmable controller is turned on to enable actual operations.

NOTE The Data transfer from memory card to standard ROM can be selected in the programming
software GX Developer or GX IEC Developer.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 31

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

4.5 Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

4.5.1 Part names of CPU modules

Q00UJCPU

    

 



With front cover open

  

  



 




 

 


  

Side face




Fig. 4-6: Part names of Q00UJCPU

4 32
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

No. Name Application

 Cover for extension Protective cover for extension cable connector.
cable connector Remove this cover when connecting an extension base unit.
 Base mounting hole Fixing holes (M4) for the base unit when not mounting on a DIN rail.
( 5 mm)
 POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5 V DC.
Turns on in green during normal output of 5 V DC.
 MODE LED Indicates the mode of the CPU module
 ON: Q mode
 OFF:
Executional conditioned device test in process
Forced on/off of external devices in process
 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: The PLC operates the program with cyclic processing (RUN status).
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP". When an
error that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: When parameters or a program is written during STOP and the
RUN/STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". The CPU is not
in "RUN" mode.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following oper-
ations:
Shift the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch (refer to section 4.5.3).
Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following
operations.
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is shifted from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP"
to "RUN" after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflec-
ted on the parameters related to the intelligent function module, such as the
network parameters.)
ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER:
When an error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
 USER LED Display of user messages:
 ON: Annunciator (F) turned on.
 OFF: Normal

BAT. LED Display of user messages:
 ON (green): Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the
standard ROM by the latch data backup is completed.
 FLICKER (green): Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by
latch data backup is completed.
 FLICKER (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module bat-
tery.
 OFF: Normal
 Module connector Connector used for mounting an I/O or intelligent function module.
To the connector of the spare space where no module is mounted, fit the acces-
sory connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from
entering)
 DIN rail adapter Holes for mounting a DIN rail adapter.
mounting holes
 Extension cable Connector for transferring signals to or from the extension base unit. Connect an
connector extension cable.
 LG terminal Power filter ground
 FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
 RUN/STOP/RESET  RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
switch  STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like.

Tab. 4-18: Part names of Q00UJCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 33

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

No. Name Application

 Power input termi- Power input terminals for connection of a 100 V AC to 240 V AC power supply.
nals
 RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.
 USB connector Connector for connection with USB-compatible programming device.
 Battery Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function
and backup power time function.
 Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires. Lead wires are disconnected from the
pin connector when shipping to prevent the battery from consuming.

Tab. 4-18: Part names of Q00UJCPU

4 34
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

With front cover open


37+27






Side face






Fig. 4-7: Part names of Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 35

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

No. Name Application

 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 MODE LED Indicates the mode of the CPU module
 ON: Q mode
 OFF:
Executional conditioned device test is in process
Forced on and off function for external I/O is in process.
Data backup and restore to/from memory card after exchange of the CPU.
 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: The PLC operates the program with cyclic processing (RUN status).
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP". When an
error that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: When parameters or a program is written during STOP and the
RUN/STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". The CPU is not
in "RUN" mode.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following oper-
ations:
Shift the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch (refer to section 4.5.3).
Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following
operations.
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is shifted from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP"
to "RUN" after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflec-
ted on the parameters related to the intelligent function module, such as the
network parameters.)
 ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER:
When an error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
 USER LED Display of user messages:
 ON: Annunciator (F) turned on.
 OFF: Normal
BAT. LED Display of user messages:
 ON (yellow): Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
 FLICKER (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module bat-
tery.
 ON (green): Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the
standard ROM by the latch data backup is completed.
 FLICKER (green): Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by
latch data backup is completed.
 OFF: Normal
 USB connector Connector for connection with USB-compatible programming device.

RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.
 RUN/STOP/RESET  RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
switch  STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like.
 Module fixing holes Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3x12 screw)
 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.
 Battery Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function
and backup power time function.
 Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires. Lead wires are disconnected from the
pin connector when shipping to prevent the battery from consuming.

Tab. 4-19: Part names of Q00UCPU and Q01UCPU

4 36
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,

Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU

With front cover open








 



Side face






Fig. 4-8: Part names of Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU or QUDHCPU

For the description of the part names please refer to page 4-39.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 37

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,

Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU

With front cover open















Side face






Fig. 4-9: Part names of Q03UDECPU or QUDEHCPU

4 38
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

No. Name Application

 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 MODE LED Indicates the mode of the CPU module
 ON: Q mode
 OFF:
Executional conditioned device test is in process
Forced on and off function for external I/O is in process
CPU module change function with memory card is in process
 RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
 ON: The PLC operates the program with cyclic processing (RUN status).
 OFF: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP". When an
error that stops operation is detected.
 FLICKER: When parameters or a program is written during STOP and the
RUN/STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". The CPU is not
in "RUN" mode.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following oper-
ations:
Shift the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch (refer to section 4.5.3).
Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following
operations.
Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is shifted from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP"
to "RUN" after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflec-
ted on the parameters related to the intelligent function module, such as the
network parameters.)
 ERR. LED Error indication
 ON: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected
(continuation of operation at error detection must be set in the parameter).
 OFF: Normal
 FLICKER:
 FLICKER:
When an error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
 USER LED Display of user messages:
 ON: Annunciator ( F) turned on
 OFF: Normal
BAT. LED Display of user messages:
 ON (yellow): Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
 FLICKER (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module bat-
tery.
 ON (green): Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the
standard ROM by the latch data backup is completed.
 FLICKER (green): Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by
latch data backup is completed.
 OFF: Normal
 BOOT LED Indication of boot operation
 ON: Start of boot operation
 OFF: Non-execution of boot operation

100M LED Transfer speed display of the ETHERNET interface
 ON: Connected at 100 Mbps
 OFF:
Connected at 10 Mbps
Not connected
 SD/RD LED Status display of the ETHERNET interface
 ON: Data being sent/received
 OFF: No data being sent/received
 Memory card Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
EJECT button
 Memory card install- Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
ing connector

Tab. 4-20: Part names of Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU and QUD(E)HCPU

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 39

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

No. Name Application

 USB connector Connector for connection with USB-compatible programming device.
 RS232 connector Connector for connecting a programming device (peripheral device) by RS232.
 Ethernet connector 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX-Connection (RJ45-Connector)
 RUN/STOP/RESET  RUN: Executes sequence program operation.
switch  STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initializa-
tion or like.
 Module fixing screw Hole for the screw used to secure to the base unit. (M3x12 screw)
hole
 Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
 Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.
 Battery Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function
and backup power time function.
 Battery connector For connection of the battery lead wires. Lead wires are disconnected from the
pin connector when shipping to prevent the battery from consuming.

Tab. 4-20: Part names of Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU and QUD(E)HCPU

4 40
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

4.5.2 Transfer of a program with a programming device

When writing a program with CPU module set to "STOP"

When writing a program with the CPU placed in the STOP status, operate the switches in the fol-
lowing procedure:
To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared:
 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RESET position once (approx. 1 second) and
return it to the STOP position.
 Set the mode switch to RUN position.
The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held):
 Set the mode switch (RUN/STOP/RESET switch) to RUN position.
The RUN LED flashes.
 Set the mode switch to "STOP" position.
 Set the mode switch to "RUN" position again.
The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).

NOTES When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the
program to the boot source memory. If the program is not written to the boot source memory,
the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.

If the CPU is stopped and restarted by the programming device after program transfer, no
operation is needed for the switches of the CPU module.

When writing a a program while CPU module is running

When a program is written while CPU module is running, no operation is needed for the switches
of the CPU module.
At this time, the device memory data are not cleared.

NOTE While the CPU module is running (RUN status) program changes are done in the program
memory.
When a program was written to the program memory while CPU module is running, also
write the program to the boot source memory. If the program is not written to the boot source
memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 41

CPU modules Part names and settings of universal CPU modules

4.5.3 Reset operation

For the Universal model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used to
switch between the RUN status and STOP status and to perform RESET operation. Moving the
RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the reset position will not reset it immediately.

NOTES Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing is complete
(the flashing ERR. LED turns off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset processing (the
ERR. LED is flashing), the switch will return to the STOP position and reset processing can-
not be completed.

Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips. To prevent the switch from being
damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.

Perform reset operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in following figure:

Start

....................... Reset operation is started using the

Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in
the "RESET" position. RUN/STOP/RESET switch.

RESET RUN

RUN/STOP/
STOP RESET switch

.......................
The ERR. LED flickers several times Reset is accepted and reset processing
(3 to 4 times) rapidly. is performed.

MODE

RUN Flickers
ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

.......................
The "ERR. LED" goes off . Reset is completed.

MODE

RUN Goes off

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

.......................
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET switch Reset is cancelled.
to the "STOP" position.
(Release switch)

RESET RUN

RUN/STOP/
STOP
RESET switch

End

Fig. 4-10: Reset operation for Universal model QCPU

4 42
Part names and settings of universal CPU modules CPU modules

4.5.4 Latch clear operation

Latch clear (switch off or set to 0) can be performed for stored Latch data set by parameters.

NOTE The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each
device. The setting can be mode in the device setting of the PLC parameter.

The Universal model QCPUs are not equipped with a switch for latch clear operation.
Latch clear can only be performed by the remote latch clear operation of GX (IEC) Developer.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 43

CPU modules Checking serial number and function version of the CPU module

4.6 Checking serial number and function version of the

CPU module
Certain functions and features, such as the memory capacity of the standard RAM, are deter-
mined by the serial number and the function version of the CPU. The serial number and function
version of the CPU module can be checked on the rating plate located on the side face of the
module:

MITSUBISHI PASSED

MODEL Serial number (first 5 digits)

Function version

SERIAL 020920000000000-B
LISTED 80M1
R
IND. CONT. EQ. C
R

MADE IN JAPAN

QH00090C

Fig. 4-11: Rating plate

The serial number is shown on the rating plate located on the front of the module. This does not
apply to the following CPU modules:
Modules manufactured in mid-September 2007 or earlier.
Redundant CPUs and Q00JCPU.

090911090910001-B

Serial number

Fig. 4-12: Serial number display on the front of the module

4 44
Checking serial number and function version of the CPU module CPU modules

The informations may also be checked using a programming device and the programming soft-
ware GX Developer (Version 6 or later) or GX IEC Developer during CPU operation. To display
the screen for checking the serial number and function version, select [Diagnostics] [System
monitor] and click the Product Inf. List button.

Serial number Function version

QH00089B_UK

Fig. 4-13: Product information list

On the screen, the serial number and function version of intelligent function modules can also
be checked.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 45

Checking serial number and function version of the CPU module CPU modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 4 46

Memory card Memory cards and batteries

5 Memory cards and batteries

5.1 Memory card
All CPU types of MELSEC System Q except Q00(U)JCPU, Q00(U)CPU and Q01(U)CPU are
equipped with a memory card slot. There are battery buffered RAM Memory cards (reading and
writing by CPU) and permanent ROM memory cards (only readible by CPU) available.

CPU module
Basic model QCPU and Redundant
High performance model Process CPU Universal model QCPU
QCPU CPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UD(E)CPU
Memory card Q02CPU
Q02PHCPU Q04UD(E)HCPU
Q00JCPU Q02HCPU Q00UJCPU
Q06PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q00CPU Q06HCPU Q00UCPU
Q12PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q10UD(E)HCPU
Q01CPU Q12HCPU Q01UCPU
Q25PHCPU Q13UD(E)HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU
Q2MEM-1MBS   
Q2MEM-2MBS   
Q3MEM-4MBS   
Q3MEM-8MBS   
Q2MEM-2MBF   
  
Q2MEM-4MBF   
Q2MEM-8MBA   
Q2MEM-8MBA   
Q2MEM-16MBA   
Q2MEM-32MBA   

Tab. 5-1: Memory cards and applicable CPU modules

: Not usable
: Usable

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 51

Memory cards and batteries Memory card

5.1.1 Specifications

Specifications
Memory card Type of Memory size  Memory size  External Weight
dimensions
memory [kByte] [Files] (HxWxD) [mm] [g]
Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM 1011.5 255 45x42.8x3.3 15
Q2MEM-2MBS 2034 287
Q3MEM-4MBS 4078 319 74x42.8x8.1 30
Q3MEM-8MBS 8172 319 31
Q2MEM-2MBF Flash card 2035 288 45x42.8x3.3 15
Q2MEM-4MBF 4079 288
Q2MEM-8MBA ATA card 7940  512 45x42.8x3.3 15
(ROM) 7948  (511 for Universal
7982 model QCPU)
Q2MEM-16MBA 15932 
15948 
15982
Q2MEM-32MBA 31854

Tab. 5-2: Memory card specifications

 after formatting
 For ATA card when the manufacturer control number is D or earlier
 For ATA card when the manufacturer control number is E
For ATA card when the manufacturer control number is F or later

The manufacturer control number of ATA cards

The manufacturer control number of the ATA card is written on the label on the back of the ATA
card. When character string including the manufacturer control number is 4 digits, the third digit
from the leftmost is the manufacturer control number.

Fig. 5-1:
Manufacturer control number of ATA cards

Manufacturer
control number

When character string is 3 digits, the manufacturer control number is "B".

52
Memory card Memory cards and batteries

ATA card memory size indication in special register SD603

When the ATA card is used, the value stored in the special register SD603 indicates the memory
size and differs depending on the manufacturer control number and CPU module type.
When the CPU module is the Universal model QCPU, the ATA card size is stored in SD603 in
units of K bytes.
When the module is not the Universal model QCPU, 8000, 16000, or 32000 is stored in SD603
and the value depends on the manufacturer control number and CPU module type

Value stored in special register SD603

Manufactur- High performance model QCPU, Process CPU

Memory card and Redundant CPU
er control No. Universal model QCPU
Serial No. (first 5 digits) Serial No. (first 5 digits)
is 09011 or earlier is 09012 or later
Q2MEM-8MBA "D" or earlier 8000 8000
"E" 16000 8000
"F" or later 32000 16000
Q2MEM-16MBA "D" or earlier 16000 16000
"E" 16000 16000 ATA card size
[kByte]
"F" or later 32000 32000
Q2MEM-32MBA "D" or earlier
"E" 32000 32000
"F" or later

Tab. 5-3: Memory size indication in special register SD603

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 53

Memory cards and batteries Memory card

5.1.2 Handling the memory card

Formatting of memory card

Any SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to use in the CPU module. Since the SRAM
or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted, format it using GX (IEC) Developer before use.
Formatting is not necessary for Flash cards.

NOTE Do not format an ATA card other than by GX Developer or GX IEC Developer.
(If formatted using format function of Microsoft Windows, the ATA card may not be usable
in a CPU module.)

SRAM card battery

A battery used to backup for power failure is supplied with the SRAM cards Q2MEM-1MBS,
Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS.
Before using the SRAM card, install the battery.

NOTES The battery of the CPU does not buffer the SRAM memory card, when the power supply is
shut off. Use a separate battery for the memory card.

The battery of the memory card does not buffer the data of the program memory and inter-
nal RAM of the CPU, when the power supply is shut off. Install a separate battery, to buffer
these memory areas.

Types of files which can be stored on memory card

For the types of the files that can be stored on each memory card, refer to the manuals of the
CPU modules used.

Errors when the installation of the memory card is wrong

Poor insertion of the memory card may result in "ICM.OPE.ERROR".
If the CPU module operation for an error is set to "Stop" in the Parameters, the CPU module
stops its operation upon the occurrence of "ICM.OPE.ERROR".

Increase of scanning time when the memory card is installed

When the memory card is installed, the scanning time is increased by several 10 ms max. 1 scan
is only added, when the CPU module executes mount processing.

54
Memory card Memory cards and batteries

5.1.3 Installing and removing a memory card

Memory cards Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS

Installation
The installation of the memory card is possible, when the power supply of the CPU is on.
Install the memory card into the CPU module, while paying attention to the orientation of
the memory card. Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the
memory card reaches that of the memory card EJECT button (refer to sections 4.4.1 and
4.5.1).

Memory card EJECT button

CPU module

Memory card

Insert the memory card in that way, that the type label and the
printed warning point to the left side.

QH00027C

Fig. 5-2: Install the memory card

Removal
When removing the memory card from the CPU module, press the memory card EJECT
button to pull out the memory card (refer to sections 4.4.1 and 4.5.1). Using plastic tweezers
to pull out the memory card is effective when the memory card cannot be removed smoothly.

Press the memory card EJECT button

CPU module

Remove the memory card

QH00028C

Fig. 5-3: Remove the memory card

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 55

Memory cards and batteries Memory card

Memory cards Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS

Installation
After installation the memory cards Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS stick out of the CPU
module main body. Therefore the lid of the CPU module must be removed and a memory
card protective cover has to be set to the CPU module after installation.
 Turn OFF power supply of the CPU module and remove the lid of the CPU module main
body.

Slightly bend the center of a lid to make space between

CPU module a projection and a mounting hole and remove the lid.

Projection

Fig. 5-4: Remove the lid

 Install a memory card to a memory card slot of the CPU module main body.

Memory card EJECT button

CPU module
Memory card

Insertion direction check

( mark)

Fig. 5-5: Installing a memory card

 Set a memory card protective cover to the CPU module

Fig. 5-6:
The cover protects the ATA memory
card, sticking out of the CPU module
CPU module main body.

56
Memory card Memory cards and batteries

Removal
When removing a memory card Q3MEM-4MBS or Q3MEM-8MBS from the CPU module
main body, the memory card protective cover must be removed.
 Turn OFF power supply of the CPU module and remove a memory card protective cover
from the CPU module.

Fig. 5-7:
Press To remove a memory card protective
cover, press fixing claws of top/
bottom.
CPU module

Remove
cover
Press

 Press the EJECT button to eject a memory card (refer to sections 4.4.1 and 4.5.1).

Memory card EJECT button

Push

CPU module

Fig. 5-8: Removing a memory card

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 57

Memory cards and batteries Memory card

To remove the memory card during power on

Special relays of the CPU indicate, if a memory card is installed and if it can be removed:
SM600 = 1: Memory card can be used.
SM600 = 0: Memory card cannot be used.
The special relay SM600 is set by the system, when the memory card is installed and ready
to use.
SM604 = 1: Memory card is being used.
SM604 = 0: Memory card is not being used.
When accessing the memory card by the CPU module the system sets or resets the special
relay SM604.
SM605 = 1: Memory card removal/insertion prohibited.
SM605 = 0: Memory card removal/insertion allowed.
SM605 is turned on/off by the user.
SM609 = 1: Memory card is being removed.
SM609 = 0: Memory card removal prohibited.
SM609 has to be set by the user before removing the memory card and will be reset by the
operating system of the CPU after removing the memory card.

Keep the following sequence when removing the memory card with power supply on:
 Turn off "SM605" if it is on.
 Turn on the special relay "SM609" using the sequence program or the programming device.
 Check the special relays SM600 and SM604 with the programming device, if they are reset.
Remove the memory card.

NOTE Note that the data in the memory card may be damaged if the above mentioned procedures
are not performed correctly.
Poor insertion of the memory card may result in "ICM.OPE.ERROR". Also, if the CPU mod-
ule operation for an error is set to "Stop" in the Parameters, the CPU module stops its oper-
ation upon the occurrence of "ICM.OPE.ERROR".

58
Memory card Memory cards and batteries

5.1.4 Setting the write protect switch

The data of the SRAM and FlashROM memory card can be protected aginst erasing with the
write protect switch.
After shipping, the write protection of the memory card is switched off, so that changing of data
is possible all the time.

Q3MEM-

Write protect switch

Write protect ON
Write protect ON
Write protect
switch

Fig. 5-9: Write protect switch of memory cards

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 59

Memory cards and batteries Batteries

5.2 Batteries
The specified life of the battery does not depend on the current consumption. Replace the bat-
tery always after this time even if there was no voltage failure during this time (refer to section
10.3.1).

5.2.1 Battery specifications

Item Q6BAT Q7BAT* Q2MEM-BAT Q3MEM-BAT

Classification Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage 3.0 V 3.0 V 3.0 V 3.0 V
Capacity 1800 mAh 5000 mAh 48 mAh 550 mAh
Battery life when 5 years (at 20 C)
stored
Application For data retention of the program memory, Power failure backup Power failure backup
standard RAM, and latch device during for SRAM card for SRAM card
power failure Q2MEM- Q3MEM-
Lithium content 0.49 g 1.52 g 0.014 g 0.15 g

Tab. 5-4: Battery specifications

* Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

5.2.2 Battery installation

The battery of the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU is behind the upper front cover of the CPU
module. At all other PLC CPU models of MELSEC System Q mounting of the battery is done
from the bottom side.
When shipping, the battery connector is disconnected, to prevent discharge or short circuit of
the battery during transport and storage.
Connect the battery before start up.

Q6BAT battery installation procedure

Open the CPU module front cover (for basic model QCPU) or the module bottom cover (for other
modules) and confirm that the battery is loaded correctly.
Insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case. Be sure that the insertion direc-
tion is correct.
At those modules where the battery is mounted from the bottom side, check if the connector is
properly inserted into the respective holder inside the battery case.

CPU module
Fig. 5-10:
Location of battery for Basic model QCPU

Connector

5 10
Batteries Memory cards and batteries

Fig. 5-11:
Location of the battery at the bottom side of
Connector
the module

Connector Battery
stopper

CPU module

Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure

NOTE Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

The following description of mounting the battery Q7BAT is for operation of the MELSEC
PLC in a non EU country and for increasing the battery capacity.
For dimensions of the CPU modules with mounted battery Q7BAT refer to the appendix.

The standard battery can be replaced by the battery Q7BAT with considerable higher capacity,
except for basic model CPUs Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU. The Q7BAT is not inserted into
the battery holder of the CPU module, but mounted with a separate housing under the CPU mod-
ule.
 Open the CPU module bottom cover.
 Disconnect the connector connecting the Q6BAT to the CPU module.
 Remove the Q6BAT and cover from the CPU module.
Connect the Q7BAT-SET (Battery Q7BAT and battery holder) to the battery connector of the
CPU module and set it into the connector holder of the battery holder.
 Mount the battery holder to the CPU module. The same notches are for fixing as for the
cover of the battery case.

CPU module front

QCPU

CPU module bottom

Q7BAT-SET

Connector

QH00100C

Fig. 5-12: Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 5 11

Memory cards and batteries Batteries

5.2.3 Battery installation into the memory card

The battery is not mounted into the battery holder to prevent discharge or short circuit during
transport and storage.
Insert the buffer battery into the memory card before start up.

Battery installation into the SRAM cards Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS

Side with "product

name" Battery holder's locking switch
Set the battery holder's lock-
ing switch to the "RELEASE"
position.

RELEASE position

Remove the battery holder

"+" sign
Set the battery onto the
battery holder with the "plus"
face up.

The battery holder's locking switch

Insert the battery holder is set automatically to the "LOCK"
position when the battery holder is
removed. In this position, insert the
battery holder firmly.

Confirm that the battery

holder's locking switch is set to LOCK
the "LOCK" position.

Fig. 5-13: Battery installation into memory cards Q2MEM-

NOTE Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.

Battery holder latches

Battery fixing
guide

Battery holder

5 12
Batteries Memory cards and batteries

Battery installation into the SRAM cards Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS

Set the battery holder's

lokking switch to the
"RELEASE" position and
remove battery holder

RELEASE position
Battery holder position "+" sign*
fixing switch

Set the battery onto the

battery holder with the
"plus" face up.

Battery holder

Insert the battery holder

Set the battery holder fixing

switch to the LOCK position.

LOCK position

Fig. 5-14: Battery installation into memory cards Q3MEM-

* The following figure shows the direction of a battery.

Maker name Manufacturer number

(varies depending on
Model date of manufacturing)

Polarity

Voltage

"+" side "" side

5.2.4 Handling instructions

Do not short circuit

Do not open the battery
Do not place in fire
Do not heat the battery
Do not solder the battery

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 5 13

Memory cards and batteries Batteries

5 14
Selecting I/O modules Input and output modules

6 Input and output modules

6.1 Selecting I/O modules
Triac outputs
It is recommended to use triac output modules instead of relay output modules if:
The outputs should be switched in fast sequence on and off
A load with high inductance or low power factor should be switched
When using relays for these applications, the life of relay contacts is reduced considerably.

On and off times when switching inductive loads

The on and off time for switching an inductive loads must be minimum 1 s.

Inrush current
When controlling external counters or time switches with DC/DC converters, problems can
occur at the output module by periodical current peaks, when only the mean value of the current
was taken into consideration for selecting the module.
A resistor or an inductance in series to the load can reduce current peaks. Alternatively select
an output module for switching higher load currents.

Input response time

The response time of input modules can be set by parameters. Increase the response time for
example to disable short noise pulses, which be recognised with short response time as a set
input.
On the other hand "real" input pulses may not be recognised, if the response time is set too long.
The following table shows the response time and the corresponding minimum recognisable
pulse width.

Response time setting [ms] Minimum value of pulse width that may be imported [ms]
1 0.3
5 3
10 6
20 12
70 45

Tab. 6-1: Recognisable pulses

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 61

Input and output modules Selecting I/O modules

Overload protective function

Fuses installed in output modules cannot be replaced. They are designed to protect external wir-
ing if the module outputs are shorted.
Therefore, output modules may not be protected from a short circuit.
If an output module becomes faulty due to any cause other than a short circuit, its fuse may not
function.

Overload and overheat protective functions for QY81P

If an overcurrent keeps flowing due to overload, heat is generated to activate the overheat pro-
tective function. This protective function is designed to protect the internal elements of the mod-
ule, not the external equipment.
The overload protective function is activated in 1 point increments in terms of 1 A to 3 A/point.
The overload protective function returns operation to normal when the load becomes a rated
load.
The overheat protective function is activated in 2 point increments (Y0/Y1, Y2/Y3, etc.) and
when overheat protection is activated, that of 2 points is activated simultaneously. By high tem-
perature of one output circuit the overload protection of other outputs may be activated.
If an output turns ON at the activation of the overheat protective function, the actual output volt-
age oscillates between 0 V and load voltage.
At the load voltage of 24 V, the average voltage during oscillation is approx. 7 V.
If the output is switched off by the overload protective function, no voltage is output.
To ensure that the output is turned OFF at the activation of the overheat protective function, use
an external load which switches OFF at 7 V or more.
The overheat protective function automatically returns operation to normal when heat reduces.

62
Selecting I/O modules Input and output modules

Number of simultaneously set inputs

The number of signals, which can be turned ON simultaneously in an input module, varies
according to the input voltage and ambient temperature. The number of inputs, which can be
turned ON simultaneously is shown in the following diagrams.

QX10, QX10TS QX42, QX42-S1 QX82, QX82-S1

Number of inputs simultaneously ON (%) Number of inputs simultaneously ON (%)

% %
100 100
90 90
80 120 V AC 80
70 70
132 V AC 24 V DC
60 60
50 50 26.4 V DC
40 40 28.8 V DC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature

QX28
Number of inputs simultaneously ON (%)

% 100 % 45 C
100 100 % 55 C (240 V)
90 87.5 % 55 C (264 V)
80
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature

QX41, QX41-S1, QX81, QH42P

Number of inputs simultaneously ON (%)

%
100
90
80 28.8 V DC
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature

QH00032C, QH00033C_UK, QH00034C_UK, QH00080C_UK

Fig. 6-1: Maximum number of inputs simultaneously ON

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 63

Input and output modules Selecting I/O modules

Service value of relay life

The following chart shows the actual service value of relay life for a relay output module QY10
or QY10-TS.

600

500

200
Switching life ( x 10000 times)

100

50

20

10
30 V DC
t= 0 ms
5 100 V DC
t= 7 ms
100 V AC COS = 0,7
200 V AC COS = 0,7
100 V AC COS = 0,35
24 V DC
2 t= 7 ms 200 V AC COS = 0,35

1
0,1 0,5 1 2 5 10
Switching current (A)
QH00035C

Fig. 6-2: Service value of relay life depending on switching current

Screws tightening torque range

Screw location Tightening torque range

Module fixing screw (M3x12) 36 to 48 Ncm
I/O module terminal block screw (M3) 42 to 58 Ncm
I/O module terminal block mounting screw (M3) 66 to 89 Ncm

Tab. 6-2: Screws tightening torque range

64
Part names Input and output modules

6.2 Part names

Part names of I/O modules with terminal block

Module with removable terminal block and terminal cover

 

QH00046c

Fig. 6-3: Part names of I/O modules with terminal block

No. Name Description

 I/O indicator LED Indicates the ON/OFF status of I/O and lit when I/O is ON.
 Terminal block Used to connect power and I/O signal wires.
 Terminal cover The cover protects the terminals against touching.
 Module fixing screw hole Used to fix the module to the base unit (M3x12 screw)
 Module loading lever Used to load the module into the base unit.

Tab. 6-3: Part names description

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 65

Input and output modules Part names

Part names of I/O modules with spring terminals

Module with removable terminal block

QY80-TS
01234567
8 9 A B CDE F 
FUSE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Fig. 6-4: Part names of I/O modules with spring terminals

No. Name Description

 I/O indicator LED Indicates the ON/OFF status of I/O and lit when I/O is ON.
Terminal block Spring clamp terminal block for input and output signals and
 power supply.
 Module fixing screw hole Used to fix the module to the base unit (M3x12 screw)
 Module loading lever Used to load the module into the base unit.

Tab. 6-4: Part names description

66
Part names Input and output modules

Part names of modules with connector

I/O module with 37-pin D-sub connector I/O module with 40-pin connector

 

 

 
QH00047C, QH00088C

Fig. 6-5: Part names of modules with connector

No. Name Description

 I/O indicator LED Indicates the ON/OFF status of I/O and lit when I/O is ON.
37-pin D-sub connector Designed for 32- or 64-point module and used to connect
 40-pin connector power and I/O signal wires.
Indication selector switch Used to switch the LED indications between the first-half 32
 (64-point modules only) points and latter-half 32 points of a 64-point module.
 Module fixing screw hole Used to fix the module to the base unit (M3x12 screw)
 Module loading lever Used to load the module into the base unit.

Tab. 6-5: Part names description

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 67

Input and output modules Part names

68
Overview Power supply modules

7 Power supply modules

7.1 Overview
Observe the input voltage, output current and the power consumption of the mounted modules
when selecting the power supply.
For information about power consumption of the different modules refer to chapter 3 and chapter
12.

Redundant power supply

To continue the operation of a PLC system or remote I/O station, when a power supply failure
occurs, two of each power supply Q63RP or Q64RP can be mounted on a base unit Q38RB,
Q68RB or Q65WRB.
During normal operation (no power supply failure) the base unit is supplied by both power sup-
plies. If a failure of one power supply occurs, the other power supply takes over the total supply
of the base unit. The LED of the failed power supply changes its colour from green to red.
Replacement of the module is possible, during system operation.
In case of a failure the total supply is done by one power supply. Therefore the current of the base
unit and of the mounted modules must not exceed 8.5 A.

When connecting the uninterruptive power supply (UPS)

In case of connecting the power supplies to an UPS (uninterruptable power supply), the input
voltage of the power supplies may go maximum 5 % below the rated voltage.

Notes on handling

CAUTION:

E Note the different input voltages of the power supplies.

Do not drop the devices or subject them to heavy impact.
Do not remove the printed-circuit board of the device from its case.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, cutting chips or wire chips should not enter
ventilation slits.
Tighten the fixing screws using torque within the ranges of the table 7-1.

Screw Tightening torque range (Ncm)

Terminal screw (M3.5x7) 66 to 89
Module fixing screw (M3x12) 36 to 48

Tab. 7-1: Tightening torque range

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 71

Power supply modules Selecting the power supply module

7.2 Selecting the power supply module

7.2.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module

Following table describes the base unit that can be used in combination with the power supply
module respectively.

Base unit
Main base unit Extension base unit
Power supply Q33B Q63B
module Q32SB
Q35B Q38DB Q52B Q65B
Q33SB Q38RB Q68RB Q65WRB
Q38B Q312DB Q55B Q68B
Q35SB
Q312B Q612B
Q61P-A1
Q61P-A2
Q61P
Q61P-D
       
Q62P
Q63P
Q64P
Q64PN
Q61SP        
Q63RP
       *
Q64RP

Tab. 7-2: Combinations of base units and power supply modules

: Combination not available

: Combination available
* When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose serial number (first six digits) is "081103" or
later. The vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be met if the the Q64RP whose serial
number (first six digits) is "081102" or earlier is mounted.

7.2.2 Output currents of the power supplies

The power consumption of the base unit and of the mounted CPU, I/O and intelligent function
modules must not exceed maximum current of the power supply. Calculate the overall current
consumption before selecting a power supply.

Main base unit Rated output current of power Power supply module
supply module at 5 V DC
Q33B 3.0 A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
Q35B 6.0 A Q62P
Q38B
Q312B
Q38DB 8.5 A Q64P, Q64PN
Q312DB
Q32SB
Q33SB 2.0 A Q61SP
Q35SB
Q38RB 8.5 A Q63RP, Q64RP

Tab. 7-3: Selecting the power supply modules for main base units

Extension base unit Rated output current of power Power supply module
supply module at 5 V DC
Q63B 3.0 A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
Q65B 6.0 A Q62P
Q68B
Q612B 8.5 A Q64P, Q64PN
Q68RB
8.5 A Q63RP, Q64RP
Q65WRB

Tab. 7-4: Selecting the power supply modules for extension base units

72
Selecting the power supply module Power supply modules

7.2.3 Life detection power supply module Q61P-D

The power supply Q61P-D is equipped with life detection. This function estimates the remanent
life time of the power supply and indicates it by a LED and by an isolated contact. Together with
the POWER LED, failure diagnostics are also possible.

LED located on the

front of the module LIFE OUT terminal Module status
POWER LIFE
 AC power is not input
 Power failure (including momentary power fail-
OFF OFF OFF
ure for 20 ms or more)
 Power supply module failure
ON (green) Normal operation
ON
ON (orange) Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 50 %)*
ON: 5 s Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 1 year)*
Flicker OFF: 1 s Replacement of the module is recommended
(orange) ON: 0.5 s OFF Normal operation
OFF: 0.5 s (Remaining life approx. 6 months)*
OFF Life expired
ON (green)
Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambient
ON (red)
temperature is exceeding the specification)
ON: 1 s Function failure (Normal processing is not availa-
Flicker Turns off and on three ble due to a failure of the life diagnostics circuit in
(red) OFF: 1 s times at intervals of 1
second and then off the module)
Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambient
temperature is exceeding the specification and
OFF also the life detection function has stopped.)
ON (orange) OFF Watchdog timer error in the module

Tab. 7-5: Indication of remaining life (power supply module Q61P-D)

* The remaining life of the module varies depending on the ambient temperature.
(If the ambient temperature rises by 10 C, the remaining life of the module will be shortened by half.)

Connect the terminal LIFE OUT to an external lamp or to an PLC input for monitoring by the
sequence program to recognise a shorted lifetime.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 73

Power supply modules Part names

7.3 Part names

Main differences between the power supplies are their input voltages. The output voltage of 5 V
is directly input to the base unit and not accessible by terminals.
Besides the 5 V output, the Q62P has an additional output with 24 V/0.6 A.

Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q61SP, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN

Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q64P, Q64PN Q63P



  

 
 
 

Q61P-D Q61SP


Q61SP

INPUT Q61SP
100-240VAC











MITSUBISHI




Fig. 7-1: Part names of power supply modules

74
Part names Power supply modules

No. Name Application

 POWER LED Operation indication:
 ON (green): Normal (5 V DC output)
 OFF:
DC power supply is not on
blown fuse
Power failure (including an momentary power failure longer than the
allowable momentary power failure period)
DC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
(5 V DC error, overload, internal circuit failure)
 ERR terminal Error output (max. 24 V, 0.5 A)
Turns on when the entire system operates normally.
Turns off (opens) when
 a stop error (including reset) occurs in the CPU module
 AC power is not supplied
 the fuse is blown.
In a multiple CPU system, turns off when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU
modules.
Normally off when mounted on an extension base unit.
 FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
 LG terminal Grounding for the power supply filter.
 Power input termi- Terminals for input voltage of the power supply
nals
Terminal screw M3.5x7
 Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block

Module fixing screw Used to secure the module to the base unit.
hole M3x12 screw (user-prepared)
 Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.
 24 V DC terminal Used to supply 24 V DC/0.6 A power to inside the output module (Q62P only)
 LIFE LED Indication of life detection function:
 ON (green): When operation has started
 ON (orange): Remaining life of the module approx. 50 %
 Flash (orange):
On for 5 seconds and off for 1 second: Module remaining life is approx. 1 year.
At intervals of 0.5 seconds: Module remaining life is approx. 6 months
 Flash (red): Function failure
 ON (red): Ambient temperature out of range (Ambient temperature of the
module is exceeding the specification)
 OFF:
Module life expired. (Turns on red for 1 second after power-on)
Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambient temperature of the module is
exceeding the specification and also the life detection function is stopped.)
 LIFE OUT terminal Output signal of the terminal turns off (opens) when
 module remaining life is 1 year or less
 the watchdog timer error is detected in the module (in this case POWER LED
is on in orange).
The output signal of the terminal turns off and on at intervals of one second for
three times and then off (opens) when
 the ambient temperature is detected out of range
 the life diagnostics error (including detection error) is detected
The above operations are also available when the module Q61P-D is mounted
on an extension base unit. (In this case the POWER LED of the Q61P-D on the
extension base unit may turn on in dull red when the module is turned off. Note
that this does not indicate an error.)

Tab. 7-6: Description for part names of power supply modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 75

Power supply modules Part names

Q63RP and Q64RP

Q63RP Q64RP




  

 
 
    

  

  
  
  



   



 

Fig. 7-2: Part names of power supply modules Q63RP and Q64RP

No. Name Application

 POWER LED Operation indication:
 ON (green): Normal operation (5 V DC output)
 ON (red): DC power is input but the power supply module is faulty (5 V DC
error, overload, or internal circuit failure)
 OFF:
DC power not input, power failure (including momentary power failure
longer than the allowable momentary power failure period)
blown fuse
 ERR terminal Error output (max. 24 V, 0.5 A)
 When power supply is mounted on redundant power main base unit
(Q3RB): Turns on when the system on the redundant power main base unit
operates normally. Turns off (open) when
the power supply module fails
the DC power supply is not input
a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs
or the fuse is blown.
Turns off (open) when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules in a mul-
tiple CPU system.
 When power supply is mounted on redundant power extension base unit
(Q6RB): Turns on when the power supply module operates normally
Turns off (open) when
the power supply module fails
the DC power supply is not input
or the fuse is blown.
 FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
 LG terminal Grounding for the power supply filter.
 Power input Terminals for input voltage of the power supply
terminals
Terminal screw M3.5x7
 Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block

Module fixing screw Screw hole for securing a module to the base unit.
hole M3x12 screw (user-prepared)
 Module mounting This spring loaded lever simplifies disassembling of the module from the base
lever unit.

Tab. 7-7: Description for part names of power supply modules

76
Wiring of power supply modules Power supply modules

7.4 Wiring of power supply modules

The following figure shows the schematic wiring of the different power supply types.

Q61P, Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61SP, Q64P, Q63P, Q63RP

Q64PN, Q64RP

Coupling relay, Terminal Description Terminal Description

Coupling relay,
lamp, etc. ERR lamp, etc.
Turned OFF ERR Turned OFF
(opened) when (opened) when
24V DC 0,5 A a stop error a stop error
ERR common 24V DC 0,5 A ERR common
occurs in the occurs in the
CPU module. CPU module.
FG FG
Ground Ground
terminal terminal
LG LG

N 100120 V AC + 24 V
Rated input (200-240 V AC) Power input Power input
voltage terminals terminals
L (100-240 V AC) 24 V G

100140 V AC for Q61P-A1,Q64P and Q64RP

200240 V AC for Q61P-A2 and Q64P
100240 V AC for Q61P, Q61SP, Q64PN and Q64RP

Q62P Q61P-D

Coupling relay, Terminal Description Coupling relay, Terminal Description

lamp, etc. ERR lamp, etc. ERR
Turned OFF Turned OFF
(opened) when (opened) when
24V DC 0,5 A a stop error 24V DC 0,5 A a stop error
ERR common occurs in the ERR common occurs in the
CPU module. CPU module.
FG LIFE OUT When the re-
Ground maining life is
terminal 24V DC 0,5 A approx. 1
LG LIFE OUT year, the con-
common tact turns off.
N 100-240 V AC FG
Power input Ground
100240 V AC terminals terminal
L 100-240 V AC LG

+ 24 V DC N 100-240 V AC
Output
voltage Power input
24 V DC 100240 V AC terminals
24 V G L 100-240 V AC
0.6 A

Fig. 7-3: Wiring of power supply modules

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 77

Power supply modules Wiring of power supply modules

NOTES Ground the LG and FG terminals to the protective ground conductor.

Check the rated voltage and terminal layout of the power supply carefully, before wiring.

When one of the redundant power supplies Q63RP or Q64RP fails or when the input voltage
of one power supply shuts off, the other one takes over the whole power supply. Specify your
redundant system, that the capacity of one power supply is sufficient for the power consum-
tion of all modules.
When using two power supplies per base unit, the input voltage should be separated with
separate fuses, contactors etc. For replacement of one power supply due to failure or main-
tenance, each power supply should be switched off separately.

The internal fuse of the power supplies cant be replaced by the user. Please contact your
local Mitsubishi service center or representative for replacing.

Use the output contact ERR to indicate a failure. Only wire this output when needed. The
maximum cable length must not exceed 30 m.
The output contact ERR has no function (always off) when the power supply is mounted on
an extension base unit.

Do not input a voltage of 200 to 240 V AC into the Q61P-A1 or a voltage of 100 to 120 V AC
into the Q61P-A2.

The Q64P and Q64RP automatically recognize the rated input voltage waveform to switch
the input voltage between 100 to 120 V AC and 200 to 240 V AC. Input voltages from 85 to
132 V AC and 170 to 264 V AC are possible.
Q64P and Q64RP are not compatible with the intermediate voltage (133 to 169 V AC).

The maximum cable length for the LIFE OUT contact must not exceed 30 m.

78
Overview Base units

8 Base units
8.1 Overview
The MELSEC System Q offers a wide variety of main and extension base units. Up to four CPU
modules, one power supply, input/output modules and intelligent function modules can be
mounted on the main base units Q33B-E, Q35B-E, Q38B-E and Q312B-E. Two redundant
power supplies Q63RP or Q64RP can be mounted on the main base unit Q38RB-E, so that sys-
tem performance is increased. This main base unit has additionally 8 slots for up to four CPU
moduls and I/O or intelligent function modules.
The compact dimensions of the main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB allow to build
space saving PLC systems.*
The extension base units Q52B and Q55B have no power supply slot and are supplied by the
power supply of the main base unit over the extension cable.
Input, output and intelligent function modules can be mounted on the extension base units
Q63B, Q65B, Q68B and Q612B. It has its own power supply for the modules. Use the extension
base unit Q68RB for two redundant power supplies Q63RP or Q64RP, to continue operation
while one power supply fails.
The base units are connected by extension cable.
* The main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB have no connector for an extension base unit. Therefore the
connection of extension base units or GOTs is not possible via the extension bus.

8.1.1 Extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit

The following table shows the possible combinations of main and extension base units of
MELSEC System Q.

Extension base unit

Q63B
Main base unit Q52B Q65B
Q68RB Q65WRB 
Q55B Q68B
Q612B
Q00JCPU 
   
Q00UJCPU 
Q33B
Q35B
   
Q38B
Q312B
Q32SB
Q33SB    
Q35SB
Q38RB    
Q38DB
   
Q312DB

Tab. 8-1: Combination of base units

: Combination not available

: Combination available
 Combination of base unit, power supply module and CPU
 Applicable only in a redundant system.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 81

Base units Overview

8.1.2 Precautions on using the base units Q52B and Q55B

When extension base unit Q52B or Q55B is used, a power of 5 V DC is supplied from the power
supply module on the main base unit through an extension cable.
Observe the following points, when specifying a PLC system with the base units Q52B and
Q55B:
The power consumption of the modules mounted on the main base unit and on the base
units Q52B and Q55B must not exceed the output current of the main base unit power supply.
When using the Q52B or Q55B, make sure that the "IN" connector of the Q52B or Q55B is
supplied with 4.75 V DC or higher.
The Q5B can be used if the voltage drop caused by extension cable is 0.15 V DC or lower.
You can calculate the voltage drop occuring at extension cables by multiplying the extension
cable conductor resistance (refer to section 8.2) with the power consumption of the extension
base unit. Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit.
For connection of extension base unit Q52B and QQ55B the use of cable Q05B is strongly
recommended.

82
Extension cable Base units

8.2 Extension cable

The extension cables are connected to transfer signals between a main base unit and an exten-
sion base unit or between extension base units.

Item QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B

Cable length m 0.45 0.6 1.2 3.0 5.0 10.0
Conductor resistance value 0.044 0.051 0.082 0.172 0.273 0.530
Weight kg 0.15 0.16 0.22 0.40 0.60 1.11

Tab. 8-2: Extension cable specifications

CAUTION:

E When the extension cables are used in combination, overall distance of the combined
cable must be 13.2 m or less.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 83

Base units Part names and settings

8.3 Part names and settings

CAUTION:

E Do not drop the parts or subject them to heavy impact.

Do not remove the printed-circuit board of the parts from their cases.
When drilling screw holes or wiring, cutting chips or wire chips should not enter
ventilation slits.

8.3.1 Part names

Main base units Q33B-E, Q35B-E, Q38B-E, Q38RB-E, Q312B-E, Q38DB, Q312DB




QH00049C

Fig. 8-1: Part names of main base units Q3B, Q3RB and Q3DB

No. Name Application

 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications
connector with the extension base unit).
 Base cover Do not remove the whole cover. Before an extension cable is connected, the
area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" on
the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
 Module connector Connectors for installing the Q series power supply module (two redundant
power supply modules for the Q38RB-E), up to four CPU modules, I/O mod-
ules, and intelligent function modules.
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not
installed, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3x12
 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for
M4 screw)
DIN rail adapter Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter.
mounting hole

Tab. 8-3: Description for part names of main base units

84
Part names and settings Base units

Main base units Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB

5/


 

Fig. 8-2: Part names of main base units Q3SB

No. Name Application

 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3x12
 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for
M4 screw)
 DIN rail adapter Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter.
mounting hole
 Module connector Connectors for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU modules,
I/O modules, and intelligent function modules.
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not
installed, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.

Tab. 8-4: Description for part names of main base units Q3SB

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 85

Base units Part names and settings

Extension base units Q52B and Q55B

IN OUT





Q55B

Fig. 8-3: Part names of extension base units Q52B and Q55B

No. Name Application

 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (IN) (for signal communications
connector (IN) with the main base unit or other extension base unit)
 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (OUT) (for signal communica-
connector (OUT) tions with another extension base unit).
 Base cover of cable Protective cover of extension cable connector.
connectors
 Stage No. setting Connector for setting the number of bases of the extension base unit.
connector 7 extension stages can be set.
 Module connector Connectors for installing the I/O modules and intelligent function modules.
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not
installed, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3x12
 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for
M4 screw)

DIN rail adapter Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter.
mounting hole

Tab. 8-5: Description for part names of extension base units Q52B and Q55B

86
Part names and settings Base units

Extension base units Q63B, Q65B, Q68B Q68RB and Q612B




QH00050C

Fig. 8-4: Part names of extension base units

No. Name Application

 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (IN) (for signal communications
connector (IN) with the main base unit or other extension base unit)
 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (OUT) (for signal communica-
connector (OUT) tions with another extension base unit).
 Base cover of cable Protective cover of extension cable connector.
connectors
 Stage No. setting Connector for setting the number of bases of the extension base unit.
connector 7 extension stages can be set.
 Module connector Connectors for installing the power supply module (two redundant power
supply modules for the Q38RB), I/O modules, and intelligent function mod-
ules.
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not
installed, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3x12
 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for
M4 screw)

DIN rail adapter Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter.
mounting hole

Tab. 8-6: Description for part names of extension base units

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 87

Base units Part names and settings

Redundant extension base unit Q65WRB

    

  



 

        

Fig. 8-5: Part names of redundant extension base unit Q65WRB

No. Name Application

 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications
connectors (IN1 and IN2) with the redundant system of the main base unit).
 Extension cable Connector for connecting an extension cable (OUT) (for signal communica-
connectors (OUT) tions with an extension base unit Q68RB).
 Connectors for power Connectors for installing two redundant power supply modules Q63RP or
supply modules Q64RP.
 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3x12
 Module connector Connectors for installing the I/O modules, and intelligent function modules.
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not
installed, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
Base cover of cable Protective cover of extension cable connector.
connectors
 DIN rail adapter Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter.
mounting hole

Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for
M4 screw)

Tab. 8-7: Description for part names of redundant extension base unit Q65WRB

NOTE Its only possible to use the extension base unit Q65WRB in a redundant system as the first
extension stage (direct connection to the main base unit).
Extension base No. setting (refer to following section 8.3.2) is not possible and not required
for the Q65WRB.

88
Part names and settings Base units

8.3.2 Setting the extension stage number

When using two or more extension base units, the extension stage number must be set with their
extension stage number setting connectors. The extension stage number is set to 1 by factory
default. There is no need to set the extension stage number, when only one extension base unit
with factory default status is connected to the main base unit.
The extension stage number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the
IN side base cover.

Loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the
base cover from the extension base unit.

Insert the connector pin in the required extension stage

number location of the connector (see below).

QH00011C

Fig. 8-6: Setting the extension stage number

Setting of connector pins for extension bases:

Number setting for extension stages

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Setting of
connector
pins

Tab. 8-8: Settings of connector pins

After setting install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw.

Fig. 8-7: Base cover removal procedure

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 89

Base units Part names and settings

NOTES Please note, that the maximum number of extension base units, which can be connected to
the main base unit is depending on the CPU type:
Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU: 2
Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU: 4
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU: 7
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU: 7
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU: 7
Q12PRH and Q25PRH: 7 (refer to following note)

The extension base unit cannot be connected when the serial number (first five digits) of the
redundant CPU Q12PRH- or Q25PRHCPU is "09011" or earlier.
For a main base unit with redundant Q12PRHCPU or Q25PRHCPU from serial number
09012 on, the extension is possible with up to seven base units and maximum 63 mod-
ules.
Connect the Q65WRB to the first extension base. Since the Q65WRB is fixed to the first
extension base, base number setting is not required. Use the Q68RB for the second exten-
sion base to the seventh extension base. Set the extension stage number as described
above.

If a prohibited extension stage number is set, "BASE LAY ERROR" (error code: 2010)
occurs.

CAUTION:

E Never set more than one jumper on the connector pins of the extension base unit.
Set the extension stage number for extension base units in the order of connecting,
starting from the one connected to the main base unit. The same jumper setting for
more than one extension base unit or a missing jumper causes malfunction.

8 10
Part names and settings Base units

8.3.3 Connection and disconnection of extension cable

NOTE Always plug the OUT side connector of a base unit and the IN side connector of the next
base unit with an extension cable.
The system will not operate properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to
IN, OUT to OUT or IN to OUT.

Instructions for handling an extension cable:

Connect the extension cable to the base unit with the base cover installed to the base unit.
After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit, reinstall and screw the
base cover.
To connect an extension cable to the main base unit, remove the portion under the OUT
characters on the base cover. This also applies to a case where an extension cable is
connected to the OUT side connector of the extension base unit.
Remove the cover from the IN connector of the extension base unit.

Main base unit Extension base unit

OUT side Remove the cover
from the IN
connector

Open the base cover with

a flat blade screwdriver

Do not squeeze the extension cable.

When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable, do not hold the ferrite cores mounted
at both ends of the cable. Only hold the connector part of the cable (refer to the following
figure). Holding the ferrite core may cause a cable disconnection in the connector.
Also, if the ferrite core position is shifted, the characteristic will change. When handling the
cable, do not to shift the ferrite core position.

Fig. 8-8:
Hold the connector part of the extension
cable

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 8 11

Base units Part names and settings

When laying an extension cable, secure 55 mm or more as the minimum cable bending
radius. If it is less than 55 mm, a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration,
cable disconnection or the like.
After fitting the extension cable, always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws.
(Tightening torque: 0.2 Nm.)

Fig. 8-9:
Connection of extension cable connector
with screws

Disconnection of extension cable

When disconnectiong the extension cable, hold and pull the connector part of the extension
cable after confirming that the fixing screws have been completely removed.

8 12
I/O Number assignment Base units

8.4 I/O Number assignment

A CPU of the MELSEC System Q automatically recognises the slots available in main and exten-
sion base units and assigns addresses to the inputs and outputs accordingly.
The assignment can also be done by the user. Thus slots can be left empty or addresses can be
reserved for future extensions.
The following figure shows examples for I/O assignment:

Auto mode

0 1 2 3 4
Power supply

C X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y

P 0 20 40 60 80
module

O
U U
T

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Power supply

I
N
X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y
A0 C0 E0 100 120 140 160 180 Extension stage 1
module

O
U
T

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Power supply

I
N
X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y
1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 Extension stage 2
module

O
U
T

21 22 23 24 25
Power supply

I
N
X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y
2A0 2C0 2E0 300 320 Extension stage 3
module

O
U
T

Detail mode

0 1 2 3
Power supply

C X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y

Vacant

P 0 20 40 60 Main base unit Q35B

module

O U 4 user specific slots

U
T

4 5 6 7 8 9
Power supply

I X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y Extension stage 1:

Vacant
Vacant

80 A0 C0 E0 100 120 Extension base unit Q68B

module

O
U 6 user specific slots
T

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Power supply

I
N
X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y Extension stage 2:
140 160 180 1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 Extension base unit Q68B
module

O
U 8 user specific slots
T

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Power supply

I
N
X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y X/Y Extension stage 3:
240 260 280 2A0 2C0 2E0 300 320 340 360 Extension base unit Q65B
module

O
U 10 user specific slots
T

The addresses of slots 23 to 27 are reserved

for future extensions.

QH00053C

Fig. 8-10: I/O number assignment example

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 8 13

Base units I/O Number assignment

8 14
Safety guidelines Installation

9 Installation
9.1 Safety guidelines

DANGER:

P Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor.
Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a
serious accident.
In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an
overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke
and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
Malfunction may occour if an external power supply or the programmable controller
is faulty. To prevent any malfunction which may affect the whole system and in a
fail-safe viewpoint, provide an external circuit to the areas which can result in
machine breakdown and accidents (e.g. emergency stop, protective and interlock
circuits) must be constructed outside the programmable controller.

When the programmable controller is powered on and off, normal control output may not be
done momentarily due to a delay or a start-up time difference between the programmable con-
troller power supply and the external power supply (DC in particular) for the control target.
For example, if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC output
module and then the programmable controller power supply is switched on, the DC output mod-
ule may provide false output instantaneously at power-on of the programmable controller.
Therefore, it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the programmable controller
power supply first.
Malfunction may occour if an external power supply or the programmable controller is faulty. To
prevent any malfunction which may affect the whole system and in a fail-safe viewpoint, provide
an external circuit to the areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents (e.g. emer-
gency stop, protective and interlock circuits) must be constructed outside the programmable
controller.
The following page give examples of system designing in the above viewpoint.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 91

Installation Safety guidelines

System design circuit example (when not using ERR. terminal of power supply module):

PLC and Outputs: AC PLC: AC

Outputs: DC

CPU

SM52
Ym SM52 DC power
Ym
SM403
Yn SM403
Yn

Programm XM
 TM

MC1 M10
TM
N0
N0 M10
Start Stop
MC Programm
RA1

Start
MC RA1 MC
Input module 
MC
Stop
Input module
RA2
Output module RA 2
XM
Ym


Yn Output module
 Ym

RA1
MC 
Yn
MC Output module 
RA1

Output module MC  MC

MC2 MC1

MC1 MC2
 MC2 MC1

MC1 MC2


QH00039C

Fig. 9-1: System design circuit example (when not using ERR. terminal)

 MC is switched by RA1 when the CPU is in mode RUN.

 Low battery alarm (Lamp or buzzer).
 RA1 is switched by SM403 when the CPU is in mode RUN.
! The outputs are switched off by MC when the CPU is in mode STOP.
" When the DC voltage is switched on, RA2 starts the timer TM via input XM.

92
Safety guidelines Installation

# The DC power supply for the input signals is switched on, when the timer TM stops and the
DC voltage is present.
$ Interlock circuits as necessary. Provide external interlock circuits for conflicting operations,
such as forward rotation and reverse rotation, and for parts that could damage the machine
or cause accidents if no interlock were used.

The power-on procedure is as follows:

For AC:
Turn power on.
Set CPU to RUN.
Turn on the start switch.
When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may
be driven by the program.

For AC/DC:
Turn power on.
Set CPU to RUN.
When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100 %. (The TM set value must be the
period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 % DC voltage. Set
this value to approximately 0.5 seconds.) If a voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer (TM)
is required in the program.
Turn on the start switch.
When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may
be driven by the program.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 93

Installation Safety guidelines

System design circuit example (when using ERR. terminal of power supply module):

PLC: AC
Outputs: DC

SM52 DC power
Ym

SM403
Yn

XM Set the command value for TM so that the DC

TM voltage is present for 100 % after elapse of time.

MC1 M10
TM The DC power supply for the input signals is
N0 switched on, when the timer TM stops and the DC
N0 M10 voltage is present.
Programm

Start
RA1 MC MC is switched by RA1 when the CPU is in mode
MC
RUN.
Stop
Input module Voltage relay is recommended at RA2
RA2
XM RA 2

Output module
Ym
Low battery alarm (Lamp or buzzer)

RA1 switches on if there is no error message from

the power supply.
ERR
RA1

The outputs are switched off by MC when the CPU

MC MC
Output module is in mode STOP

MC2 MC1
Interlock circuits as necessary. Provide external
interlock circuits for conflicting operations, such as
MC1 MC2
forward rotation and reverse rotation, and for parts
that could damage the machine or cause accidents
if no interlock were used.

QH00040C

Fig. 9-2: System design circuit example (when using ERR. terminal of power supply module)

94
Safety guidelines Installation

The power-ON procedure is as follows:

Turn power on.
Set CPU to RUN.
When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100 %. (The TM set value must be the
period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 % DC voltage. Set this
value to approximately 0.5 seconds.) If a voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer (TM) is
required in the program.
Turn on the start switch.
When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may
be driven by the program.

Fail-safe measures against failure of the programmable controller

Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self-diagnosis function. However,
failure of I/O control area may not be detected by the CPU module.
In such cases, all I/O points turn on or off depending on a condition of problem, and normal oper-
ating conditions and operating safety cannot be maintained.
Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control, they
may cause failure or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons.
To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system, machine breakdown, and accidents, the
fail-safe circuitry against failure of the programmable controller can be constructed as shown in
the following figure.

T1

Internal program On delay timer

Y00
1s
SM412 (Q-CPU)
T2

Y00 Off delay timer

1s
MC
The outputs are
Y01 switched on by
MC.

Y0F
Y00

24 V
0.5 s 0.5 s
24 V DC
+
0V

CPU module Output module  MC

T1 T2
MC will be
switched on, when
Y00 is faultless.

QH00041C_UK

Fig. 9-3: Fail-safe circuit example

 Y00 will be switched on and off in intervals of 0.5 s by SM412. Therefore use a contactless output
module with transistor outputs.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 95

Installation General specifications

9.2 General specifications

Do not use or store the modules of MELSEC System Q in an environment as follows:
Operating ambient temperature exceeding 0 to +55 C
Storage ambient temperature exceeding 20 bis +75 C
Operating ambient humidity exceeding 5 % bis 95 %
Operating areas with air condensing by sudden temperature changes.
Areas with flammable gas
Areas with conductive dust (iron filings, oily smoke, dust, corrosive gas or organic solvent)
Operating areas with direct solar irradiation
Operating areas with high magnetic or high voltage fields
Operating areas with high vibration impact or sound waves affecting the PLC
Keep a distance of minimum 25 cm to the PLC when using mobile phones.

96
Calculating heat generation of programmable controller Installation

9.3 Calculating heat generation of programmable controller

The ambient temperature inside the panel storing the programmable controller must be sup-
pressed to an ambient temperature of 55 C. The heat generated by the system should be lead
off by ventilation devices.
Following figure shows the power consuming parts of the programmable controller:

Power supply 5 V DC
I5V

Power
AC power supply supply Intelligent
Link
module CPU module Output Input function
module module module
I24V
Relay/ Input current Power supply
Transistor IIN x VIN module
Power supply
External 24 V DC
power Output current
IOUT x Vdrop Input
supply current
24 V DC IIN
AC Output AC AC
current
IOUT
Load

DC DC DC
E000305C

Fig. 9-4: Calculation of the power consumption

Power consumption of power supply module

The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx. 70 %, while 30 % of the
output power is consumed as heat. As a result, 3/7 of the output power is the power consump-
tion.
The calculation formula is as follows:
WPW = 3/7 (I5V x 5 V) [W]
WPW: Heat capacity of the power supply
I5V: Current consumption of logic 5 V DC circuit of each module [A]

Total power consumption for 5 V DC logic circuits of all modules

The power consumption of the 5 V DC output circuit section of the power supply module is the
power consumption of each module (including the current consumption of the base unit) mul-
tiplied by the 5 V power supply.
W5V = I5V x 5 V [W]

A total of 24 V DC average power consumption of the output modules

The sum of all currents, flowing into the output moduls with all outputs switched on, multiplied by
the voltage of the external power supply results in the total power consumption at 24 V DC .
W24V = I24V x 24 V x Simultaneous ON rate [W]

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 97

Installation Calculating heat generation of programmable controller

Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output
module
WOUT = IOUT x Vdrop x n x OS [W]
IOUT: Output current (Current in actual use)
Vdrop: Voltage drop in each output module
n: Number of outputs
O S: Simultaneous ON rate (specifies how many outputs are switched on simultaneously,
OS = 1: all outputs simultaneously ON)

Average power consumption of the input section of the input module

WIN = IIN x VIN x n x IS [W]
IIN: Input current (Effective value for AC)
VIN: Input voltage (Voltage in actual use)
n: Number of input points
IS: Simultaneous ON rate (specifies how many inputs are switched on simultaneously,
IS = 1: all inputs simultaneously ON)

Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent function
module
The calculation formula for the power consumption of intelligent function modules is as follows:
WS = I5V x 5 V + I24V x 24 V+ I100V x 100 V [W]

Overall power consumption of the programmable controller system

The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power con-
sumption of the overall sequencer system:
W = WPW + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS [W]
From this overall power consumption (W), calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient tem-
perature inside the panel. The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature
inside the panel is shown below.
T = W / (U x A) [C]
W: Power consumption of overall sequencer system
A: Surface area inside the panel (m2)
U: 6, when the ambient temperature inside the panel is uniformed by a fan
4, when air inside the panel is not circulated

NOTES If the temperature inside the panel has exceeded the specified range (55 C), it is recom-
mended to install a fan, a heat exchanger or chiller to the panel to lower the temperature.

Fans should always be equipped with appropriate dust filters and sufficient protection.

98
Mounting the base unit Installation

9.4 Mounting the base unit

Keep the clearances shown in following figure between the top/bottom faces of the module
and other structures or parts to ensure good ventilation and facilitate module replacement.

Indicates the panel top,

wiring duct or any part position
30 mm or more

Main base unit

30 mm or more 
Wiring duct
50 mm or more

30 mm or more

Extension base unit

30 mm or more

Fig. 9-5: Module mounting position

 For wiring duct with 50 mm or less height.
40 mm or more for other cases.
 Depending on length of extension cable.
 45 mm or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
Do not mount the devices vertical or flat because the ventilation is not sufficient in this case.

Do not mount the base unit vertically or horizontally Orientation in which modules can be mounted

QH00006C

Fig. 9-6: Module mounting orientation

Mount the base unit on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is not even, this may strain the
printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 99

Installation Mounting the base unit

Avoid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contactors
and no-fuse circuit breakers; mount these on a separate panel or at a distance.
Install wiring ducts with sufficient dimensions.
If the wiring duct is mounted above the PLC, the depth of the wiring duct should be maximum
50 mm, so that the ventilation is not affected.
Keep enough distance to the controller that cables and modules can be easy replaced in
future.
If the wiring duct is mounted below the PLC, give enough space for the power supply input
cables (100/230 V AC) and for the cables to the I/O modules.
In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat inside the cabinet, provide a clearance
of minimum 100 mm between the PLC and devices that generate noise or heat (contactors
and relays). The device could be mounted on the internal side of the cabinet. The required
clearance of the device on the right and left side of the PLC is minimum 50 mm.

Panel top

PLC

Contactor, relay, etc.

100 mm or more

E000308C

Fig. 9-7: Distances from the other devices in the panel

9 10
Mounting the base unit Installation

9.4.1 Direct mounting

The main base units can be mounted directly on the backside panel of the cabinet. The following
tables show the distances of the mounting holes.

H1 H

B2
B1
B

Fig. 9-8: Base units external dimensions

External dimensions [mm]

Value
Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q38DB Q312DB Q38RB
B 189 245 328 439 114 142 194 328 439 439
B1 169 224.5 308 419 101 129 184.5 308 419 419
B2 170* 170* 170 170 170
H 98
H1 80

Tab. 9-1: Main base units external dimensions

* Base units with 4 or 5 base mounting holes are available. This value applies for base units with 5 base mounting
holes only.

External dimensions [mm]

Value
Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Q68RB Q65WRB
B 106 189 189 245 328 439 439 439
B1 83.5 167 167 222.5 306 417 417 417
B2 190* 190* 170 170
H 98
H1 80

Tab. 9-2: Main base units external dimensions

* Base units with 4 or 5 base mounting holes are available. This value applies for base units with 5 base mounting
holes only.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 11

Installation Mounting the base unit

Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the
enclosure (e. g. on the backside panel).
Do not yet tighten the mounting screws.

Place the right-hand side notch of the base unit onto

the right-hand side screw.

Place the left-hand side pear-shaped hole onto the left-

hand side screw.
Fit the mounting screws into the holes at the bottom of the
base unit, and then retighten the all mounting screws.

Fig. 9-9: Installing a main base unit, or a Q00U(J)CPU

NOTES Install the main base unit with Q00UCPU or Q00UJCPU to the panel of a cabinet, with no
module mounted in the rightmost slot.
Remove the base unit from the panel after removing the module from the rightmost slot.

The mounting screws (cross recessed head bind screw M4x12) provided with the slim type
main base unit Q32DB, Q33SB and Q35SB differ from those provided with other types of the
base unit.

9 12
Mounting the base unit Installation

9.4.2 Mounting a DIN rail

For mounting of main or extension base unit on a DIN rail with 35 mm width, use appropriate
adapters.

DIN rail mounting adapters

Application
Q6DIN1 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN3
Q38B, Q38DB, Q38RB, Q33B, Q32SB, Q33SB,
Main base unit Q35B
Q312B, Q312DB Q35SB

Extension base unit Q68B, Q612B, Q68RB, Q65B Q52B, Q55B, Q63B
Q65WRB

Tab. 9-3: Adapters for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit

DIN rail mounting

When using DIN rail, DIN rail mounting screws must be inserted in 200 mm distances or less in
order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength.

DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw

35 mm

200 mm or less 200 mm or less 200 mm or less

QH00005C

Fig. 9-10: DIN rail mounting

When installing the DIN rail in a frequent vibration and/or shock prone environment, insert the
mounting screws in 200 mm intervals or less by the following method shown in the figures below.

B A B
Mounting screws Mounting screws
(included with adapters) (obtained by user)
DIN rail Square washers necessary No square washers

35 mm

Stopper

Stopper
200 mm or less 200 mm or less 200 mm or less

Fig. 9-11: DIN rail mounting for Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU and the base units Q33B, Q35B,
Q65B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 13

Installation Mounting the base unit

B A B
Mounting screws Mounting screws
(included with adapters) (obtained by user)
DIN rail Square washers necessary No square washers

35 mm

Stopper

Stopper
200 mm or less 200 mm or less 200 mm or less 200 mm or less

Fig. 9-12: DIN rail mounting for the base units Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B, Q38RB, Q68RB,
Q65WRB, Q38DB and Q312DB

Screw the DIN rail in two places using the mounting screws and square washers included with
the adapters in Position A (bottom of base unit).
Screw the DIN rail with mounting screws (obtained by user) in Position B (where the base unit
is not installed).
The following shows where to position the square washers and the mounting screws included
with adapters.

Square washer
Mounting
DIN rail screws DIN rail

Side view A

Square washer Mounting side

Mounting screws (M5x10) (e. g. Control panel)

Top view Side view A

Fig. 9-13: DIN rail mounting, when there is large vibration or impact

NOTES Use the DIN rail that is compatible with M5 size screws.

Use only one washer for each mounting screw. Use only the square washers supplied with
the adapters.
If two or more washers are used together for one mounting screw, the screw may interfere
with the base unit.

Make sure to align the square washer sides with the DIN rail.
Square washer DIN rail Square washer DIN rail

9 14
Mounting the base unit Installation

Adapter installation method

The way to install the adapters for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given in following figure.

Push the top of the

adapter (small) far
Base unit rear enough until it "clicks".

Fhren Siethe
Place denhook
Winkelof des
the kleinen
adapter
Adapterstckes in diehole.
(small) in the lower untere
ffnung ein.

Insert the adapter (large) into the grooves of the Push the bottom of the adapter (large) far
base unit from below. enough until it "clicks".
QH00004C

Fig. 9-14: Adapter installation method

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 15

Installation Mounting the base unit

Stopper mounting
When using the DIN rail in frequent vibration and/or shock prone environment, use stoppers
included with the DIN rail mounting adapter.

 Loosen the screw at the top of the stopper. Hook Stopper

(2 stoppers are needed)

Hook

 Hitch the lower hook of the stopper to the bottom of 

the DIN rail. Install the stopper with the arrowhead
side facing up.
 Hitch the upper hook of the stopper to the top of the
DIN rail. 

Slide the stopper to the end of the base unit so that Stopper
they are fully in contact.

 Tighten the screw of the stopper with a screwdriver. DIN rail

(Tightening torque 1.00 to 1.35 Nm).
(Left side) 

Stopper

 DIN rail
(Right side)

Stopper Stopper
 Make sure that the left and right stoppers are fixed
securely to the DIN rail.

Fig. 9-15: Stopper mounting procedure

9 16
Installation and removal of module Installation

9.5 Installation and removal of module

CAUTION:

E Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or
removing the module.
Always insert the module fixing latch of the module into the module fixing hole.
Forcing the hook into the hole will damage the module connector and module.

Installation
Shut off the external power supply!
Securely insert the module fixing projection into the module fixing hole so that the latch is
not misaligned.
Using the module fixing hole as a supporting point, push the module in the direction of arrow
until it clicks.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibration or impact,
secure the CPU module to the base unit using screws (module fixing screw M3x12, user-
prepared).

Base unit Base unit

Module

Module
connector

Module fixing hole

Module fixing Module fixing
projection projection

Module mounting lever

QH0007C

Fig. 9-16: Module mounting procedure

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 17

Installation Installation and removal of module

Removal

CAUTION:

E Shut off the external power supply for the system before removing the module.
When removing the module which is secured by module fixing screw, remove the
module fixing screw first and then module fixing projection off the module fixing
hole of the base unit. Failure to do so may damage the module fixing projection.

Base unit

Module

Support the module with both hands and

Module securely press the module fixing hook with your
connector finger.
Pull the module based on the supporting point
of module bottom while pressing the module
fixing hook.

While lifting the module, take off the module

fixing projection from the module fixing hole.

QH00008C

Fig. 9-17: Module removal procedure

9 18
Wiring Installation

9.6 Wiring
9.6.1 Wiring precautions

Wiring power supply lines

Wire the power supply lines for programmable controller, I/O devices, and other equipment
separately.

Voltage PLC

I/O equipment

Voltage PLC

I/O

I/O equipment

Other equipment

E000315C

Fig. 9-18: Separate power supplies for PLC and peripheral equipment

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 19

Installation Wiring

Power supply cables (110 V AC, 230 V AC) and DC cables should be bundled in separated
strings. Bundling can be done by cable twisting or wire straps. Connect the modules with
the shortest distance.
To reduce the voltage drop to the minimum, use the thickest wires possible (max. 2 mm2)
for 110 V AC, 230 V AC and 24 V DC wires.
Do not bundle the 110 V AC and 24 V DC wires with, or run them close to, the main circuit
(high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines (including common line). Reserve a distance
of at least 100 mm from adjacent wires.
As measures against surge (e.g. caused by lightning), connect a surge absorber for lightning:

PLC
AC I/O devices

E2

QH00043C_UK

Fig. 9-19: Connecting a lightning surge absorber

CAUTION:

E Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightning (E1) from that of the
programmable controller (E2).
Select a surge absorber for lightning whose power supply voltage does not exceed
the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply
voltage elevation.

9 20
Wiring Installation

Wiring of I/O equipment

The wires used for connection to the terminal block must be 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 in core.
Run the input and output lines away from each other.
Do not lay I/O signal cables close to the main circuit and high-voltage power lines. Keep a
safe distance of more than 100 mm from the above.
When the input and output lines cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines,
use a batch-shielded cable. Normally the shield of the shielded cable must be grounded on
the module side.

PLC

Input
Shielded cable

LOAD
Output
DC

E000318C

Fig. 9-20: Wiring of I/O equipment

Where wiring runs through piping, ground the piping.

Run the 24 V DC input line away from the 110 V AC and 230 V AC lines.

NOTE Wiring of 200 m or longer will raise current leakage due to the line capacity, resulting in a
fault.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 21

Installation Wiring

Grounding
Use a dedicated grounding wire as far as possible (see fig. 9-21, left example). Grounding
is done according class 3 (grounding resistance 100 or less).

Other Other Other

PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

MT00063C

Fig. 9-21: Grounding procedures

When a dedicated grounding cannot be provided, use common grounding as shown in the
center of Fig. 9-21. Do not use the grounding as shown in the right example.
If failures occur during operation due to grounding, cut the LG and FG terminals of the main
base unit from ground.
For grounding a cable, use the cable of 2 mm2 or more. Position the ground-contact point
as close as possible to the programmable controller (length of the grounding cable 30 cm
or less).

Shielding
For the communication of a MELSEC system with peripheral equipment shielded data lines
have to be used only. At best, the shielding is made of twisted copper. The density of the braiding
determines the effectiveness of the shielding. Make sure to follow the bending instructions of the
cable manufacturer, otherwise the shielding might fan out. Connect the shielding of the data line
only at one side to ground. Do not solder any wires with the shielding.

Analogue signal transmission

Use 2-wire shielded cables for low frequency analogue transmission over short distances.
Between sensor and receiver could occur potential differences on the reference conductor.
Therefore use isolating components like transformers, opto couplers etc.

Digital signal transmission

Follow the specifications of the interface concerning transfer rate and transfer distance, for an
error free digital signal transmission.

9 22
Wiring Installation

Connecting to the power supply module

CAUTION:

E Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2) wires for the 110/230 V AC and 24 V DC
power cables. Twist these wires starting at the connection terminals. To prevent
short-circuit due to loosening screws, use the solderless terminals with insulation
sleeves.
When LG and FG terminals are connected, ground the wires. Connect both termi-
nals only with ground. If LG and FG terminals are connected without grounding the
wires, the programmable controller may become susceptible to noise. Since the
LG terminal is not isolated there is the danger of an electrical shock, when touching
conducting parts or surfaces.

The following figure shows the wiring example of lines such as power lines and grounding lines
to the main base unit and extension base units. Please refer to the notes for wiring the power
supplies in section 7.4.

Transformator, refer to section 9.6.

Main base unit Q38B
CPU

FG
SG
230 V AC

Power supply
module
Input (230 V AC)
24 V DC
Extension cable

24 V DC power
supply of I/O
modules Extension base unit Q68B
I/O

FG
SG

Grounding Input (230 V AC)

QH00051C

Fig. 9-22: Single power supply system wiring example

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 9 23

Installation Wiring

9 24
Daily inspection Maintenance and inspection

10 Maintenance and inspection

In order to use the programmable controller in normal and optimal condition at all times, this sec-
tion describes items that must be maintained or inspected daily or at regular intervals.

10.1 Daily inspection

The items that must be inspected daily are listed in the following table:

Inspection item Inspection Judgment criteria Measures

Installation of base unit Check that fixing screws The screws and cover must be Retighten the screws.
are not loose and the installed securely
cover is not dislocated.
Installation of I/O module Check that the module is The module fixing hook must Securely engage the
not dislocated and the be engaged and installed module fixing hook.
unit fixing hook is securely.
engaged securely.
Connecting conditions Check for loose terminal Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal
screws. screws.
Check for distance The proper clearance must be Correct.
between solderless ter- provided between solderless
minals. terminals.
Check that the cable Connections must not be loose. Retighten the connector
connector is not loose. fixing screws.
Module indi- POWER Check that the LED is The LED must be on (green). refer to section 11.2.4
cation LED LED on. (Error if the LED is off or on
(red)).
RUN LED Check that the LED is on The LED must be on. (Error if refer to sections 11.2.8
in the RUN status. the LED is off/flickering.) and 11.2.9
ERR.LED Check that the LED is The LED must be off. (Error refer to sections 11.2.10
off. detected if the LED is on.) and 11.2.11
BAT. LED Check that the LED is The LED must be off. (Error if refer to section 11.2.12
off. the LED is on.)
Input LED Check that the LED turns The LED must be on when the refer to section 11.4
on and off. input power is turend on. The
LED must be off when the input
power is turned off.
(Error if the LED does not turn
on or turn off as indicated
above.)
Output LED Check that the LED turns The LED turns on when the refer to section 11.2.15
on and off. output power is turned on. The
LED must be off when the out-
put power is turned off.
(Error if the LED does not turn
on or turn off as indicated
above.)

Tab. 10-1: Daily inspection

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 1

Maintenance and inspection Periodic inspection

10.2 Periodic inspection

The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below.
When the equipment has been relocated or modified, or wiring layout has been changed, per-
form this inspection.

Inspection item Inspection Judgment criteria Measures

Ambient Ambient Measure with a ther- 0 to 55 C When the sequencer is
environment temperature mometer and a hygrom- used in the board, the
Ambient eter. Measure corrosive 5 to 95 % RH ambient temperature in
humidity gas. the board is relevant.
Atmosphere Corrosive gas must not be
present.
Power voltage Measure the voltage 85 to 132 V AC Change the power sup-
between the terminals 170 to 264 V AC ply or replace the trans-
(power supply module) 15.6 to 31.2 V DC former
Installation Looseness, Move the module to The module must be installed Retighten the screws. If
of modules rattling check for looseness and securely. the CPU, I/O, or power
rattling. supply module is loose,
fix it with screws.
Adhesion of Check visually. Dirt and foreign matter must Remove and clean.
dirt and for- not be present.
eign matter
Connections Looseness Check for loose terminal Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal
of terminal screws. screws.
screws
Proximity of Check visually. Solderless terminals must be Correct.
solderless positioned at proper intervals.
terminals to
each other
Looseness Check visually. Connectors must not be loose. Retighten the connector
of connec- fixing screws.
tors
Battery Check the BAT. LED at The LED must be off. Replace the battery
the front side of the CPU when the BAT. LED is
module. on.
Check the length of term Must not be used more than 5 Replace the battery if it
after purchasing the bat- years. has been used more
tery. than 5 years (even if
there is no voltage drop).
Check status of SM51 Must be turned off (refer to sec- Replace the battery
and SM52 tion 10.3.1) when SM51 or SM52 is
on.
The special registers
SD51 and SD52 indi-
cate the specific battery
of the memory of which
voltage is lowered.
PLC diagnostics Check the Error log. The Error log must not be refer to section 11.3
updated.
Maximum scan time Check the values of Maximum scan time must be Specify factors that
SD526 and SD527 using within the allowable range increase the scan time.
a programming device given in the specification of the (Check the operation
system. status of the trigger sig-
nal that passes through
a loop if loop positions
exist in the sequence
program.)

Tab. 10-2: Periodic inspection

10 2
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

10.3 Battery life and replacement procedure

The batteries installed in the CPU module and SRAM card are used for data retention of the pro-
gram memory, standard RAM, and latch device during the power failure. Special relays SM51
and SM52 turn on due to the battery voltage drop. Even if the special relays turn on, the program
and retained data are not deleted immediately (refer to section 10.3.1). But if the special relays
are not observed, the contents of the buffered memory may be lost.

NOTE After relay SM51 turns on, replace the battery as quickly as possible.
When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.

SM51 and SM52 turn on when the battery voltage of the CPU module or SRAM card is lowered.
To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered, check the contents of
the special registers SD51 and SD52.

Special registers SD51 and SD52

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Status indication for Battery for SRAM card Battery for CPU module

Tab. 10-3: Bit pattern SD51 and SD52

The cases for memory retention by the CPU module battery and the SRAM card battery are
described below. The important points are:
The CPU module battery cannot retain the SRAM card memory.
The SRAM card battery cannot retain the CPU module memory.

Power supply Voltage of buffer battery Voltage of buffer battery Memory retention
module for CPU for SRAM memory card CPU SRAM card
Sufficient  
Sufficient
Too low  
On
Sufficient  
Too low
Too low  
Sufficient  
Sufficient
Too low 
Off
Sufficient 
Too low
Too low

Tab. 10-4: Memory retention

 = retained
= not retained

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 3

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

10.3.1 Battery life

Buffer battery for CPU

The battery life depends on the CPU type. From Q02CPU on, the battery life is also determined
by the CPU version (serial number). Refer to section 4.6 for checking the CPU serial number.

NOTES When the battery (Q6BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
Replace the battery after this time.

Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.

If the battery life for data buffering has expired the guaranteed time of the following table,
store program and data into a ROM, so that the data dont get lost, if the PLC is powered
down or the battery voltage is low,
during the time given in the right column of the following table, save program and data on
a PC, after special relay SM52 is set.

When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.

Extending the battery life with the universal model CPU

The universal model CPU has a pro-longing function to extend the battery life. When setting
"switch 3" of the intelligent function module switch setting on the tab "I/O assignment", to the
value 0001H, only the internal clock is buffered by the battery. All other data, which are normally
buffered by the battery get lost during power shut off.
The current supplied by the battery for these CPU modules, what means the battery consump-
tion, is divided in four categories:

Factors of battery consumption

Battery consump-
Battery life-prolonging Size of file register file in standard RAM (SR) tion category
function
Set 1
Not set No file registers or 0 k words < SR 128 k words 2
128 k words < SR 384 k words 3
384 k words < SR 4

Tab. 10-5: Factors influencing the battery life time

The following describes measures for reducing battery consumption:
Enable the battery life-prolonging function.
When storing a file register in standard the RAM, minimize the file register file.
By performing the latch data backup function (to standard ROM).
If not powering on the programmable controller for a long period of time for shipment or other rea-
son, back up the data to the standard ROM.

10 4
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Battery Q6BAT
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU

Power-on Battery life (Q6BAT)

CPU time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 turned on
Q00JCPU 0% 26000 hours 43800 hours 710 hours (30 days)
Q00CPU (2.96 years) (5 years)
30 % 37142 hours
(4.23 years)
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
Q01CPU 0% 5600 hours 25175 hours 420 hours (18 days)
(0.63 years) (2.87 years)
30 % 8000 hours 35964 hours
(0.91 years) (4.10 years)
50 % 11200 hours 43800 hours
(1.27 years) (5 years)
70 % 18666 hours
(2.13 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-6: Battery (Q6BAT) lives of Q00JCPU, Q00CPU or Q01CPU

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is
50 %.
 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature
range of 25 C to 75 C (operating ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C).
 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values meas-
ured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with charac-
teristics of the memory.
In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes:
The battery connector is disconnected.
The lead wire of the battery is broken.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 5

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial No. is "05010..." or earlier)

Power-on Battery life (Q6BAT)

CPU
time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 turned on
Q02CPU 0% 5433 hours 43800 hours 120 hours (5 days)
(0.62 years) (5 years)
30 % 7761 hours
(0.88 years)
50 % 10866 hours
(1.24 years)
70 % 18110 hours
(2.06 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q02HCPU 0% 2341 hours 14550 hours 120 hours (5 days)
Q06HCPU (0.26 years) (1.66 years)
30 % 3344 hours 20786 hours
(0.38 years) (2.37 years)
50 % 4682 hours 29100 hours
(0.53 years) (3.32 years)
70 % 7803 hours 43800 hours
(0.89 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q12HCPU 0% 1260 hours 6096 hours 48 hours (2 days)
Q25HCPU (0.14 years) (0.69 years)
30 % 1800 hours 8709 hours
(0.20 years) (0.99 years)
50 % 2520 hours 12192 hours
(0.28 years) (1.39 years)
70 % 4200 hours 20320 hours
(0.47 years) (2.31 years)
100 % 43800 hours 43800 hours
(5 years) (5 years)

Tab. 10-7: Battery (Q6BAT) lives of Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial
No. is "05010..." or earlier)

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is
50 %.
 At 70 C.
 At 40 C.

10 6
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial No. is "05011..." or later), Process
CPU (QPHCPU) and Redundant CPU (QPRHCPU)

Power-on Battery life (Q6BAT)

CPU
time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 turned on
Q02CPU 0% 30000 hours 43800 hours 120 hours (5 days)
(3.42 years) (5 years)
30 % 42887 hours
(4.89 years)
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
Q02HCPU 0% 2341 hours 18364 hours 120 hours (5 days)
Q06HCPU (0.26 years) (2.09 years)
30 % 3344 hours 26234 hours
(0.38 years) (2.99 years)
50 % 4682 hours 36728 hours
(0.53 years) (4.19 years)
70 % 7803 hours 43800 hours
(0.89 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q02PHCPU 0% 1897 hours 14229 hours 96 hours (4 days)
Q06PHCPU (0.21 years) (1.62 years)
30 % 2710 hours 20327 hours
(0.30 years) (2.32 years)
50 % 3794 hours 28458 hours
(0.43 years) (3.25 years)
70 % 6323 hours 43800 hours
(0.72 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q12HCPU 0% 1260 hours 7755 hours 48 hours (2 days)
Q25HCPU (0.14 years) (0.88 years)
Q12PHCPU 30 % 1800 hours 11079 hours
Q25PHCPU (0.20 years) (1.26 years)
Q12PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU 50 % 2520 hours 15510 hours
(0.28 years) (1.77 years)
70 % 4200 hours 28850 hours
(0.47 years) (2.95 years)
100 % 43800 hours 43800 hours
(5 years) (5 years)

Tab. 10-8: Battery (Q6BAT) lives of High performance model QCPU (first digits of serial No. is
"05011..." or later), Process CPU and Redundant CPU
 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature
range of 25 C to 75 C (operating ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C).
 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values meas-
ured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with charac-
teristics of the memory.
In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes:
The battery connector is disconnected.
The lead wire of the battery is broken.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 7

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

Universal model QCPU

Battery con- Battery life (Q6BAT)

Power-on
CPU time ratio sumption  Actual service val- After SM52
category  Guaranteed value ue turned on 
Q00U(J)CPU 0% 30100 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
Q01UCPU (3.44 years) (5 years) (25 days)
Q02UCPU 30 % 43000 hours
Q03UD(E)CPU (4.91 years)
1
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
0% 25300 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(2.89 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 36100 hours
2 (4.12 years)
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
Q04UD(E)HCPU 0% 30100 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(3.44 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 43000 hours
1 (4.91 years)
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
0% 4300 hours 32100 hours 384 hours
(0.49 years) (3.66 years) (16 days)
30 % 6100 hours 43800 hours
(0.70 years) (5 years)
50 % 8600 hours
2
(0.98 years)
70 % 14300 hours
(1.63 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q06UD(E)HCPU 0% 25300 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(2.89 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 36100 hours
1 (4.12 years)
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
0% 4200 hours 32100 hours 384 hours
(0.48 years) (3.66 years) (16 days)
30 % 6000 hours 43800 hours
(0.68 years) (5 years)
50 % 8400 hours
2
(0.96 years)
70 % 14000 hours
(1.60 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 2300 hours 19200 hours 192 hours
(0.26 years) (2.19 years) (8 days)
30 % 3200 hours 27400 hours
(0.37 years) (3.13 years)
50 % 4600 hours 38400 hours
3
(0.53 years) (4.38 years)
70 % 7600 hours 43800 hours
(0.87 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-9: Battery (Q6BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU

10 8
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Battery con- Battery life (Q6BAT)

CPU Power-on sumption
time ratio  Actual service val- After SM52
category  Guaranteed value ue turned on 
Q10UD(E)HCPU 0% 22600 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
Q13UD(E)HCPU (2.58 years) (5 years) (25 days)
Q20UD(E)HCPU 30 % 32200 hours
Q26UD(E)HCPU (3.68 years)
1
50 % 43800 hours
70 % (5 years)
100 %
0% 4100 hours 26200 hours 384 hours
(0.47 years) (2.99 years) (16 days)
30 % 5800 hours 37400 hours
(0.66 years) (4.27 years)
50 % 8200 hours 43800 hours
2
(0.94 years) (5 years)
70 % 13600 hours
(1.55 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 2300 hours 18600 hours 192 hours
(0.26 years) (2.12 years) (8 days)
30 % 3200 hours 26500 hours
(0.37 years) (3.03 years)
50 % 4600 hours 37200 hours
3
(0.53 years) (4.25 years)
70 % 7600 hours 43800 hours
(0.87 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 1500 hours 13800 hours 144 hours
(0.17 years) (1.58 years) (6 days)
30 % 2100 hours 19700 hours
(0.24 years) (2.25 years)
50 % 3000 hours 27600 hours
4
(0.34 years) (3.15 years)
70 % 5000 hours 43800 hours
(0.57 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-9: Battery (Q6BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 refer to Tab. 10-5
 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature
range of 25 C to 75 C (operating ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C).
The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values meas-
ured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with charac-
teristics of the memory.
 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes:
The battery connector is disconnected.
The lead wire of the battery is broken.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 9

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

Battery Q7BAT

NOTES When the battery (Q7BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
Replace the battery after this time.

Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

The battery Q7BAT is not available for the Basic model QCPU (00JCPU, Q00CPU and
Q01CPU).

Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial No. is "05010..." or earlier)

Power-on Battery life (Q7BAT)

CPU time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 turned on
Q02CPU 0% 13000 hours 43800 hours 240 hours (10 days)
(1.48 years) (5 years)
30 % 18571 hours
(2.11 years)
50 % 26000 hours
(2.96 years)
70 % 43333 hours
(4.94 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q02HCPU 0% 5000 hours 38881 hours 240 hours (10 days)
Q06HCPU (0.57 years) (4.43 years)
30 % 7142 hours 43800 hours
(0.81 years) (5 years)
50 % 10000 hours
(1.14 years)
70 % 16666 hours
(1.90 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q12HCPU 0% 2900 hours 16711 hours 96 hours (4 days)
Q25HCPU (0.33 years) (1.90 years)
30 % 4142 hours 23873 hours
(0.47 years) (2.72 years)
50 % 5800 hours 33422 hours
(0.66 years) (3.81 years)
70 % 9666 hours 43800 hours
(1.10 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-10:Battery (Q7BAT) lives of Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial
No. is "05010..." or earlier)

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 At 70 C.
 At 40 C.

10 10
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Q02(H)-, Q06H-, Q12H- or Q25HCPU (first digits of serial No. is "05011..." or later), Process
CPU (QPHCPU) and Redundant CPU (QPRHCPU)

Power-on Battery life (Q7BAT)

CPU
time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 turned on
Q02CPU 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 240 hours (10 days)
30 % (5 years) (5 years)
50 %
70 %
100 %
Q02HCPU 0% 5000 hours 43800 hours 240 hours (10 days)
Q06HCPU (0.57 years) (5 years)
30 % 7142 hours
(0.81 years)
50 % 10000 hours
(1.14 years)
70 % 16666 hours
(1.90 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q02PHCPU 0% 4051 hours 38727 hours 192 hours (8 days)
Q06PHCPU (0.46 years) (4.42 years)
30 % 5787 hours 43800 hours
(0.66 years) (5 years)
50 % 8102 hours
(0.92 years)
70 % 13503 hours
(1.54 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q12HCPU 0% 2900 hours 21107 hours 96 hours (4 days)
Q25HCPU (0.33 years) (2.40 years)
Q12PHCPU 30 % 4142 hours 30153 hours
Q25PHCPU (0.47 years) (3.44 years)
Q12PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU 50 % 5800 hours 42214 hours
(0.66 years) (4.81 years)
70 % 9666 hours 43800 hours
(1.10 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-11:Battery (Q7BAT) lives of High performance model QCPU (first digits of serial No. is
"05011..." or later), Process CPU and Redundant CPU
 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature
range of 25 C to 75 C (operating ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C).
 The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values meas-
ured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with charac-
teristics of the memory.
In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes:
The battery connector is disconnected.
The lead wire of the battery is broken.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 11

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

Universal model QCPU

Battery con- Battery life (Q7BAT)

Power-on
CPU time ratio sumption  Actual service After SM52
category  Guaranteed value value turned on 
Q00U(J)CPU 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
Q01UCPU 30 % (5 years) (5 years) (25 days)
Q02UCPU
Q03UD(E)CPU 50 % 1
70 %
100 %
0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
30 % (5 years) (5 years) (25 days)
50 % 2
70 %
100 %
Q04UD(E)HCPU 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
30 % (5 years) (5 years) (25 days)
50 % 1
70 %
100 %
0% 11700 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(1.34 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 16700 hours
(1.91 years)
50 % 23400 hours
2
(2.67 years)
70 % 39000 hours
(4.45 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
Q06UD(E)HCPU 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
30 % (5 years) (5 years) (25 days)
50 % 1
70 %
100 %
0% 11400 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(1.30 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 16200 hours
(1.85 years)
50 % 22800 hours
2
(2.60 years)
70 % 38000 hours
(4.34 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 5000 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(0.57 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 7100 hours
(0.81 years)
50 % 10000 hours
3
(1.14 years)
70 % 16600 hours
(1.89 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-12:Battery (Q7BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU

10 12
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Battery con- Battery life (Q7BAT)

CPU Power-on sumption
time ratio  Actual service After SM52
category  Guaranteed value value turned on 
Q10UD(E)HCPU 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
Q13UD(E)HCPU 30 % (5 years) (5 years) (25 days)
Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU 50 % 1
70 %
100 %
0% 11100 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(1.27 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 15800 hours
(1.80 years)
50 % 22000 hours
2
(2.53 years)
70 % 37000 hours
(4.22 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 5000 hours 43800 hours 600 hours
(0.57 years) (5 years) (25 days)
30 % 7100 hours
(0.81 years)
50 % 10000 hours
3
(1.14 years)
70 % 16600 hours
(1.89 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)
0% 3700 hours 36100 hours 432 hours
(0.42 years) (4.12 years) (18 days)
30 % 5200 hours 43800 hours
(0.59 years) (5 years)
50 % 7400 hours
4
(0.84 years)
70 % 12300 hours
(1.40 years)
100 % 43800 hours
(5 years)

Tab. 10-12:Battery (Q7BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 refer to Tab. 10-5
 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C, which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturer-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature
range of 25 C to 75 C (operating ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C).
The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values meas-
ured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C. This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with charac-
teristics of the memory.
 In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes:
The battery connector is disconnected.
The lead wire of the battery is broken.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 13

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

SRAM card battery

NOTES Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.

If the battery life for data buffering has expired the guaranteed time of the following table,
store program and data into a ROM, so that the data dont get lost, if the PLC is powered
down or the battery voltage is low,
during the time given in the right column of the following table, save program and data on
a PC, after special relay SM52 is set.

Note that the SRAM card battery is consumed even while the programmable controller is
powered ON with the CPU module battery connected.

When the battery-low special relay SM52 turned on, immediately change the battery. Even if
an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically accord-
ing to the operating condition.

The SRAM card is not available for the Basic model QCPU.

Q2MEM-BAT
The life time of the battery Q2MEM-BAT depends on the used memory board and on the time,
the CPU is switched ON. Additionally it depends on the serial number (version) of the CPU.

Power-on Battery life

SRAM card time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM51 turned on
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 690 hours 6336 hours 8 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS (28 days) (0.72 years)
100 % 11784 hours 13872 hours 8 hours
(1.34 years) (1.58 years)

Tab. 10-13:Battery life (Q2MEM-BAT) when the SRAM card is installed in CPU modules with
the serial No. (first digits) is "04011" or earlier

Battery life
Power-on
SRAM card time ratio Actual service value
Guaranteed value  After SM52 turned on
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 690 hours 6336 hours 8 hours
(Manufacturing (28 days) (0.72 years)
control No. A) 100 % 11784 hours 13872 hours
(1.34 years) (1.58 years)
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 2400 hours 23660 hours 20 hours
(Manufacturing (0.27 years) (2.7 years)
control No. B) 30 % 2880 hours 31540 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS (0.32 years) (3.6 years)
50 % 4320 hours 39420 hours
(0.49 years) (4.5 years)
70 % 6480 hours 43800 hours
(0.73 years) (5 years)
100 % 43800 hours 43800 hours 50 hours
(5 years) (5 years)

Tab. 10-14:Battery life (Q2MEM-BAT) when the SRAM card is installed in CPU modules with
the serial No. (first digits) is "04012" or later

 The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50 %.
 The actual value may vary depending on ambient temperature.

10 14
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

The manufacturer control number of the SRAM card is written on the label on the back of the
SRAM card. When character string including the manufacturer control number is 4 digits, the
third digit from the leftmost is the manufacturer control number.

Manufacturer control number (Version)

("A" in this example)

Q2MEM-2MBS.jpg

Fig. 10-1: Indication of version of SRAM card

Q3MEM-BAT

Battery life
SRAM card Power-on
time ratio Actual service
Guaranteed value After SM52 turned on
value 
Q3MEM-4MBS 0% 43800 hours 43800 hours 50 hours
30 % (5 years) (5 years)
50 %
70 %
100 %
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 36300 hours 43800 hours 50 hours
(Manufacturing (4.1 years) (5 years)
control No. B) 30 % 43800 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS (5 years)
50 %
70 %
100 %

Tab. 10-15:Battery life (Q3MEM-BAT)

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 15

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

10.3.2 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery

The battery of the CPU types Q00J, Q00 and Q01 are mounted on the front side of the module.
All other CPU types have a case on the bottom side of the CPU (also refer to section 5.2.2).
The programmable controller power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the
battery, so that the capacitor is sufficiently charged for backing up the memory data during bat-
tery replacement.

NOTES Data in the memory are backed up for 3 minutes max. by a capacitor even after the battery is
removed. The replacement of the battery should be done during this time.

Back up the data in the CPU module by a PC before starting replacement.

When replacing a battery of a Redundant CPU, back up the memory data such as programs
by the memory copy from the control system to the standby system.
Do a manual system switching by the programming software GX Developer or GX IEC
Developer and replace the CPU battery of the former control system afterwards.
For the memory copy from control system to standby system and system switching function,
refer to the User's Manual of the Redundant System.

After replacing a battery, write the date for next battery replacement on the sticker on the back
side of the front cover. Write the proper date by checking the battery life.

Label for notes

Fig. 10-2: Label for notes of the date for next battery replacement on the back side of the front
cover

10 16
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

Replacement procedure of the Q6BAT battery

 Turn off the programmable controller power supply.
 Remove the CPU module from the base unit.
 Open the battery cover of the CPU
Disconnect the battery connector.
 Remove the old battery from its holder.
 Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction.
 Connect the lead to the connector.
% Insert the battery holder into the CPU module (not for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU).
& Install the CPU module into the base unit.
' Turn on the programmable controller power supply.
( Monitor SM51 to verify on/off.
If the special relay is still set, indicating with SD52 a low CPU battery voltage, retry the
replacement. Check the battery voltage. If it is too low for the memory card, the battery must
be replaced (refer to section 10.3.3).

QCPU
CPU module front

CPU module bottom

Battery Q6BAT

Connector
Holder for connector

QH00029C

Fig. 10-3: Location of battery Q6BAT

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 17

Maintenance and inspection Battery life and replacement procedure

Replacement procedure of the Q7BAT battery or replacement of a Q6BAT by Q7BAT

NOTE Battery Q7BAT is not available in EU countries.

 Turn off the programmable controller power supply.

 Remove the CPU module from the base unit.
 If the battery Q6BAT is used, open the battery case of the CPU. When a battery Q7BAT is
installed, remove the battery holder at the bottom of the CPU module.
Disconnect the battery connector.
 If the Q6BAT should be replaced by Q7BAT, remove the battery Q6BAT and the cover of the
battery case.
When a Q7BAT is to be replaced by a Q7BAT, disengage the catch on one side of the battery
holder to disassemble the holder into two, and remove the old battery. Insert the new Q7BAT
into the holder in the correct direction, and reassemble the battery holder so that the battery
cable comes out of the hole in the holder connection.

Fig. 10-4:
Disengage the catch on one side of the
battery holder to disassemble the holder into
two.

Battery
holder
Q7BAT

Battery holder QH00101c_UK

 Connect the Q7BAT to the battery connector of the CPU module, and set it into the connector
holder of the battery holder.
 Set the battery holder to the CPU module.

CPU module front

QCPU

CPU module bottom

Battery
holder with
Q7BAT

Connector
QH00100C

Fig. 10-5: Location of battery Q7BAT at the bottom of the CPU module

10 18
Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

% Install the CPU module into the base unit.

& Turn on the programmable controller power supply.
' Monitor SM51 to verify on/off.
If the special relay is still set, indicating with SD52 a low CPU battery voltage, retry the
replacement. Check the battery voltage. If it is too low for the memory card, the battery must
be replaced (refer to next section 10.3.3).

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 19

Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

10.3.3 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure

NOTES Before replacing battery back up the SRAM card data using a programming device.

The battery replacement at the CPU must be done with power supply ON. Observe all safety
precaution when working with power supply switched on:

When replacing the battery with the programmable controller power supply off, proceed as
follows:
- Back up the SRAM card data using a programming device.
- Remove the memory card and replace the battery.
- Insert the memory card into the CPU.
- Write the backed up data from the programming device to the memory card.

When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card, take care so that the
battery does not come out of the battery holder.

Replacement procedure of SRAM card battery Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS

 Open the front cover while the programmable controller power supply is on.
 With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc., remove the battery holder locking switch from the LOCK
position (also refer to section 5.2.3).
 Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card.
Remove the old battery from its holder.
 Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction.
 Insert the battery holder to the memory card and check that the battery holder fixing switch
is set to the LOCK position.
 Monitor SM52 to verify on/off. If the special relay is still set, indicating with SD52 a low CPU
battery voltage, retry the replacement.
The following figure shows some of the steps for replacing the battery.

Release
direction

Remove battery holder Remove battery

Release battery holder

locking switch

Insert new battery

+ (positive)
Insert battery holder

Fig. 10-6: Replacing SRAM card batteries Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 20

Battery life and replacement procedure Maintenance and inspection

NOTE Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
Battery holder latches

Battery
fixing guide

Battery holder

Replacement procedure of SRAM card battery Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS

 Remove a memory card protective cover of the CPU module at power-on status of the
programmable controller (refer to section 5.1.3).
 With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc., remove the battery holder locking switch from the LOCK
position (also refer to section 5.2.3).
 Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card.
Remove the old battery from its holder.
 Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction.
 Insert the battery holder into the SRAM card.
 Set the battery holder fixing switch to the LOCK position.
% Set the memory card protective cover on the CPU module.
& Monitor SM52 to verify on/off. If the special relay is still set, indicating with SD52 a low CPU
battery voltage, retry the replacement.
The following figure shows some of the steps for replacing the buffer battery,

Remove memory card protective cover Remove battery holder

+ (positive)

Insert new battery

Fig. 10-7: Replacing SRAM card batteries Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 10 21

Maintenance and inspection Resuming operation of CPU after storage

10.4 Resuming operation of CPU after storage

The content of the memory is kept by the battery, even if the CPU or memory card is stored or
if the power supply of the PLC hasnt been switched on over a long time. Refer to section 10.3.1
for the life time of the batteries. (The power-on time ratio is 0 %, when the power supply is
switched off or during storage.)
Data may be lost,
if the CPU or memory card is stored witout battery.
if a battery is installed, but the battery voltage falls under the minimum value during storage.

Buffer battery of the CPU

If the CPU battery is missing or discharged, format the following memory areas by the program-
ming software GX Developer or GX IEC Developer, before operating the CPU:
Program memory
Standard RAM.
To format a program memory during boot operation, select the "Clear program memory" check-
box in the Boot file tab of the PLC parameter dialog box.

Buffer battery of the SRAM memory card

If the SRAM memory card battery is missing or discharged, format the memory card, before
operating the CPU too.

NOTES Data in the CPU standard ROM and in Flash and ATA memory cards dont need battery buff-
ering. The data will not be lost even after demounting or at battery failure.

When using the function of storing latch data into the standard ROM with the universal
model CPU PLC, these data will not be lost even after demounting or at battery failure.

Save all data from the CPU and from the memory card by the programming software GX
Developer or GX IEC Developer, before storage or shutting off the power supply of the PLC.

When the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is reset, the CPU
module initializes all of the following data if an error is detected:
Program memory data
Standard RAM data
Error history
Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the parameter, special
relay SM900 to SM999, special register SD900 to SD900)
Sampling trace data

10 22
Troubleshooting basics Troubleshooting

11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes errors that may occur during system operation, how to locate the errors,
and measures against the errors.

11.1 Troubleshooting basics

In order to increase the reliability of the system, resuming the system operation promptly after
correcting a problem is one of the important factors as well as using reliable device. To promptly
start up the system, the trouble cause must be located and eliminated correctly.
The basic three points to be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows:

Visual inspection
Behavior of the programmable controller and other connected devices (in STOP mode or in
operation)
Applicability of the power supply
States of input and output devices
Installation states of the power supply module, CPU module, I/O module, intelligent function
module, and extension cables
Wiring (Cables including input and output cables)
Display status of all indicators such as "POWER", "RUN", "ERR.", and "I/O" LEDs
Setting status of all switches such as the number of extension base units and data retention
time during power failure
After checking above points, connect a programming device and monitor the operating status
and programs of the programmable controller.

Error checking
Check how the error status changes by operating the following to the programmable controller.
Set the mode switch to STOP.
Clear the Latch area with the L.CLR switch or with the programming device.
Power on and off.*
* Resetting and powering off clears the error codes stored in the completion status area for the dedicated
instruction and the buffer memory states of intelligent function modules. Before resetting or powering off,
backup the error codes and buffer memory states that are relevant to the error.

Narrowing down the scope for identifying trouble cause

Estimate the troubled part in accordance with above items (visual inspection, error checking).
Trouble causes could occur in:
Programmable controller or external devices
I/O module or others
Sequence program

The troubleshooting flowcharts on following pages provide more help for identifying trouble
causes.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 1

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting flowchart

Error description

ERR. terminal has turned off (opened) refer to section 11.2.1

MODE LED does not turn on refer to section 11.2.2

MODE LED is flickerin refer to section 11.2.3

POWER LED has turned off refer to section 11.2.4

POWER LED of the Life detection power

supply module is flickering in orange. refer to section 11.2.5

POWER LED of the redundant power supply

module has turned on in red. refer to section 11.2.6

LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply refer to section 11.2.7
module has turned on

RUN LED has turned off refer to section 11.2.8

RUN LED is flickering refer to section 11.2.9

ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering refer to section 11.2.10

USER LED has turned on refer to section 11.2.11

BAT.ARM LED has turned on refer to section 11.2.12

BOOT LED is flickering refer to section 11.2.13

LEDs of the output module do not turn on refer to section 11.2.14

(to be continued next page)

11 2
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

(continued from the previous page)

I/O modules do not operate normally refer to section 11.2.15

Unable to read a program refer to section 11.2.16

Unable to write a program refer to section 11.2.17

Program is rewritten unintentionally refer to section 11.2.18

Unable to perform boot operation

from memory card refer to section 11.2.19

UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occurred refer to section 11.2.20

CONTROL BUS ERR. has occurred refer to section 11.2.21

CPU module does not start refer to section 11.2.22

CPU module cannot communicate with

GX (IEC) Developer refer to section 11.2.23

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 3

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.1 ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened)

The ERR. contact (error output) of the power supplies is closed in normal operation (refer to sec-
tions 7.3 and 7.4).
If the ERR. terminal has turned off (opened), check first: How is the ERR. LED of the CPU
module? If the ERR. LED is flickering (CPU module is in stop error), check error details and
take action according to the details (refer to section 11.2.10).
If the ERR. LED of the CPU is not flickering, check the following:
Is power supplied? Is the power supply voltage proper?
If not, supply power of proper voltage.
If the power supply voltage is proper, check the MODE LED of the CPU*. If its on (green),
the corresponding power supply module is faulty (replace it with a normal power supply
module).
* Q00J-, Q00- or Q01CPU do not have a MODE LED. In this case continue troubleshooting with the next point.

If the MODE LED is off, remove the corresponding power supply module, and mount it to
the normal base unit. (Do not mount any modules other than the power supply module.)
If the POWER LED of the power supply module is on (red), the corresponding power supply
module is faulty (replace it with a normal power supply module).
If the POWER LED of the power supply module turned on (green), mount the corresponding
power supply module to the original system again, and remove all modules other than the
power supply module from the base unit.
If the POWER LED of the power supply module is off, the base unit that includes the
corresponding power supply module is faulty and must be replaced.
If the POWER LED of the power supply module is on (green), (when mounted to the original
system again), check the sum of internal current consumptions of the modules that comprise
the system.
If the total current exceeds the rated current consumption of one power supply module,
Reexamine the system configuration to make the total current less than the rated current
consumption of one power supply module.
If the total current does not exceed the rated current consumption of one power supply
module, a hardware fault may have occurred in one of the modules. Execute operation
checks in due order, starting with the minimum system. For the module that does not
operate, please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining
a detailed description of the problem.

NOTE If a CPU module stop error occurs during use of two redundant power supply modules, the
error is output from the ERR. terminals of the two redundant power supply modules. (Both
ERR. terminals are opened.)

11 4
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal

Detected errors
Power supply module Basic model QCPU *
used on High performance model
Process CPU Redundant CPU
QCPU
Universal model QCPU*
Main base unit Q33B  AC power not input
Q35B  Power supply module fuse blown
Q38B
Q312B  CPU module stop error
Q38DB  CPU RESET
Q312DB
Q32SB  AC power not input
Q33SB  Power supply module
Q35SB fuse blown (Cannot be combined)
 CPU module stop error
 CPU RESET
Q38RB  Power supply module failure
 AC power not input
 Power supply module fuse blown
 CPU module stop error
 CPU RESET
Extension base Q63B
unit Q65B
Errors cannot be detected (always off)
Q68B
Q612B
Q68RB  Power supply module failure (Cannot be added)
(two  AC power not input
power
supply  Power supply module fuse blown
modules
used)

Tab. 11-1: Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal

* Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal)

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 5

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.2 The MODE LED does not turn on

Refer to the following flowchart when the MODE LED of the CPU module does not turn on at pro-
grammable controller power-on.

The MODE LED has not turned on

POWER LED off:

Is the POWER LED NO refer to section 11.2.4
of the power supply
module green? POWER LED on (red) (redundant
power supply modules only):
refer to section 11.2.6
YES

Are all the power supply NO

modules powered on? Is the wiring Check the wiring and power on all
of the power supply the power supply modules.
module correct?

YES NO Can MODE YES

LED turn on?
Connect programming device and CPU module

Can the CPU YES Carry out PLC diagnostics, and perform
communicate with the program- troubleshooting according to the diag-
ming device? nostics result.
NO

Is the extension cable NO

connected properly? Connect the extension cable properly
(OUT -> IN)

YES NO Can MODE YES

LED turn on?

Is the CPU module RESET position Set the RESET/L.CLR switch to

RESET/L.CLR switch in the neutral position.
the neutral position?

Neutral position NO Can MODE YES

LED turn on?
Replace the power supply module and
confirm that the "POER" LED is turned on
green.

Can MODE YES Hardware fault of power supply module

LED turn on?

NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in
any of the following modules:
 Main base unit, extension base unit Completed
 Extension cable
 CPU module
 I/O module or intelligent function
module
Perform operations in due order, star-
ting with the minimum system where the
power supply module and CPU module
are mounted on the main base unit.
For the module that does not operate,
please consult your local Mitsubishi ser-
vice center or representative, explaining
a detailed description of the problem.

11 6
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.3 When the MODE LED is flickering

Refer to the following flowchart when the MODE LED of the CPU module flickers at program-
mable controller poweron, at operation start or during operation.

The MODE LED is flickering.

YES
Have the forced ON/OFF Cancel forced ON/OFF
settings been made?

NO
NO Can MODE YES
LED turn on?
RESET position
Is the CPU module
RESET/L.CLR switch in the
Set RESET/L.CLR

   
switchto
the
the neutral position?  
neutral position.

Neutral position
NO Can MODE YES
LED turn on?

$ 
Hardware fault
    
Execute operation checks in due order,
starting with the minimum system where
#     
the power supply module and CPU module
      
are mounted on the main base unit. Completed
   ! 
For the module that does not operate, ple-
ase contact your local Mitsubishi service
   "#
center or representative, explaining a
    
detailed description of the problem.
!

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 7

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.4 When the POWER LED has turned off

The POWER LED turned off

Is the MODE YES

LED of the CPU module on
in green?
refer to (A) on the next page
NO

NO
Is the power being supplied? Supply power

YES NO YES (green)

Is the POWER LED on?

YES (red) 

refer to section 11.2.6

NO
Is the power voltage within Adjust the voltage within the specification
the specification? 

YES YES (green)

NO
Is the POWER LED on?

YES (red) 

refer to section 11.2.6

NO
Is the power supply module Mount the power supply module securely
mounted securely?

YES YES (green)

NO
Is the POWER LED on?

YES (red) 
Remove all the modules except for
the power supply module from the
base unit. refer to section 11.2.6

NO The base unit that includes the

Is the POWER LED power supply module is faulty.
turned on? (Replace the base unit.)

YES (green)

refer to (B) on the next page Completed

 Specified voltage range:

Rated input voltage 100120 V AC: 85 to 132 V AC,
Rated input voltage 200240 V AC: 170 to 264 V AC,
Rated input voltage 24 V DC: 15.6 to 31.2 V DC
 Applicable only to the redundant power supply module

11 8
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

(continued from the previous page)

Power on the programmable controller again

YES
Is the POWER LED off? Replace the faulty module

NO

YES
Is the POWER LED on in Completed
green?

NO

NO
Is the POWER LED flicker- Replace the faulty module
ing in orange?

YES

If this problem occurs frequently,

replace the power supply module.
If the same problem still remains after
the replacement, please consult your
local Mitsubishi service center or rep-
resentative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

NO

Check the total internal current con-

sumption (5 V DC) of the modules
that are configuring the system.

Is the total current YES

exceeding the rated output current Reexamine the system configura-
of the power supply tion not to let the total current
module?
exceed the rated output current of
the power supply module.
NO

Hardware fault
Check the operation starting from the
smallest system.
For the module that does not operate,
please consult your local Mitsubishi ser-
vice center or representative, explaining
a detailed description of the problem.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 9

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.5 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange

When the POWER LED of the Life detection power supply module Q61P-D flickers in orange at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller, power on the programmable con-
troller again.
If the POWER LED is flickering again, the corresponding power supply module is faulty and
must be replaced.
If the POWER LED is on in green after powering on, there is no error.
If the POWER LED is off after powering on, refer to the flowchart for when the POWER LED
turned off in section 11.2.4.

11.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned on in red

When the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module has turned on in red at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller, remove the corresponding
redundant power supply module, and mount it onto the normal redundant base unit. (At this
time, do not mount any modules other than the redundant power supply module.)
If the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module is off or on in red, the
corresponding redundant power supply module is faulty. (Replace it with a normal one.)
If the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module is on in green, return the
corresponding redundant power supply module to the original system, and remove all
modules other than the redundant power supply module from the redundant base unit.
If the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module is off, the redundant base unit
that includes the corresponding redundant power supply module is faulty. (Replace it with
a normal redundant base unit.)
If the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module is on in green (when returned to
the original system), check the sum of internal current consumptions of the modules that
comprise the system.
If the total current exceeds the rated output current of the power supply module,
reexamine the system configuration to make the total current less than the rated current
consumption of one redundant power supply module.
If the total current does not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module,
a hardware fault may have occurred in one of the modules. Execute operation checks in
due order, starting with the minimum system. For the module that does not operate,
please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a
detailed description of the problem.

11.2.7 When the LIFE LED has turned off or turned on in red/is flickering in red

When the LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply module Q61P-D turned off or turned on
in red/is flickering in red at power-on or during operation of the programmable controller, refer to
section 7.2.3 for possible causes.

11 10
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.8 When the RUN LED has turned off

The RUN LED has turned off

POWER LED is off:

refer to section 11.2.4
Is the POWER LED NO
of the power supply module on POWER LED is on in red:
in green? (redundant power supply modules
only):
YES refer to section 11.2.6

YES
Is ERR. LED on/flickering? refer to section 11.2.10 (ERR. LED
has turned on or is flickering)

NO
1) Programmable controller part fault/
RUN LED is poor connection between the
Reset the CPU module on module and base unit
2) Excessive noise generatio
RUN LED is
off
case of case of
Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP 1) 2)
switch* to STOP and write END to
address 0 with the programming Please consult your local Mitsubishi
device. service center or representative,
explaining a detailed description of the
problem.

Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP RUN" LED does not

switch* to RUN and enter to the turn on
monitor mode with the GX (IEC)
Developer to be operated.

RUN LED is on

Possible cause is a sequence program

error.

Check the program and modify the Connect a surge suppression circuit,
program error location. such as CR, to the noise source.

NO
Can RUN LED turn on?

YES

Completed

* For the Basic model QCPU, use the RUN/STOP/RESET switch for operation.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 11

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.9 When the RUN LED is flickering

When the programs or parameters are written into the CPU module during the STOP status and
then the RUN/STOP switch* is set from STOP to RUN, the RUN LED of the CPU module flickers.
Although this status does not mean the CPU module error, the CPU module stops the operation.
Reset the CPU after changing the program or parameters in STOP mode. Afterwards select the
RUN mode by setting the RUN/STOP switch* to RUN.
If the CPU should restart without reset, after changing the program or parameters in STOP
mode, set the RUN/STOP switch* from STOP to RUN, afterwards to STOP and then again to
RUN.

11.2.10 When the ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering

ERR. LED is on/flickering

Special relay NO
SM1 on?

YES

Hardware fault Check error code and take

Error cause corresponding measures

Set the RUN/STOP switch* YES Can error be

to STOP corrected?

NO
Correct error
(refer to section 11.3) Eliminate error cause

Reset the CPU module

Set the RUN/STOP switch*

to RUN

YES Is ERR. LED Please consult your local

on/flickering? Mitsubishi service center
or representative.
NO

Completed

* For the Basic model QCPU, use the RUN/STOP/RESET switch for operation.

11 12
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.11 When the USER LED has turned on

The USER LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the annunciator (F)
turns on. Monitor the corresponding special relays in the monitor mode of a programming device
(CHK instruction = SM80, SD80; annunciator F = SM62, SD62 to SD79).
The USER LED can be turned off by:
Resetting with the RESET/L.CLR switch or
Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program.

NOTE When the RESET/L.CLR switch is tilted to L.CLR several times for latch clear operation, the
USER LED flickers to indicate that the latch clear processing is in process.
When the RESET/L.CLR switch is further tilted to L.CLR while the USER LED flickering, the
USER LED turns off and terminates the latch clear processing.

11.2.12 When the BAT.ARM LED has turned on

The BAT.ARM LED turns on when a low battery capacity (CPU module battery or SRAM card
battery) is detected.
Monitor the special relays and special registers (SM51, SM52, SD51 and SD52) in the monitor
mode of a programming device.
After checking, replace the battery with a new one, and reset the CPU module or run the LEDR
instruction, and the BAT.ARM LED will turn off.

11.2.13 When the BOOT LED is flickering

When the BOOT LED of the CPU module flickers at programmable controller power-on, at
operation start, or during operation, power off the programmable controller.
Remove the memory card.
Move the DIP switches SW2 and SW3 of the CPU module to ON (refer to section 4.4.2).
Power on the programmable controller.
If the BOOT LED turns on, the automatic write from memory card to standard ROM is completed.
Perform boot operation from standard ROM.
If the BOOT LED does not turn on, a hardware fault may have occurred in the CPU module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 13

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.14 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on

The output module LED has not

turned on

NO
(Flickering)
Is the MODE LED on? refer to section 11.2.3

YES

Is the LED on when the NO

output module is monitored on Reexamine the program
GX (IEC) Developer?

YES

Check the input/output number on the

GX (IEC) Developer system monitor

Does the output number NO

Change the output number
match?

YES

Does the LED turn on when NO

another output module is forci-
bly turned on?

YES

CPU module, base unit, extension

Does the LED turn on cable hardware fault.
when the output module is changed NO
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
for another output module, which service center or representative,
is then forcibly explaining a detailed description of
turned on? the problem.

YES

Output module hardware fault.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi
service center or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.

11 14
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.15 When output load of the output module does not turn on

The output load has not

turned on.

Is the operation NO Check output conditions with

indicator of output module the monitor mode of the GX
turned on? (IEC) Developer.

YES

NO Voltage measurement
Is the operation among the modules input
indicator of input module and COM terminals.
turned on?

YES 0V
Monitor signal off
Is voltage for Set the GX (IEC) Developer in
the power supply load the monitor mode and check
added? that the input signal is OFF.

YES
NO
What is the Check the power supply load Check the external wiring
voltage among the various wire and recover the power and external input devices.
output COM terminals of the supply.
output module?
0V
The rated
voltage is Check the load wire and load,
supplied. and recover the power supply. The rated voltage is
Output module failure. supplied.
Replace the output module.

Failures could be caused by Please consult your local Mit-

too high inrush currents. NG Change the output relay subishi service center or repre-
Confirm rush current that number and let the load sentative.
flows to the load when the maximum simultaneous on
maximum number of outputs current to within the
turns on simultaneously. specification.

OK

NOTE For the trouble in which input signal to the input module does not turn off: refer to section
11.4.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 15

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.16 When unable to read a program

A program cannot be read.

Is the memory NO
to be read correct? Select the correct memory

YES NO YES
Can a program be read?

Is the NO
connection cable connect- Connect the connection cable
ed properly? properly.

NO YES
Can a program be read?

Can a
program be read after YES
replacing the connec-
tion cable?

NO

Is the NO
Which connection USB USB driver installed Install the USB driver into the
type is used? in the personal personal computer.
computer?

RS232 YES YES

Can a program be read?

Please consult your local

Mitsubishi service center
or representative.

NO

Can a program YE
be read by lowering the
baud rate?

NO
Completed
Please consult your local
Mitsubishi service center or
representative.

11 16
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.17 When unable to write a program into the CPU module

A program cannot be written

into the CPU module.

RUN
RUN/STOP switch in RUN/STOP switch -> STOP
STOP position?

STOP
NO YES
Can a program be written?

NO Turn the DIP switch SW1 (system

Is the Dip switch SW1
set to OFF? protect) to OFF.

YES
NO YES
Can a program be written?

Has the password YES

Cancel the password
registered?

NO NO YES
Can a program be written?

 Confirm whether the write-

Memory card protect switch is off or not.
Transfer to which memory?
 Confirm if it is formatted.
 Confirm the writing destination
specification.
Program memory
 Organize file.
 Confirm memory space. Can a program be YES
 Confirm the writing destination written?
specification.

YES
Can a program be
written?

NO
Completed

Format program memory.

Can a program be written?

Completed Completed

Please consult your local Mitsubishi

service center or representative.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 17

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.18 When program is rewritten unintentionally

When a program is unintentionally rewritten at power-on or reset of the programmable controller,

check special relay SM660.
When SM660 is OFF ("Program memory execution"): A hardware fault may have occurred.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
When SM660 is ON ("During boot operation"): After formatting the program memory that is
performing boot operation from the standard ROM, write data to the standard ROM.
Invalidate the "Perform boot from standard ROM" check box in the boot file setting of the
PLC parameter dialog box. Write the parameters and sequence program to the program
memory.
Power on the programmable controller/perform reset operation.
If the program is rewritten a hardware fault may have occurred. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a detailed description of the problem.
If the program is not rewritten, troubleshooting is completed.

11 18
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.19 When unable to perform boot operation from the memory card

Boot operation cannot be performed.

YES
Has a CPU error occurred? Remove the cause of the error

NO
NO YES
Can boot operation be performed?

Is the parametervalid NO Set the DIP switch SW2 and 3 to the

drive specified by the DIP drive in which the parameter file is
switches? stored.

YES
NO YES
Can boot operation be performed?

Is a file set with NO

parameter boot file setup? Set a file to boot file setup.

YES NO YES
Can boot operation be performed?

Is a file set with NO Set a file to program setup.

parameter program setup?

YES NO YES
Can boot operation be performed?

Is boot operation file stored in NO Write a file to the memory card.

the memory card?

YES YES
NO
Can boot operation be performed?

Please consult your local Mitsubishi

service center or representative.
Completed

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 19

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.20 When "UNIT VERIFY ERR." has occurred

The UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occured.

If the module on the corresponding slot has been removed/

Check the slot where error occurred mounted during operation, reset the CPU module.
with the programming device. If the ERR. LED has not turned off, replace the
corresponding module.

Is the module of NO
the applicable slot Mount the module properly.
mounted properly?

YES YES NO
Is the ERR. LED of the CPU on?

Are all the extension

cables of the base unit Connect the extension cable properly.
connected properly?

YES NO
Is the ERR. LED of the CPU on?

Normal operation
Replace the
corresponding module.

Error detection

Normal operation
Replace the CPU module.

Error detection

Normal operation
Replace the applicable base unit.

Error detection

Hardware fault.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
service center or representative.
Completed

11 20
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.21 When "CONTROL BUS ERR." has occurred

The CONTROL BUS ERR. has occured.

Check the slot where error occurred

with the programming device.

Is the module of the

applicable slot mounted properly? NO
Is the extension cable of the applicable Mount the module and extension cable properly.
base unit connected
properly?

YES YES NO
Is the ERR. LED of the CPU on?

Are all the extension

cables of the base unit connected Connect the extension cables properly.
properly?

YES NO
Is the ERR. LED of the CPU on?
Error detection*

Normal operation
Replace the corresponding
module.

Error detection

Normal operation
Replace the CPU module.

Error detection

Normal operation
Replace the applicable base unit.

Error detection

Hardware fault.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
service center or representative.
Completed

* May be the failure could be caused by electromagnetic noise. Refer to the notes concerning the wiring in section
9.6.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 21

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.22 When the CPU module does not start

Refer to the following flowchart when the CPU module does not start upon power-on.

The CPU module does not start.

POWER LED off:

Is the POWER LED NO refer to section 11.2.4
of the power supply module
lit (green)? POWER LED on (red) (redun-
dant power supply modules
only):
YES refer to section 11.2.6

Are all power supply NO

modules turned on? Is the Check the wiring and turn ON all power
power supply module supply modules.
connected correctly?

YES NO Does the CPU YES

module start?
Connect programming device.
NO

Is communication YES Perform PLC diagnostics and trouble-

with programming device shoot according to the results of the di-
successful? agnosis.
NO

Is the direction of
the exension cable correct? NO
Correct the connection of the extension
(OUT > IN)

YES NO Does the CPU YES

module start?

RESET position
Position of the Cancel the RESET position.
RESET/L.CLR switch* of
the CPU

other than RESET position NO Does the CPU YES

module start?
Change the power supply module and
check if the LED lights up (green).

Does the CPU YES Hardware error of power supply module.

module start?

NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in
any of the following modules:
 Main base unit/extension base unit Completed
 Extension cable
 CPU module
 I/O Module or intelligent function
module
Perform operations in due order, star-
ting with the minimum system where the
power supply module and CPU module
are mounted on the main base unit.
For the module that does not operate,
please consult your local Mitsubishi ser-
vice center or representative, explaining
a detailed discription of the problem.

* For the Basic model QCPU, check the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of CPU module

11 22
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.2.23 When the CPU cannot communicate with GX Developer/GX IEC Developer

The CPU cannot communicate

with programming device.

NO Connect the connection cable

Is the connection cable
connected properly? properly.

YES NO YES
Communication
enabled?

Can the CPU YES

communicate after
replacing the connection
cable?

NO

Replace the Replace the replaced CPU mod-

YES ule with the original CPU module
CPU module;
Communication enabled? and check to see if the CPU mod-
ule starts up normally.

NO (To next page)

USB NO
Which connection Is the USB driver Install the USB driver into the per-
installed in the personal sonal computer.
type is used? computer?

RS232 YES
YES
Communication
enabled?

Please consult your local Mit-

subishi service center or rep-
resentative.

Can the CPU YES

communicate by lowering
the baud rate?

NO

Please consult your local Mit-

subishi service center or rep-
resentative. Completed

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 23

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

(From previous page)

POWER LED off: section 11.2.4

Is the POWER LED of NO POWER LED on (red):(redundant

the power supply module lit power supply modules only): section
(green)? 11.2.6

YES

Are all the power

supply modules powered on? NO Check the wiring and power on all the
Is the wiring of the power supply power supply modules.
module correct?

YES NO YES
Communication
enabled?

NO
Is the extension cable con-
nected properly? Connect the extension cable properly.
(OUT -> IN)

YES NO YES
Communication
enabled?

Position of the RESET position

RESET/L.CLR switch* Cancel the RESET.
of the CPU

Other than RESET position NO YES

Communication
enabled?

Replace the power supply module and

confirm that the POWER LED is turned
on green.

YES
Communication Hardware fault of power supply module.
enabled?

NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in any of the following
modules:
 Main base unit/extension base unit
Completed
 Extension cable
 CPU module
 I/O Module or intelligent function module
Perform operations in due order, starting with the minimum
system where the power supply module and CPU module are
mounted on the main base unit.
For the module that does not operate, please consult your local
Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a
detailed discription of the problem.

* For the Basic model QCPU, check the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of CPU module

11 24
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3 Error code list

The LED on the front side of the CPU indicates an error, recognised by the self diagnostics func-
tion of the CPU during transition to RUN mode or during PLC operation. At the same time an
error code is saved into special register SD0, which can be displayed together with the appro-
priate error message by the error diagnostics function of the programming software GX Devel-
oper or GX IEC Developer.
The special registers SD5 to SD15 contain general information and the special registers SD16
to SD26 the specific information about the error (refer to column "Error contents and cause" in
the error code lists of sections 11.3.1 to 11.3.7).
The sign "" in the last column of the error code list indicates, that the error code is valid for all
CPU types of MELSEC System Q. If a CPU type is mentioned there, this means, that the error
code is only valid for this special CPU type.
Qn(H) = High performance model QCPU Q02-, Q02H-, Q06H-, Q12H- and Q25HCPU
QnPH = Process CPU module Q02PH-, Q06PH-, Q12PH- and Q25PHCPU
QnPRH = Redundant CPU module Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU
QnU = Universal model QCPU
The relation between the error detection pattern, error detection location and error code is
shown in the following table.

Error detection pattern Error detection location Error code Reference

Detection by the self diag- 1000 to 1299  Sections 11.3.1 to 11.3.7
nostics function of CPU CPU module 
1300 to 10000
module
Detection at communica- The CPU module returns the
tion with CPU module CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH error code to the request
source.
Serial communication mod- 7000H to 7FFFH Manual of corresponding mod-
ule ule
CC-Link module B000H to BFFFH
ETHERNET module C000H to CFFFH
CC-Link IE controller net- E000H to EFFFH
work
MELSECNET/H network F000H to FFFFH
module

Tab. 11-2: Error codes

 Major error: errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation.
 Minor or moderate error: Errors that may allow the CPU module to continue the operation, e.g., battery error or
errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation, e.g., WDT error. For determination of the error level
(i.e. whether the operation can be continued or stopped) refer to column "CPU status" in the error code lists of
sections 11.3.1 to 11.3.7).

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 25

Troubleshooting Error code list

11.3.1 Error code list (1000 to 1999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MAIN CPU DOWN Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop 
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
main CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests a
Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason CPU module hardware fault.
Hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1000  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
MAIN CPU DOWN Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop 
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
main CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests a
Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason CPU module hardware fault.
Hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
Universal model QCPU only: Universal model QCPU only:
Accessed to outlying devices with the device Check the devices specified by BMOV, FMOV,
range checks disabled (SM237 = 1). This and DFMOV instructions and correct the
1001 device settings.
error occurs only when BMOV, FMOV, and
DFMOV instructions are executed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
1002 MAIN CPU DOWN Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop 
1003 Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
main CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests a
Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason CPU module hardware fault.
Hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
1004  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
1005 MAIN CPU DOWN Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop 
1006 Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the 
main CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests a
1007 CPU module hardware fault. Qn(H)
Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. QnPH
Hardware fault
QnPRH
 Collateral information
1008  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
MAIN CPU DOWN Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
A failure is detected on the power supply same error is detected again, it is considered (Function
module, CPU module, main base unit, extension that the power supply module, CPU module, version is B or
base unit or extension cable. main base unit, extension base unit or extension later)
When using the redundant base unit, the redun- cable is faulty. Replace the defective component. Qn(H) (first 5
dant power supply module failure in both Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. digits of serial
systems and/or the redundant base unit failure No. is 04101 or
1009 later)
are detected.
 Collateral information QnPH
 Common Information: QnPRH
 Individual Information: QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 26
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
END NOT EXECUTE Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop )
Entire program was executed without the execu- Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
tion of an END instruction. same error is displayed again, this suggests a
When the END instruction is executed it is CPU module hardware fault.
read as another instruction code, e.g. due to Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
noise.
1010 The END instruction has been changed to
another instruction code somehow.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
SFCP. END ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The SFC program cannot be normally terminated Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the (Function
due to noise or other reason. same error is displayed again, this suggests a version is B or
 Collateral information CPU module hardware fault. later)
1020 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. QnPH
 Common Information:
 Individual Information: QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
When SFC program is executed
MAIN CPU DOWN Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop QnU
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
main CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests a
Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason CPU module hardware fault.
Hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1035  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop )
The sequence program storing program memory Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
in the CPU module is faulty. same error is displayed again, this suggests a
 Collateral information CPU module hardware fault.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1101  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At Reset/ When an END instruction
executed
RAM ERROR OFF Flicker Stop
The work area RAM in the CPU module is
faulty.
The standard RAM and extended RAM in the
CPU module are faulty.
1102  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At Reset/ When an END instruction
executed

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 27

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop )
The device memory in the CPU module is faulty. When indexing is performed, check the value
 Collateral information of index register to see if it is within the device
 Common Information: range.
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
 Individual Information: same error is displayed again, this suggests a
 Diagnostic Timing CPU module hardware fault.
At power ON/ At reset Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
RAM ERROR Qn(H) (first 5
The device memory in the CPU module is digits of serial
1103 faulty. No. is 08032 or
The device out of range is accessed due to later)
indexing, and the device for system is over- QnPH (first 5
written. digits of serial
 Collateral information No. is 08032 or
 Common Information: later)
 Individual Information: QnPRH (first 5
digits of serial
 Diagnostic Timing No. is 09012 or
At power ON/ At reset/When an END instruction later)
executed
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop )
The address RAM in the CPU module is faulty. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
 Collateral information same error is displayed again, this suggests a
 Common Information: CPU module hardware fault.
1104 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J
The CPU memory in the CPU module is faulty. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Q00
 Collateral information same error is displayed again, this suggests a Q01
 Common Information: CPU module hardware fault. Contact your
local Mitsubishi representative. QnU
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
AT POWER ON/ AT RESET
1105 RAM ERROR Qn(H) (first 5
The CPU shared memory in the CPU module is digits of serial
faulty. No. is 04101 or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: QnPH
 Individual Information: QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
At power ON/ At reset
RAM ERROR Check the battery to see if it is dead or not. If OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The battery is dead. dead, replace the battery. QnPH (first 5
The program memory in the CPU module is Take noise reduction measures. digits of serial
faulty. Format the program memory, write all files to No. is 07032 or
 Collateral information the PLC, then reset the CPU module and RUN later)
1106 it again. If the same error is displayed again, QnPRH
 Common Information: this suggests a CPU module hardware fault.
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP > RUN/When an END instruction exe-
cuted

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 28
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
1107 RAM ERROR This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
1108
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RAM ERROR Qn(H) (first 5
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty. digits of serial
 Collateral information No. is 08032 or
later)
 Common Information:
QnPH (first 5
 Individual Information: digits of serial
1109  Diagnostic Timing No. is 08032 or
Always later)
QnPRH (first 5
digits of serial
No. is 09012 or
later)
TRK. CIR. ERROR This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A fault was detected by the initial check of the Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
tracking hardware.
 Collateral information
1110  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. CIR. ERROR
A tracking hardware fault was detected.
 Collateral information
1111  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
1112 TRK. CIR. ERROR Start after checking that the tracking cable is OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A tracking hardware fault was detected during connected. If the same error is displayed
running. again, the cause is the hardware fault of the
The tracking cable was disconnected and tracking cable or CPU module.
reinserted without the standby system being Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
powered off or reset. Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
The tracking cable is not secured by the con- dure, and execute a startup again. For details,
nector fixing screws. refer to the manual of the redundant system.

1113 The error occurred at a startup since the

redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
During running
TRK. CIR. ERROR This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A fault was detected by the initial check of the Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
tracking hardware.
 Collateral information
1115  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 29

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
TRK. CIR. ERROR Start after checking that the tracking cable is OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A tracking hardware fault was detected during connected. If the same error is displayed
running. again, the cause is the hardware fault of the
The tracking cable was disconnected and tracking cable or CPU module.
reinserted without the standby system being Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
powered off or reset. Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
The tracking cable is not secured by the con- dure, and execute a startup again. For details,
nector fixing screws. refer to the manual of the redundant system.
1116 The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
During running
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The memory of the CPU module in the Multiple Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
CPU high speed transmission area is faulty. same error is displayed again, this suggests a Q01U- and
 Collateral information CPU module hardware fault. Q02UCPU)
1150 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop )
The program memory in the CPU module is Format the program memory, write all files to
overwritten. the PLC, then reset the CPU module, and RUN
 Collateral information it again.
1160 If the same error is displayed again, this sug-
 Common Information: gests a CPU module hardware fault.
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing
At program execution
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures.
The data of the device memory built in the CPU If the same error is displayed again, this sug-
module is overwritten. gests a CPU module hardware fault.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
1161  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At program execution
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures.
The error of the data held by the battery in the Change the CPU main body or SRAM card
CPU module is detected. (It occurs when the battery.
automatic format is not set.) If the same error is displayed again, this sug-
 Collateral information gests a CPU module hardware fault.
1162 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RAM ERROR Take noise reduction measures. OFF Flicker Stop Q10UD(E)H-,
The destruction of the data stored in the stan- If the same error is displayed again, this sug- Q13UD(E)H-,
dard RAM is detected. gests a CPU module hardware fault. Q20UD(E)H-,
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. Q26UD(E)HCPU
1164  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 30
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR. This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop )
The operation circuit for index modification in Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
the CPU module does not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1200  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does
not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1201  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1202  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR. This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The operation circuit for index modification in Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
the CPU module does not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1203  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does
not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1204  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally.
 Collateral information
1205  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
FUSE BREAK OFF Check FUSE LED of the output modules and OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
There is an output module with a blown fuse. replace the module whose LED is lit. ON Continue QnPH
 Collateral information (The module with a blown fuse can also be (CPU oper-
ation can QnPRH
 Common Information: identified using GX (IEC) Developer. Check the
special registers SD1300 to SD1331 to see if be set in QnU
Module No.(Slot No.); For Remote I/O net-
work: Network No./Station No. the bit corresponding to the module is "1".) the param-
When a GOT is bus-connected to the main eters at
 Individual Information: base unit or extension base unit, check the error
1300  Diagnostic Timing connection status of the extension cable and occur-
Always the earth status of the GOT. rence)
Check ERR. LED of the output modules and Q00J/Q00/Q01
replace the module whose LED is lit.
(The module with a blown fuse can also be iden-
tified using GX (IEC) Developer. Check the spe-
cial registers SD130 to SD137 to see if the bit
corresponding to the module is "1".)

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 31

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
I/O INT ERROR Any of the mounted modules is experiencing a OFF Flicker Stop )
An interruption has occurred although there is hardware fault. Therefore, check the mounted
no interrupt module. modules and change the faulty module.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1310  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
During interrupt
I/O INT ERROR Take action so that an interrupt will not be issued OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
An interrupt request from other than the inter- from other than the interrupt module. (Function
rupt module was detected. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: QnU
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
During interrupt
I/O INT ERROR Correct the interrupt pointer setting in the Q00J/Q00/Q01
1311 An interrupt request from the module where PLC system setting of the PLC parameter dia- (Version A)
interrupt pointer setting has not been made in log box. QnPRH
the PLC parameter dialog box was detected. Take measures so that an interrupt is not QnU
 Collateral information issued from the module where the interrupt
pointer setting in the PLC system setting of
 Common Information: the PLC parameter dialog box has not been
 Individual Information: made.
 Diagnostic Timing Correct the interrupt setting of the network
During interrupt parameter.
Correct the interrupt setting of the intelligent
function module buffer memory.
Correct the basic program of the QD51.
1320 LAN CTRL.DOWN This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. OFF Flicker Stop QnU (with Built-
The H/W self-diagnostics detected a LAN con- Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. in Ethernet
troller failure. port)
 Collateral information
1321  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT DOWN When the unsupported module is mounted, OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
There was no response from the intelligent remove it. ON Continue
function module/special function module in When the corresponding module is sup- (can be
the initial processing. ported, this suggests a hardware fault of the selected for
The size of the buffer memory of the intelli- intelligent function module/special function each intelli-
gent function module/special function module module, CPU module and/or base unit. gent func-
is invalid. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. tion module
1401 An unsupported module is mounted. by the
parame-
 Collateral information ters)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/When intelligent function
module is accessed
SP. UNIT DOWN This suggests a hardware fault of the intelligent
The intelligent function module/special function function module/special function module, CPU
module was accessed in the program, but there module and/or base unit.
was no response. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
1402  Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When an intelligent function module access
instruction is executed

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 32
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT DOWN When the unsupported module is mounted, OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
An unsupported module is mounted. remove it. ON Continue
 Collateral information When the corresponding module is sup- (can be
ported, this suggests a hardware fault of the selected for
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) each intelli-
intelligent function module/special function
 Individual Information: module, CPU module and/or base unit. gent func-
 Diagnostic Timing Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. tion module
When an END instruction is executed Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. by the
parame-
SP. UNIT DOWN The CPU module, base module and/or the intelli- ters)
There was no response from the intelligent gent function module/special function module
function module/special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware
1403 when the END instruction is executed. fault.
An error is detected at the intelligent function Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
module/special function module.
The I/O module (intelligent function module/
special function module) is nearly removed,
completely removed, or mounted during run-
ning.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop )
When performing a parameter I/O allocation the same error is displayed again, the intelligent
intelligent function module/special function function module/special function module, CPU
module could not be accessed during initial module or base unit is faulty.
communications. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
(On error occurring, the head I/O number of the
corresponding intelligent function module/spe-
1411 cial function module is stored in the common
information.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop )
The FROM/TO instruction is not executable, due same error is displayed again, the intelligent
to a control bus error with the intelligent function function module/special function module, CPU
module/special function module. module or base unit is faulty.
(On error occurring, the program error location Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
is stored in the individual information.)
1412  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
During execution of FROM/TO instruction set
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Remove the CPU module incompatible with OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom- the multiple CPU system from the main base (Function
patible with the multiple CPU system is moun- unit, or replace the CPU module with a CPU version is B or
ted. module compatible with the multiple CPU later)
system.
 Collateral information Qn(H)
The intelligent function module, CPU module (Function
 Common Information: or base unit is faulty. version is B or
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. later)
 Diagnostic Timing QnPH
1413 Always
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the )
An error is detected on the system bus. same error is displayed again, the intelligent
 Collateral information function module, CPU module or base unit is
 Common Information: faulty.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 33

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Remove the CPU module incompatible with OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Fault of a loaded module was detected. the multiple CPU system from the main base (Function
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module unit, or replace the CPU module with a CPU version is B or
incompatible with the multiple CPU system is module compatible with the multiple CPU later)
mounted. system. Qn(H)
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the (Function
 Collateral information same error is displayed again, the intelligent version is B or
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) function module, CPU module or base unit is later)
 Individual Information: faulty.
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1414 QnU
Always
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Q00J/Q00/Q01
An error is detected on the system bus. same error is displayed again, the intelligent (Function
 Collateral information function module, CPU module or base unit is version is B or
faulty. later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. Qn(H)
 Individual Information:
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnPRH
Always
QnU
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Fault of the main or extension base unit was same error is displayed again, the intelligent Qn(H)
detected. function module, CPU module or base unit is (Function
 Collateral information faulty. version is B or
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. later)
 Individual Information: QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing QnPRH
When an END instruction executed QnU
1415 CONTROL-BUS ERR. Qn(H) (first 5
Fault of the main or extension base unit was digits of serial
detected. No. is 08032 or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH (first 5
digits of serial
 Individual Information: No. is 08032 or
 Diagnostic Timing later)
At power ON/ At reset/When an END instruction
executed
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
System bus fault was detected at power-on or same error is displayed again, the intelligent (Function
reset. function module, CPU module or base unit is version is B or
 Collateral information faulty. later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. QnPH
 Individual Information: QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
1416
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, a bus fault was detec- (Function
ted at power-on or reset. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnU
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A reset signal error was detected on the system same error is displayed again, the intelligent
bus. function module, CPU module or base unit is
 Collateral information faulty.
1417  Common Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 34
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CONTROL-BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
In the redundant system, at power-on/reset or same error is displayed again, the CPU module, digits of serial
switching system, the control system cannot the Q6WRB, or hardware of extension cable is No. is 09012 or
access the extension base unit since it failed to faulty. later)
acquire the access right. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1418  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At Switching execution
MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The error of host CPU is detected in the Multiple same error is displayed again, the CPU module Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
CPU high speed bus. has hardware failure. Q01U- and
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. Q02UCPU)
1430  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus. same error is displayed again, the CPU mod-
 Collateral information ule has hardware failure.
1431  Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
The communication time out with other CPU is same error is displayed again, the CPU module
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus. has hardware failure.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
1432  Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
1433 MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Take noise reduction measures.
1434 The communication error with other CPU is Check the main base unit mounting status of
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus. the CPU module.
 Collateral information Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) same error is displayed again, the CPU mod-
1435 ule has hardware failure.
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
The error of the Multiple CPU high speed main same error is displayed again, the CPU module
1436
base unit is detected. (The error of the Multiple has hardware failure.
CPU high speed bus is detected.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information Take noise reduction measures.
 Common Information: Check the main base unit mounting status of
 Individual Information: the CPU module.
1437  Diagnostic Timing Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
At power ON/ At reset same error is displayed again, the CPU mod-
ule has hardware failure.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
MULTI-C.BUS ERR. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
An error of the multiple CPU high speed main same error is displayed again, the CPU module Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
base unit was detected. (An error of the multiple has hardware failure. Q01U- and
CPU high speed bus was detected.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. Q02UCPU)
1439  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 35

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
AC DOWN Check the power supply. ON OFF Continue )
A momentary power supply interruption has
occurred.
 Collateral information
1500  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
SINGLE PS. DOWN Check the power supplied to the redundant ON ON Continue Qn(H) (first 5
Die Versorgungsspannung eines redundanten power supply modules mounted on the redun- digits of serial
Netzteils auf einem redundanten Baugruppentr- dant base unit. No. is 04101 or
ger ist eingebrochen. later)
 Collateral information QnPH (first 5
1510 digits of serial
 Common Information: Base No. / Nr. des
Netzteils No. is 04101 or
later)
 Individual Information:
QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnU (except
Always Q00UJ-, Q00U-
SINGLE PS. ERROR Hardware fault of the redundant power supply and Q01UCPU)
Ein redundantes Netzteils auf einem redundanten module.
Baugruppentrger ist defekt. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
1520  Common Information: Base No. / Nr. des
Netzteils
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
BATTERY ERROR Change the battery. ON OFF Continue )
The battery voltage in the CPU module has If the battery is for program memory, stand-
dropped below stipulated level. ard RAM or for the back-up power function,
The lead connector of the CPU module battery install a lead connector.
is not connected. Check the lead connector of the CPU module
1600  Collateral information for looseness. Firmly engage the connector if
it is loose.
 Common Information: Drive Name
 Individual Information: NOTE:
 Diagnostic Timing When this error occurs, the BAT. LED of the CPU
Always module is lit too.
BATTERY ERROR Change the battery.
Voltage of the battery on memory card has drop-
ped below stipulated level. NOTE:
 Collateral information When this error occurs, the BAT. LED of the CPU
1601  Common Information: Drive Name module is lit too.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
FLASH ROM ERROR] Change the CPU module. ON ON Continue QnU
The number of writing to flash ROM (standard
ROM and system securement area) exceeds
100,000 times.
(Number of writings = 100,000 times max.)
1610  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When writing to ROM

Tab. 11-3: Error code list (1000 to 1999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 36
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3.2 Error code list (2000 to 2999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
UNIT VERFIY ERR. Replace the CPU module incompatible with the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom- multiple CPU system with a CPU module com- ON Continue (Function
patible with the multiple CPU system is moun- patible with the multiple CPU system. (can be set version is B or
ted. in the later)
 Collateral information parameters QnPH
at error
 Common Information: occur-
Module No. (Slot No.); For Remote I/O net- rence)
work: Network No./Station No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
UNIT VERFIY ERR. Read the error common information at the GX Q00J/Q00/Q01
The I/O module status is different from the I/O (IEC) Developer, and check and/or change the
module information at power ON. module that corresponds to the numerical
I/O module (or intelligent function module) is not value (module number) there.
installed properly or installed on the base unit. Alternatively, monitor special registers SD150
to SD157 using GX (IEC) Developer, and
 Collateral information check and replace the module where the bit of
2000  Common Information: its data is "1".
Module No. (Slot No.); For Remote I/O net-
work: Network No./Station No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
UNIT VERFIY ERR. Read the error common information at the GX Qn(H)
The I/O module status is different from the I/O (IEC) Developer, and check and/or change the QnPH
module information at power ON. module that corresponds to the numerical
value (module number) there. QnPRH
I/O module (or intelligent function module/spe- QnU
cial function module) not installed properly or Alternatively, monitor special registers
installed on the base unit. SD1400 to SD1431 using GX (IEC) Developer
and change the output module whose bit has
 Collateral information a value of "1".
 Common Information: When a GOT is bus-connected to the main
Module No. (Slot No.); For Remote I/O net- base unit or extension base unit, check the
work: Network No./Station No. connection status of the extension cable and
 Individual Information: the grounding status of the GOT.
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
UNIT VERFIY ERR. During operation, do not mount a module on the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
During operation, a module was mounted on the slot where the empty setting of the CPU module ON Continue (Function
slot where the empty setting of the CPU module was made. (can be set version is B or
was made. in the later)
 Collateral information parameters QnU
2001 at error
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) occur-
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
BASE LAY ERROR Use the allowable number of extension base OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
More than applicable number of extension units or less. (Function
base units have been used. Power on the Progammable Controller and version is B or
When a GOT was bus-connected, the CPU GOT again. later)
module was reset while the power of the GOT QnPRH
was OFF. Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
2010
 Collateral information Q01U- and
 Common Information: Base No. Q02UCPU)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
BASE LAY ERROR Do not use the QA1S6B, QA6B and OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The QA1S6B, QA6B or QA6ADP+A5B/ QA6ADP+A5B/A6B as the base unit. (Function
A6B was used as the base unit. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
2011 QnPH
 Common Information: Base No.
QnPRH
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 37

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
BASE LAY ERROR Remove a bus connection cable for GOT con- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The GOT is bus-connected to the main base nection connected to the main base unit. (first 5 digits of
unit of the redundant system. Use the Q6WRB (fixed to the extension serial No. is
The following errors are detected in the CPU stage No.1) 09012 or later)
redundant system compatible with the extension Use the CPU module compatible with the
base unit. extension base unit for the other system.
The base unit other than the Q6WRB is con- Do not use the Q5B, QA1S6B, QA6B or
nected to the extension stage No.1. QA6ADP+A5 B/A6B for the base unit.
The base unit is connected to any one of the Use the main base unit which has the same
extension stages No.2 to No.7, although the number of slots.
Q6WRB does not exist in the extension Hardware failure of the Q6WRB.
stage No.1 . Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
2012 The other system CPU module is incompati-
ble with the extension base unit.
The QA1S6B, QA6B or QA6ADP+A5B/
A6B is connected.
The number of slots of the main base unit for
both systems is different.
Information of the Q6WRB cannot be read
correctly.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Base No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
BASE LAY ERROR Hardware failure of the Q6WRB.
Stage number of the Q6WRB is recognized as Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
other than extension stage No.1 in the redundant
system.
2013  Collateral information
 Common Information: Base No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
EXT.CABLE ERR.] Check to see if the extension cable between the
The following errors are detected in the redun- main base unit and the Q6WRB is connected
dant system. correctly.
At power-on/reset, the standby system has If not, connect it after turning OFF the main base
detected the error in the path between the unit where the extension cable will be connected.
control system and the Q6WRB. If the cable is connected correctly, hardware of
The standby system has detected the error in the CPU module, Q6WRB, or extension cable
2020 the path between the host system CPU and is faulty.
the Q6WRB at END processing. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/When an END instruction
executed

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 38
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Make setting again to match the PLC parameter OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The slot to which the QI60 is mounted is set to I/O assignment with the actual loading status. (Function
other than Inteli (intelligent function module) or version is B or
Interrupt (interrupt module) in the I/O assign- later)
ment of PLC parameter. QnPH
 Collateral information QnPRH
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Make the PLC parameters I/O assignment Qn(H)
Wrong I/O assignment setting of PLC parameter: setting again so it is consistent with the actual QnPH
In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parame- status of the intelligent function module and
the CPU module. QnPRH
ter, Inteli (intelligent function module) was
allocated to an I/O module or vice versa. Delete the switch setting in the I/O assign- QnU
In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parame- ment setting of the PLC parameter.
ter, a module other than CPU (or nothing) was
allocated to the location of a CPU module or
vice versa.
In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC
parameter, switch setting was made to the
module that has no switch setting.
In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC
parameter dialog box, the number of points
assigned to the intelligent function module is
2100 less than the number of points of the
mounted module.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reset the parameter I/O allocation setting to con- Q00J/Q00/Q01
Wrong I/O assignment setting of PLC parameter: form to the actual status of the intelligent func-
In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parame- tion module and the CPU module.
ter, Inteli (intelligent function module) was
allocated to an I/O module or vice versa.
In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parame-
ter, a module other than CPU (or nothing) was
allocated to the location of a CPU module or
vice versa.
In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC
parameter dialog box, the number of points
assigned to the intelligent function module is
less than the number of points of the
mounted module.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the A series special function modules OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
13 or more A-series special function modules (except the A1SI61) that can make an interrupt
(except for the A1SI61) that can initiate an inter- start to the CPU module to 12 or less.
rupt to the CPU module have been installed.
2101  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Keep the number of A1SD51S to six or fewer. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Seven or more A1SD51S have been installed.
 Collateral information
2102  Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 39

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the number of QI60/A1SD51S mod- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Two or more QI60/A1SD51S modules are ules mounted in the single CPU system to (Function
mounted in a single CPU system. one. version is B or
Two or more QI60/A1SD51S modules are set Change the number of QI60/A1SD51S mod- later)
to the same control CPU in a multiple CPU ules set to the same control CPU to only one QnPH
system. in the multiple CPU system.
Two or more A1SD51S modules are loaded in Reduce the number of A1SD51S modules to
a multiple CPU system. only one in the multiple CPU system. When
using an interrupt module with each QCPU in
 Collateral information a multiple CPU system, replace it with the
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) QI60. (Use one A1SI61 module + max. three
 Individual Information: QI60 modules or only the QI60 modules.)
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Install only one QI60, A1SD51S module. Qn(H)
Two or more QI60, A1SD51S interrupt modules QnPRH
have been mounted.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
2103  Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Install only one QI60 module. Q00J/Q00/Q01
Two or more QI60 modules are mounted. (first 5 digits of
 Collateral information serial No. is
04101 or later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Install only one QI60 module. Q00J/Q00/Q01
Two or more QI60 modules where interrupt Make interrupt pointer setting to the second (Function
pointer setting has not been made are mounted. QI60 module and later. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnU
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 40
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H mod- OFF Flicker Stop Q00UJ
Two or more MELSECNET/H modules are ules to one.
mounted. Reduce the number of CC-Link IE controller
Two or more CC-Link IE controller network network modules to one.
modules are mounted. Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to
Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted. one.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H and OFF Flicker Stop Q00U/Q01U
Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE CCLink IE controller network modules to four
controller network modules in total are or less in total in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system. Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H mod-
Two or more MELSECNET/H modules are ules to one in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system. Reduce the number of CC-Link IE controller
Two or more CC-Link IE controller network network modules to one in the entire system.
modules are mounted in the entire system. Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to
Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted one in the entire system.
in the entire system.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE OFF Flicker Stop Q02U
Three or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE controller network modules up to two or less
controller network modules in total are in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system. Reduce the Ethernet interface modules up to
Three or more Ethernet interface modules are two or less in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
2106  Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE controller network modules up to four or less Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
controller network modules in total are in the entire system. Q01U and,
mounted in the entire system. Reduce the Ethernet interface modules up to Q02UCPU)
Five or more Ethernet interface modules are four or less in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the CC-Link IE controller network OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
Three or more CC-Link IE controller network modules up to two or less in the entire sys- digits of serial
modules are mounted in the entire system. tem. No. is 10042 or
Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE Reduce the total number of the MELSECNET/ later)
controller network modules in total are H and CC-Link IE controller network modules QnPH (first 5
mounted in the entire system. up to four or less in the entire system. digits of serial
 Collateral information No. is 10042 or
 Common Information: Module No. later)
 Individual Information: QnPRH (first 5
digits of serial
 Diagnostic Timing No. is 10042 or
At power ON/ At reset later)
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H mod- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Five or more MELSECNET/H modules have ules to four or less. QnPH
been installed. Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to QnPRH
Five or more Ethernet interface modules have four or less.
been installed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 41

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Reduce the MELSECNET/H modules to one. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Two or more MELSECNET/H modules were Reduce the Ethernet modules to one.
installed. Reduce the CC-Link modules to two or less.
Two or more Ethernet modules were installed.
Three or more CC-Link modules were
installed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
2106 At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Check the network number and station OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The same network number or same station number. Qn(H)
number is duplicated in the MELSECNET/H QnPH
network system. QnPRH
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
(Steckplatz)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Make the PLC parameters I/O assignment set- OFF Flicker Stop )
The start X/Y set in the PLC parameters I/O ting again so it is consistent with the actual sta-
assignment settings is overlapped with the one tus of the intelligent function module/special
for another module. function modules.
2107  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Replace the network module for the A2USCPU or OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
 Network module A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11, the network module for the Q2ASCPU with the
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, or A1SJ71AT21B MELSECNET/H module.
dedicated for the A2USCPU has been
installed.
 Network module A1SJ71QLP21 or
2108 A1SJ71QBR11 dedicated for the Q2ASCPU
has been installed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
The location designated by the FROM/TO using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the ON Continue Qn(H)
instruction set is not the intelligent function FROM/TO instruction that corresponds to that (can be set (Function
module/special function module. numerical value (program error location), and in the version is B or
The module that does not include buffer correct when necessary. parameters later)
memory has been specified by the FROM/TO The intelligent function module/special func- at error QnPH
instruction. tion module that was accessed is experienc- occur-
ing a hardware fault. Therefore, change the rence) QnPRH
The intelligent function module/special func-
tion module, Network module being accessed faulty module. Alternatively, contact your local QnU
is faulty. Mitsubishi representative.
2110
Station not loaded was specified using the
instruction whose target was the CPU share
memory.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 42
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
The location designated by a link direct device using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the ON Continue
(J\) is not a network module. FROM/TO instruction that corresponds to that (can be set
numerical value (program error location), and in the
The I/O module (intelligent function module/ correct when necessary.
special function module) was nearly removed, parameters
completely removed, or mounted during run- The intelligent function module/special func- at error
ning. tion module that was accessed is experienc- occur-
2111 ing a hardware fault. Therefore, change the rence)
 Collateral information faulty module. Alternatively, contact your local
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed.
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
The module other than intelligent function using the GX (IEC) developer, and check the spe- ON Continue
module/special function module is specified cial function module /special function module (can be set
by the intelligent function module/special dedicated instruction (network instruction) that in the
function module dedicated instruction. Or, it is corresponds to the value (program error part) to parameters
not the corresponding intelligent function make modification. at error
module/special function module. occur-
There is no network No. specified by the net- rence)
2112 work dedicated instruction. Or the relay target
network does not exist.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed/STOP RUN
SP UNIT ERROR Qn(H)
The module other than network module is speci- QnPH
fied by the network dedicated instruction.
 Collateral information
2113  Common Information: FFFFH (fixed)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed/STOP RUN
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
An instruction, which on execution specifies using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the program ON Continue (Function
other stations, has been used for specifying the corresponding that value (program error loca- version is B or
host CPU. (An instruction that does not allow the tion), and make correction. later)
host CPU to be specified). Qn(H)
2114  Collateral information (Function
version is B or
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
later)
 Individual Information: Program error loca- QnPH
tion
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
When instruction executed/STOP RUN
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
An instruction, which on execution specifies the using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the program ON Continue (Function
host CPU, has been used for specifying other corresponding that value (program error loca- version is B or
CPUs. (An instruction that does not allow other tion), and make correction. later)
stations to be specified). Qn(H)
2115  Collateral information (Function
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) version is B or
later)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 43

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
An instruction that does not allow the intelli- using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the program ON Continue (Function
gent function module under the control of corresponding that value (program error loca- version is B or
another CPU to be specified is being used for tion), and make correction. later)
a similar task. Qn(H)
Instruction was executed for the A or QnA (Function
module under control of another CPU. version is B or
2116
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
 Individual Information: Program error loca- QnU
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed/STOP RUN
SP UNIT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/
A CPU module that cannot be specified in the using the GX (IEC) Developer, check the program ON Continue
instruction dedicated to the multiple CPU system corresponding that value (program error loca-
was specified. tion), and make correction.
 Collateral information
2117
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed/STOP RUN
SP UNIT ERROR When performing the online module change OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
When the online module change setting is set to in a multiple CPU system, correct the pro- ON Continue (Function
be "enabled" in the PLC parameter in a multiple gram so that access will not be made to the version is B or
CPU system, intelligent function module con- intelligent function module controlled by the later)
other CPU. QnPH
trolled by other CPU using the FROM/TO instruc-
tions is specified. When accessing the intelligent function mod-
ule controlled by the other CPU in a multiple QnU (except
2118  Collateral information Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
CPU system, set the online module change
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.) setting to be "disabled" by parameter. Q01U and
Q02UCPU)
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Check the location of the base unit. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The locations of an extrension base unit is (Version A)
improper. Qn(H)
 Collateral information QnPH
2120  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Check the loading position of the CPU module OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The CPU module is installed to other than the and reinstall it at the correct slot. QnPH
CPU slot and slots 0 to 2.
 Collateral information
2121  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The QA1S6B/QA6B or QA6ADP+A5B/ QnPH
A6B are used for the main base unit. QnPRH
 Collateral information Replace the main base unit with a usable one (for
2122
 Common Information: MELSEC System Q).
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 44
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Remove the module mounted on the 65th slot OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
A module is mounted on the 65th slot or later or later slot. QnPH
slot. Remove the module mounted on the slot QnPRH
A module is mounted on the slot whose whose number is greater than the number of
slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] QnU (except
number is greater than the number of slots
specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of of the base setting. Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
the base setting. Remove the module mounted on the slot Q01U and
whose number of I/O points exceeds 4096 Q02UCPU)
A module is mounted on the slot whose
number of I/O points exceeds 4096 points. points.
A module is mounted on the slot whose Replace the module with the one whose
number of I/O points strides 4096 points. number of occupied points does not exceed
4096 points.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Remove the module mounted on after the OFF Flicker Stop Q00UJ
A module is mounted on after the 25th slot 25th (or after the 17th slot for the Q00U/Q01U
(or after the 17th slot for the Q00UJCPU). Q00UJCPU).
A module is mounted on the slot whose Remove the module mounted on the slot
number is later than the one set in the "Base whose number is later than the one set in the
setting" on the I/O assignment tab of PLC "Base setting" on the I/O assignment tab of
parameter in GX (IEC) Developer. PLC parameter in GX (IEC) Developer.
A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O Remove the module mounted on the slot for
points greater than 1024 (greater than 256 for which I/O points greater than 1024 (greater
the Q00UJCPU) is assigned. than 256 for the Q00UJCPU) is assigned.
A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O Replace the end module with the one whose
points is assigned from less than 1024 to number of occupied points is within 1024
greater than 1024 (from less than 256 to (within 256 for the Q00UJCPU).
greater than 256 for the Q00UJCPU).
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
2124
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Remove the module mounted on the 37th slot OFF Flicker Stop Q02U
A module is mounted on the 37th slot or later or later slot.
slot. Remove the module mounted on the slot
A module is mounted on the slot whose whose number is greater than the number of
number is greater than the number of slots slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting]
specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of of the base setting.
the base setting. Remove the module mounted on the slot
A module is mounted on the slot whose whose number of I/O points exceeds 2048
number of I/O points exceeds 2048 points. points.
A module is mounted on the slot whose Replace the module with the one whose
number of I/O points strides 2048 points number of occupied points does not exceed
2048 points.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Remove the module mounted on the 25th slot OFF Flicker Stop Q00J
A module is mounted on the 25th slot or later or later slot. (The 17th slot or later slot for the Q00/Q01
slot. (The 17th slot or later slot for the Q00JCPU.)
Q00JCPU.) Remove the module mounted on the slot
A module is mounted on the slot whose whose number is greater than the number of
number is greater than the number of slots slots specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting]
specified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of of the base setting.
the base setting. Remove the module mounted on the slot
A module is mounted on the slot whose whose number of I/O points exceeds 1024
number of I/O points exceeds 1024 points. points. (256 points for the Q00J.)
(256 points for the Q00JCPU.) Replace the module with the one whose
A module is mounted on the slot whose number of occupied points does not exceed
number of I/O points strides 1024 points. 1024 points. (256 points for the Q00J.) ber-
(256 points for the Q00JCPU.) schreitet, gegen eines mit weniger E/As
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 45

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Dont use more than 4 extension base units (2 OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
5 or more extension base units were added. (3 or extension base units for Q00JCPU). (Version A)
more base units for Q00JCPU)
 Collateral information
2124  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Install a usable module OFF Flicker Stop )
A module which the QCPU cannot recognise (for MELSEC System Q).
has been installed. The intelligent function module/special func-
There was no response form the intelligent tion module is experiencing a hardware fault.
function module/special function module.
2125  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Mount modules on the available slots so that OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
CPU module locations in a multiple CPU system the empty slots will be located on the right- (Function
are either of the following. hand side of the CPU module. version is B or
There are empty slots between the QCPU and Remove the module mounted on the left-hand later)
QCPU/motion controller. side of the High performance model QCPU/ QnPH
A module other than the High performance Process CPU, and mount the High perform-
model QCPU/Process CPU (including the ance model QCPU/Process CPU on the empty
motion controller) is mounted on the left- slot. Mount the motion CPU on the right-hand
2126 side of the High performance model QCPU/
hand side of the High performance model
QCPU/Process CPU. Process CPU.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Remove the unusable module from the extension OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
An unusable module is mounted on the exten- base unit. digits of serial
sion base unit in the redundant system. No. is 09012 or
 Collateral information later)
2128  Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
SP.UNIT VER. ERR. Change the intelligent function module for the OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the control CPU of the one compatible with the multiple CPU system. QnPH
intelligent function module incompatible with the Change the setting of the control CPU of the QnU (except
multiple CPU system is set to other than CPU intelligent function module incompatible with Q00UJCPU)
No.1. the multiple CPU system to CPU No.1.
2150  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to proguram-
mable controller
SP. UNIT LAY ERR. Use a module compatible with the redundant OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
Either of the following modules incompatible system.
with the redundant system has been mounted in
a redundant system.
 CC-Link IE controller network modules
 MELSECNET/H modules
2151  Ethernet modules
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (Slot No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to proguram-
mable controller

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 46
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MISSING PARA. Check and correct the valid parameter drive OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
There is no parameter file in the drive specified settings made by the DIP switches. QnPH
as valid parameter drive by the DIP switches. Set the parameter file to the drive specified as QnPRH
 Collateral information valid parameter drive by the DIP switches.
 Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
MISSING PARA. Set the parameter file to the program mem- Q00J/Q00/Q01
There is no parameter file at the program ory.
memory.
 Collateral information
2200  Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
MISSING PARA. Set a parameter file in a drive to be valid. QnU
Parameter file does not exist in all drives where
parameters will be valid.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
BOOT ERROR Check the boot setting. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The contents of the boot file are incorrect. (Function
 Collateral information version is B or
later)
2210  Common Information: Drive name
Qn(H)
 Individual Information:
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnPRH
At power ON/ At reset
QnU
BOOT ERROR Reboot. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
File formatting is failed at a boot. CPU module hardware fault. QnPRH
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. QnU
2211  Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RESTORE ERROR Set the number of device points at the time of OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The device information (number of points) back- backup to the device point setting in [PLC
uped by the device data backup function is diffe- parameter]. Then, turn ON from OFF power
rent from the number of device points of the PLC supply, or reset the CPU and cancel reset.
parameter. Delete the backuped data, and turn ON from
After this error occurred, perform restore per OFF power supply, or reset the CPU and can-
cel reset.
power-on/reset until the number of device points
2220 is identical to the number of device points in the
PLC parameter, or until the backup data is dele-
ted.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 47

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
RESTORE ERROR Reset the CPU module and run it again. OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The device information backuped by the device
data backup function is incomplete. (Turning
power supply OFF or reset is suspected.)
Do not return the data when this error occurs.
Also, delete the incomplete device information at
2221 the time of this error occurrence.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RESTORE ERROR Execute a restore for the CPU module whose
The model name of the restoration destination name is same as the backup source CPU mod-
CPU module is different from the one of the ule.
backup source CPU module.
2225  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RESTORE ERROR Execute a restore of other backup data
The backup data file is destroyed. (The con- because the backup data may be destructed.
tent of the file is different from the check Set the write protect switch of the SRAM card
code. to off (write enabled).
Reading the backup data from the memory
card is not successfully completed.
Since the write protect switch of the SRAM
2226 card is set to on (write inhibited), the checked
"Restore for the first time only" setting cannot
be performed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
RESTORE ERROR Execute a restore for the other CPU module too
Writing the backup data to the restoration desti- because the CPU module may be damaged.
nation drive is not successfully completed.
 Collateral information
2227  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
ICM. OPE. ERROR Remove memory card after placing the mem- OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
A memory card was removed without switch- ory card in/out switch OFF. ON Continue QnPH
ing the memory card in/out switch OFF. Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a (can be set
QnPRH
The memory card in/out switch is turned ON memory card. in the
parameters QnU (except
although a memory card is not actually
installed. at error Q00UJ-, Q00U-
2300 occur- and Q01UCPU)
 Collateral information
rence)
 Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When memory card is inserted or removed

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 48
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
ICM. OPE. ERROR Format memory card. OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
The memory card has not been formatted. Reformat memory card. ON Continue QnPH
Memory card format status is incorrect. Write the QCPU file to the Flash card (can be set QnPRH
in the
The QCPU file does not exist in the Flash card. parameters QnU (except
 Collateral information at error Q00UJ-, Q00U-
 Common Information: Drive name occur- and Q01UCPU)
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When memory card is inserted or removed.
2301 ICM. OPE. ERROR Format SRAM card after changing battery of QnU (except
SRAM card failure is detected. (It occurs SRAM card. Q00UJ-, Q00U-
when automatic format is not set.) Write a parameter, which sets the file register and Q01UCPU)
Writing parameters was performed during at "Not available", in CPU, and then perform
setting file registers. the operation.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When memory card is inserted or removed.
ICM. OPE. ERROR Format memory card. OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
A memory card that cannot be used with the Reformat memory card. ON Continue QnPH
CPU module has been installed. Check memory card. (can be set
in the QnPRH
 Collateral information QnU (except
2302 parameters
 Common Information: Drive name at error Q00UJ-, Q00U-
 Individual Information: occur- and Q01UCPU)
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When memory card is inserted or removed.
FILE SET ERROR Execute automatic write to standard ROM on OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Automatic write to standard ROM was perfor- the CPU module which is compatible with (Function
med on the CPU module that is incompatible automatic write to standard ROM. version is B or
with automatic write to standard ROM. Using GX (IEC) Developer, perform write of later)
(Memory card where automatic write to standard parameters and programs to standard ROM. QnPH
ROM was selected in the boot file was fitted and Change the memory card for the one where QnPRH
the parameter enable drive was set to the automatic write to standard ROM has not
memory card.) been set, and perform boot operation from
the memory card.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
2400  Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
FILE SET ERROR Read the individual information of the error )
The file designated at the PLC file settings in the using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure
parameters cannot be found. that the parameter drive name and file name
correspond to the numerical values there
 Collateral information (parameter number), and correct.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name Create a file created using parameters, and
 Individual Information: Parameter No. load it to the CPU module.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 49

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
FILE SET ERROR Check and correct the parameters (boot set- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Program memory capacity was exceeded by per- ting). (Function
forming boot operation or automatic write to Delete unnecessary files in the program mem- version is B or
standard ROM. ory. later)
 Collateral information Choose "Clear program memory" for boot in QnPH
 Common Information: File name/Drive name the parameter so that boot is started after the QnPRH
program memory is cleared.
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
FILE SET ERROR QnU
Program memory capacity was exceeded by per-
forming boot operation.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
FILE SET ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop )
The file specified by parameters cannot be using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure
created. that the parameter drive name and file name
2401 correspond to the numerical values there
 Collateral information (parameter number), and correct.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name Check the space remaining in the memory
 Individual Information: Parameter No. card.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
FILE SET ERROR Secure the empty capacity of the standard ROM. OFF Flicker Stop QnU
Although setting is made to use the device
data storage file, there is no empty capacity
required for creating the device data storage
file in the standard ROM.
When the latch data backup function (to
standard ROM) is used, there is no empty
capacity required for storing backup data in
standard ROM. (The parameter number
"FFFFH" is displayed for the error individual
information.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
FILE OPE. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
The specified program does not exist in the using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure ON Continue QnPH
program memory. that the program corresponds to the numeri- (can be set
cal values there (program location), and cor- in the QnPRH
This error may occur when the ECALL,
EFCALL, PSTOP, PSCAN, POFF or PLOW rect. parameters QnU
instruction is executed. Create a file created using parameters, and at error
The specified file does not exist. load it to the CPU module. occur-
2410 rence)
 Collateral information In case a specified file does not exist, write
the file to a target memory and/or check the
 Common Information: File name/Drive name file specified with the instruction again.
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 50
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
FILE OPE. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
The file is one which cannot be specified by using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure that ON Continue QnPH
the sequence program (such as comment the program corresponds to the numerical val- (can be set QnPRH
file). ues there (program location), and correct. in the
parameters QnU
The specified program exists in the program
memory, but has not been registered in the at error
program setting of the Parameter dialog box. occur-
This error may occur when the ECALL, rence)
2411 EFCALL, PSTOP, PSCAN or POFF instruction
is executed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Program error loca-
tion
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
FILE OPE. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
The SFC program file is one that cannot be desi- using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure that ON Continue QnPH
gnated by the sequence program. the program corresponds to the numerical val- (can be set QnPRH
 Collateral information ues there (program location), and correct. in the
parameters QnU
2412  Common Information: File name/Drive name at error
 Individual Information: Program error loca- occur-
tion rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
FILE OPE. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
Check to ensure that the designated file has not using GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure ON Continue QnPH
been write protected. that the program corresponds to the numeri- (can be set
cal values there (program location), and cor- QnPRH
 Collateral information in the
rect. parameters
2413  Common Information: File name/Drive name Check to ensure that the designated file has at error
 Individual Information: Program error loca- not been write protected. occur-
tion rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXE. PRG. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
There is a program file that uses a device that GX (IEC) Developer, check to be sure that the
is out of the range set in the PLC parameter parameter device allocation setting and the pro-
device setting. gram file device allocation correspond to the
After the PLC parameter setting is changed, numerical values there (file name), and correct if
only the parameter is written into the PLC. necessary.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
2500 At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT EXE. PRG. When the index modification of the PLC parame- OFF Flicker Stop QnU
After the index modification of the PLC parame- ter is changed, batch-write the parameter and
ter is changed, only the parameter is written to program file into the PLC.
the PLC.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 51

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CANT EXE. PRG. Edit the PLC parameter program setting to OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
There are multiple program files although "none" "yes". QnPH
has been set at the PLC parameter program set- Alternatively, delete unneeded programs. QnPRH
tings. QnU
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
2501
CANT EXE. PRG. Delete unnecessary program files. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
There are three or more program files. Match the program name with the program
The program name differs from the program contents.
contents.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT EXE. PRG. Check whether the program version is ***.QPG, OFF Flicker Stop )
The program file is incorrect. and check the file contents to be sure they are for
Alternatively, the file contents are not those of a sequence program.
a sequence program.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
2502 CANT EXE. PRG. Create a program using GX Developer, GX IEC OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The program file is not the one for the redundant Developer or PX Developer for which the PLC
CPU. type has been set to the redundant CPU
Alternatively, the file contents are not those of (Q12PRH/Q25PRH), and write it to the CPU
a sequence program. module.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT EXE. PRG. Check program configuration. OFF Flicker Stop )
There are no program files at all. Check parameters and program configuration.
 Collateral information
2503  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT EXE. PRG. Check program configuration. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Two or more SFC normal programs or control Check parameters and program configuration. QnPH
programs have been designated. QnPRH
 Collateral information QnU
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
2504 At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT EXE. PRG. Reduce the SFC programs to one. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
There are two or more SFC programs. (Function
 Collateral information version is B or
later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 52
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
REMOTE PASS.FAIL Check for illegal accesses. If any illegal access is ON ON Continue QnU with Built-
The count of remote password mismatches rea- identified, take actions such as disabling com- in Ethernet port
ched the upper limit. munication of the connection.
 Collateral information If no illegal access is identified, clear the error
 Common Information: and perform the following. (Clearing the error
also clears the count of remote password mis-
 Individual Information: matches.)
2700  Diagnostic Timing Check if the remote password sent is correct.
Always Check if the remote password has been
locked.
Check if concurrent access was made from
multiple devices to one connection by UDP.
Check if the upper limit of the remote pass-
word mismatch count is too low.
SNTP OPE.ERROR Check if the time setting function is set up OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/
Time setting failed when the programmable con- correctly. ON Continue
troller was powered ON or reset. Check if the specified SNTP server is operat-
 Collateral information ing normally, or if any failure has occurred on
2710 the network connected to the specified SNTP
 Common Information: server computer.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When time setting function is executed.

Tab. 11-4: Error code list (2000 to 2999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 53

Troubleshooting Error code list

11.3.3 Error code list (3000 to 3999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PARAMETER ERROR Specify the head I/O number of the intelligent OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, the intelligent function function module under control of the host (Function
module under control of another CPU is speci- CPU. version is B or
fied in the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the later)
parameter. parameter. QnPH
 Collateral information QnU
 Common Information: File name/Drive name (except
Q00UJCPU)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error )
The PLC parameter settings for timer time limit using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parame-
setting, the RUN-PAUSE contact, the common ter item corresponding to the numerical value
pointer number, general data processing, num- (parameter No.), and correct it.
ber of empty slots, system interrupt settings, Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU
baud rate setting, and service processing setting module, reload the CPU power supply and/or
reset the module.
are outside the range that can be used by the
CPU module. If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
hardware error.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR QnPH
In a program memory check, the check capacity QnPRH (first 5
has not been set within the range applicable for digits of serial
3000 the CPU module. No. is 07032 or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR )
The parameter settings in the error individual
information (special register SD16) are illegal.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR QnU (except
The ATA card is set to the memory card slot Q00UJ-, Q00U-
when the specified drive for the file register is set and Q01UCPU)
to "memory card (ROM)" and [Use the following
file] or [Use the same file name as the program]
(either one is allowed) is set in the PLC file set-
ting.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 54
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop )
The parameter settings are corrupted. using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parame-
 Collateral information ter item corresponding to the numerical value
(parameter No.), and correct it.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
3001 Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU
 Individual Information: Parameter No. module, reload the CPU power supply and/or
 Diagnostic Timing reset the module.
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
programmable controller hardware error.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
When "Use the following file" is selected for the using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parame- QnPH
file register in the PLC file setting of the PLC ter item corresponding to the numerical value
(parameter No.), and correct it. QnPRH
parameter dialog box, the specified file does not
exist although the file register capacity has been Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU
set. module, reload the CPU power supply and/or
reset the module.
 Collateral information
If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
 Common Information: File name/Drive name hardware error.
 Individual Information: Parameter No. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR QnU (except
When "Use the following file" is set for the file Q00UJCPU)
register in the PLC file setting of the PLC para-
meter dialog box and the capacity of file register
is not set, the file register file does not exist in
3002 the specified target memory.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR QnU
When "Use the following file" is set for the device
data storage file in [PLC file] of [PLC parameter],
and [Capacity] is not set, the device data storage
file does not exist in the target memory.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Change the file register file for the one refreshen- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU abled in the whole range. (Function
system exceeded the file register capacity. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH
 Individual Information: Parameter No. QnU
(except
 Diagnostic Timing Q00UJCPU)
When an END instruction executed
3003 PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error )
The number of devices set at the PLC parameter using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parame-
device settings exceeds the possible CPU ter item corresponding to the numerical value
module range. (parameter No.), and correct it.
 Collateral information If the error is still generated following the cor-
rection of the parameter settings, the possible
 Common Information: File name/Drive name cause is the memory error of the CPU mod-
 Individual Information: Parameter No. ule's program memory or the memory card.
 Diagnostic Timing Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 55

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PARAMETER ERROR Check whether the parameter file version is OFF Flicker Stop )
The parameter file is incorrect. Alternatively, the ***.QPA, and check the file contents to be sure
contents of the file are not parameters. they are parameters.
 Collateral information
3004  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
The contents of the parameter are damaged. using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parame- digits of serial
 Collateral information ter item corresponding to the numerical value No. is 09012 or
(parameter No.), and correct it. later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
Write the modified parameter items to the QnPH (first 5
 Individual Information: Parameter No. CPU module again, and power-on the Pro- digits of serial
3005  Diagnostic Timing grammable Controller or reset the CPU mod- No. is 10042 or
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN ule. later)
When the same error occurs again, the hard- QnPRH (first 5
ware is faulty.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. digits of serial
No. is 10042 or
later)
PARAMETER ERROR Delete the setting of the Q02CPU' s high OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
The high speed interrupt is set in a Q02CPU. speed interrupt. To use high speed interrupts, digits of serial
The high speed interrupt is set in a multiple change the CPU module to one of the Q02H/ No. is 04012 or
CPU system. Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU. later)
The high speed interrupt is set for a not appli- To use a multiple CPU system, delete the set-
cable base unit. ting of the high-speed interrupt. To use high
speed interrupts, change the system to a sin-
No module is installed at the I/O address des- gle CPU system.
3006 ignated by the high speed interrupt.
Use applicable base units.
 Collateral information Re-examine the I/O address designated by the
 Common Information: File name/Drive name high speed interrupt setting.
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
MISSING PARA. Create parameters using GX (IEC) Developer, and OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The parameter file in the drive specified as valid write them to the drive specified as valid parame-
parameter drive by the DIP switches is inappli- ter drive by the DIP switches.
cable for the CPU module.
 Collateral information
3007  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Re-set the parameter I/O assignment to control OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, the modules for AnS, them under one CPU module. Change the (Function
A, Q2AS and QnA have been set to multiple con- parameters of all CPUs in the multiple CPU sys- version is B or
trol CPUs. tem. later)
 Collateral information
3009  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Match the number of (CPU modules in multiple OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The parameter-set number of CPU modules dif- CPU setting) - (CPUs set as empty in I/O assign- (Function
fers from the actual number in a multiple CPU ment) with that of actually mounted CPU mod- version is B or
system. ules. later)
 Collateral information QnPH
3010  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 56
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PARAMETER ERROR Match the multiple CPU setting or control CPU OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
Multiple CPU setting or control CPU setting dif- setting in the PLC parameter with that of the ref- (Function
fers from that of the reference CPU settings in a erence CPU (CPU No.1) settings. version is B or
multiple CPU system. later)
 Collateral information Qn(H)
3012  Common Information: File name/Drive name (Function
version is B or
 Individual Information: Parameter No. later)
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Check the following in the multiple CPU auto OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple CPU auto refresh setting and make correction. (Function
refresh setting is any of the following: When specifying the bit device, specify 0 or a version is B or
When a bit device is specified as a refresh multiple of 16 for the refresh starting device. later)
device, a number other than a multiple of 16 Specify the device that may be specified for QnPH
is specified for the refresh-starting device. the refresh device.
The device specified is other than the one that Set the number of send points to an even
may be specified. number.
The number of send points is an odd number.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Check the following in the multiple CPU auto Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple CPU auto refresh setting and make correction. (Function
refresh setting is any of the following: The total number of transmission points is version is B or
The total number of transmission points is within the maximum number of refresh later)
greater than the maximum number of refresh points.
points.
 Collateral information
3013  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Check the following in the multiple CPU auto QnU
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple CPU auto refresh setting and make correction. (except Q00UJ)
refresh setting is any of the following: Specify the device that may be specified for
The device specified is other than the one that the refresh device.
may be specified. Set the number of send points to an even
The number of send points is an odd number. number.
The total number of send points is greater Set the total number of send points within the
than the maximum number of refresh points. range of the maximum number of refresh
The setting of the refresh range crosses over points.
the boundary between the internal user device Set the refresh range so that it does not cross
and the extended data register (D) or over the boundary between the internal user
extended link register (W). device and the extended data register (D) or
extended link register (W).
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Match the online module change parameter OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, the online module with that of the reference CPU 1. QnPH
change parameter (multiple CPU system If the CPU module that does not support QnU (except
parameter) settings differ from those of the online module change is mounted, replace it Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
reference CPU 1. with the CPU module that supports online Q01U- and
In a multiple CPU system, the online module module change.
Q02UCPU)
change setting is enabled although the CPU
module mounted does not support online
3014 module change.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 57

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PARAMETER ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU using GX (IEC) Developer, check the parameter Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
verified is different from the one set in the para- item corresponding to the numerical value Q01U- and
meter setting. (parameter No./CPU No.) and parameter of tar- Q02UCPU)
 Collateral information get CPU, and correct them.
3015  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
Parameter No./CPU No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
PARAMETER ERROR Delete the CPU module incompatible with multi- OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The CPU module incompatible with multiple CPU ple CPU synchronized boot-up from the setting. Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
synchronized boot-up is set as the target for the Q01U- and
synchronized boot-up in the [Multiple CPU syn- Q02UCPU)
chronous startup setting].
 Collateral information
3016
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
Parameter No./CPU No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At writing to program-
mable controller
PARAMETER ERROR With GX (IEC) Developer, write [PLC parameter/ OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
The parameter file is damaged. Network parameter/Remote password] to a valid digits of serial
 Collateral information drive then reload the power supply for system No. is 07032 or
and/or reset the CPU module. If the same error later)
3040  Common Information:
occurs, it is thought to be a hardware error. QnPH (first 5
 Individual Information: digits of serial
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing No. is 07032 or
At power ON/At reset later)
PARAMETER ERROR With GX (IEC) Developer, write [Intelligent func- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
Parameter file of intelligent function module is tion module parameter] to a valid drive then digits of serial
damaged. reload the power supply for system and/or reset No. is 07032 or
later)
 Collateral information the CPU module. If the same error occurs, it is
3041  Common Information: thought to be a hardware error.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
PARAMETER ERROR With GX (IEC) Developer, write [PLC parame- OFF Flicker Stop
The system file that stored the remote password ter/Network parameter/Remote password] to
setting information is damaged. a valid drive then reload the power supply for
system and/or reset the CPU module. If the
 Collateral information same error occurs, it is thought to be a hard-
 Common Information: ware error.
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing When a valid drive for parameter is set to
other than [program memory], set the param-
3042 At power ON/At reset eter file (PARAM) at the boot file setting to be
able to transmit to the program memory.
With GX (IEC) Developer, write [PLC parame-
ter/Network parameter/Remote password] to
a valid drive then reload the power supply for
system and/or reset the CPU module. If the
same error occurs, it is thought to be a hard-
ware error.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 58
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Delete the network parameter of the CC-Link OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link IE con- IE controller network module controlled by digits of serial
troller network module controlled by another another CPU. No. is 09012 or
CPU is specified as the head I/O number of the Change the setting to the head I/O number of later)
CC-Link IE controller network module. the CC-Link IE controller network module QnPH (first 5
controlled by host CPU. digits of serial
 Collateral information
No. is 10042 or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Reset the CPU module. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
The network parameter of the CC-Link IE control- digits of serial
ler network operating as the normal station is No. is 09012 or
overwritten to the control station. later)
Or, the network parameter of the CC-Link IE con- QnPH (first 5
troller network operating as the control station is digits of serial
overwritten to the normal station. No. is 10042 or
(The network parameter is updated on the mod- later)
ule by resetting.) QnPRH (first 5
 Collateral information digits of serial
No. is 10042 or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Check the network parameters and actual OFF Flicker Stop
The number of modules actually mounted is mounting status, and if they differ, make them
different from that is set in Network parame- match.
ter for CC-Link IE controller network. When network parameters are modified, write
The head I/O number of the actually mounted them to the CPU module.
module is different from the one set in the Check the setting of extension base unit stage
network parameter of the CC-Link IE control- number.
ler network. Check the connection status of extension
Data cannot be handled in the parameter base unit and extension cables. When the
existing. GOT is busconnected to the main base unit or
3100 The network type of CC-Link IE controller net- extension base unit, also check its connection
work is overwritten during power-on. (When status.
changing the network type, switch RESET to If the error occurs even after the above checks,
RUN.) the possible cause is a hardware fault.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop
The CC-Link IE controller network module is
specified for the head I/O number of network
parameter in the MELSECNET/H.
The MELSECNET/H module is specified for
the head I/O number of network parameter in
the CC-Link IE controller network.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop
Although the CC-Link IE controller network
module is mounted, network parameter for
the CCLink IE controller network module is
not set.
Although the CC-Link IE controller network
and MELSECNET/H modules are mounted,
network parameter for the MELSECNET/H
module is not set.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 59

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Delete the MELSECNET/H network parameter OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the MELSECNET/H of the MELSECNET/H under control of (Function
under control of another CPU is specified as the another CPU. version is B or
head I/O number in the network setting parame- Change the setting to the head I/O number of later)
ter of the MELSECNET/H. the MELSECNET/H under control of the host Qn(H)
CPU. (Function
 Collateral information
version is B or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnU (except
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN Q00UJCPU)
LINK PARA. ERROR Reset the CPU module. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The network parameter of the MELSECNET/H (Function
operating as the normal station is overwritten to version is B or
the control station. later)
Or, the network parameter of the MELSECNET/H QnPH
operating as the control station is overwritten to QnPRH
the normal station. (The network parameter is QnU
updated on the module by resetting.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
3100
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Check the network parameters and actual OFF Flicker Stop )
The number of modules actually mounted is mounting status, and if they differ, make them
different from that is set in Network parame- match.
ter for MELSECNET/H. When network parameters are modified, write
The head I/O number of actually installed them to the CPU module.
modules is different from that designated in Check the setting of extension base unit stage
the network parameter of MELSECNET/H. number.
Some data in the parameters cannot be han- Check the connection status of extension
dled. base unit and extension cables. When the
The network type of MELSECNET/H is over- GOT is busconnected to the main base unit or
written during power-on. (When changing the extension base unit, also check its connection
network type, switch RESET to RUN.) status.
The mode switch of MELSECNET/H module If the error occurs even after the above checks,
(for module with first 5 digits of serial No. is the possible cause is a hardware fault.
"07032" or later) is outside the range . Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information Set the mode switch of MELSECNET/H mod-
ule (for module with first 5 digits of serial No.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name is "07032" or later) within the range.
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 60
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Change the file register file for the one that ena- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The link refresh range exceeded the file register bles entire range refresh. (Function
capacity. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH
 Individual Information: Parameter No. QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing QnU (except
Q00UJCPU)
When an END instruction executed
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct the type or station number of the OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
When the station number of the MELSECNET/ MELSECNET/H module in the network parameter (Function
H module is 0, the PLC-to-PLC network to meet the used system. version is B or
parameter has been set. later)
When the station number of the MELSECNET/ QnPH
H module is other than 0, the remote master QnPRH
parameter setting has been made.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Check the network parameters and actual OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
The refresh parameter for the CC-Link IE control- mounting status, and if they differ, make them digits of serial
ler network is outside the range. match. No. is 09012 or
When network parameters are modified, write later)
 Collateral information them to the CPU module.
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH (first 5
Check the setting of extension base unit stage digits of serial
 Individual Information: Parameter No. number. No. is 10042 or
 Diagnostic Timing Check the connection status of extension later)
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN base unit and extension cables. When the QnPRH (first 5
GOT is busconnected to the main base unit or
extension base unit, also check its connection digits of serial
status. No. is 10042 or
later)
If the error occurs even after the above checks,
the possible cause is a hardware fault. QnU
LINK PARA. ERROR Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. OFF Flicker Stop )
The network No. specified by a network
3101 parameter is different from that of the actually
mounted network.
The head I/O No. specified by a network
parameter is different from that of the actually
mounted I/O unit.
The network class specified by a network
parameter is different from that of the actually
mounted network.
The network refresh parameter of the
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 is out of the
specified area.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Use a module that supports a multi-remote I/O OFF Flicker Stop QnPH
A multi-remote I/O network was configured network.
using a module that does not support a multi-
remote I/O network.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Set the system A of the MELSECNET/H OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The system A of the MELSECNET/H remote remote master station to Station No. 0.
master station has been set to other than Sta- Set the system B of the MELSECNET/H
tion No. 0. remote master station to any of Station No. 1
The system B of the MELSECNET/H remote to 64.
master station has been set to Station No. 0.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 61

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Set the refresh parameter of the MELSECNET/H OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
Since the number of points of the B/W device set in accordance with the number of points of B/W digits of serial
in [Device] of the PLC parameter is lower than devices set in [Device] of the PLC parameter. No. is 09012 or
the number of B/W refresh device points when later)
parameters of the MELSECNET/H are not set, the QnPH (first 5
refresh between the CPU module and the MELS- digits of serial
ECNET/H cannot be performed. No. is 09012 or
later)
Number of B/W refresh device points when para- QnPRH (first 5
meters of the MELSECNET/H are not set: digits of serial
1 network module mounted No. is 09012 or
B: 8192; W: 8192 later)
2 network modules mounted QnU
B: 8192 (4096x2); W: 8192 (4096x2)
3 network modules mounted
B: 6144 (2048x3); W: 6144 (2048x3)
4 network modules mounted
3101
B: 8192 (2048x4); W: 8192 (2048x4)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Set the network refresh range so that it does not OFF Flicker Stop )
The setting of the network refresh range crosses cross over the boundary between the internal
over the boundary between the internal user user device and the extended data register (D) or
device and the extended data register (D) or extended link register (W).
extended link register (W).
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct and write the network parameters. OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H) (first 5
A CC-Link IE controller network parameter error If the error occurs after correction, it suggests digits of serial
was detected. a hardware fault. No. is 09012 or
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH (first 5
digits of serial
 Individual Information: Parameter No. No. is 10042 or
 Diagnostic Timing later)
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN QnPRH (first 5
digits of serial
No. is 10042 or
later)
QnU
LINK PARA. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop )
The network module detected a network parame-
ter error.
3102  Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Refer to the troubleshooting of the network mod- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The station No. specified in pairing setting are ule, and if the error is due to incorrect pairing
not correct. setting, reexamine the pairing setting of the net-
The stations are not numbered consecutively. work parameter.
Pairing setting has not been made for the CPU
module at the normal station.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 62
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR The CC-Link IE controller network module whose OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The CC-Link IE controller network module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09041" or earlier is
first 5 digits of serial No. is "09041" or earlier is mounted.
mounted.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Set group cyclic function in function version D or OFF Flicker Stop QnU (first 5
Group cyclic function in CC-Link IE controller later of CC-Link IE controller network. digits of serial
network that does not correspond to group No. is 10042 or
cyclic function is set. later)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Examine the pairing setting for the network OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
3102 Pairing setting in CC-Link IE controller network parameter in the control staion. Qn(H) (first 5
modules installed in CPUs except for redundant digits of serial
CPUs was performed. No. is 10042 or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH (first 5
 Individual Information: Parameter No. digits of serial
No. is 10042 or
 Diagnostic Timing later)
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN QnU (first 5
digits of serial
No. is 10042 or
later)
LINK PARA. ERROR Examine the network range assignments for the OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
LB/LW own station send range at LB/LW4000 network parameter in the control station.
or later was set.
LB/LW setting (2) was performed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 63

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Delete the Ethernet network parameter of OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, Ethernet interface Ethernet interface module under control of (Function
module under control of another station is speci- another station. version is B or
fied to the start I/O number of the Ethernet net- Change the setting to the start I/O number of later)
work parameter. Ethernet interface module under control of the Qn(H)
host station. (Function
 Collateral information
version is B or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnU (except
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN Q00UJCPU)
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct and write the network parameters. OFF Flicker Stop )
Although the number of modules has been set If the error occurs after correction, it suggests
to one or a greater number in the Ethernet a hardware fault.
module count parameter setting, the number Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
of actually mounted module is zero.
The start I/O No. of the Ethernet network
parameter differs from the I/O No. of the actu-
3103 ally mounted module.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct and write the network parameters. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
Ethernet module whose network type is set to If the error occurs after correction, it suggests digits of serial
"Ethernet (main base)" is mounted on the a hardware fault. No. is 09012 or
extension base unit in the redundant system. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. later)
Ethernet module whose network type is set to
"Ethernet (extension base)" is mounted on the
main base unit in the redundant system.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct and write the network parameters. OFF Flicker Stop )
The Ethernet, MELSECNET/H and MELSEC- If the error occurs after correction, it suggests
NET/10 use the same network number. a hardware fault.
The network number, station number or Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
group number set in the network parameter is
out of range.
The specified I/O number is outside the range
of the used CPU module.
3104
The Ethernet-specific parameter setting is not
normal.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 64
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Delete the CC-Link network parameter of the OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link module CC-Link module under control of another sta- (Function
under control of another station is specified as tion. version is B or
the head I/O number of the CC-Link network Change the setting to the start I/O number of later)
parameter. the CC-Link module under control of the host Qn(H)
station. (Function
 Collateral information
version is B or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnU (except
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN Q00UJCPU)
LINK PARA. ERROR Correct and write the network parameters. OFF Flicker Stop )
Though the number of CC-Link modules set in If the error occurs after correction, it suggests
the network parameters is one or more, the a hardware fault.
number of actually mounted modules is zero. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
The start I/O number in the common parame-
ters is different from that of the actually
mounted module.
The station type of the CC-Link module count
setting parameters is different from that of the
3105 actually mounted station.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name//Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
CC-Link module whose station type is set to digits of serial
"master station (compatible with redundant No. is 09012 or
function)" is mounted on the extension base later)
unit in the redundant system.
CC-Link module whose station type is set to
"master station (extension base)" is mounted
on the main base unit in the redundant sys-
tem.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Change the file register file for the one refreshen- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The CC-Link link refresh range exceeded the file abled in the whole range. (Function
register capacity. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
 Common Information: File name/Drive name QnPH
 Individual Information: Parameter No. QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
When an END instruction executed
LINK PARA. ERROR Check the parameter setting. )
The network refresh parameter for CC-Link is out
of range.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
3106
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
LINK PARA. ERROR Set the network refresh range so that it does not QnU
The setting of the network refresh range crosses cross over the boundary between the internal
over the boundary between the internal user user device and the extended data register (D) or
device and the extended data register (D) or extended link register (W).
extended link register (W).
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 65

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
LINK PARA. ERROR Check the parameter setting. OFF Flicker Stop )
The CC-Link parameter setting is incorrect.
The set mode is not allowed for the version of
the mounted CC-Link module.
3107  Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
SFC PARA. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The parameter setting is illegal. GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- (Function
Though Block 0 was set to "Automatic start" in sponding to its numerical value (program error version is B or
the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box, location), and correct the problem. later)
Block 0 does not exist. QnPH
3200  Collateral information QnPRH
 Common Information: File name QnU
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC PARA. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The block parameter setting is illegal. QnPH
 Collateral information QnPRH
3201  Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC PARA. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The number of step relays specified in the device GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is less sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
than that used in the program. location), and correct the problem.
3202  Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC PARA. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The execution type of the SFC program specified GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
in the program setting of the PLC parameter dia- sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
log box is other than scan execution. location), and correct the problem.
QnU
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
3203
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN (The diagno-
stic timing of CPU modules except for Universal
QCPU can be performed only when switching the
CPU modules to run.)
SP. PARA. ERROR Check the parameter setting. OFF Flicker Stop )
The start I/O number in the intelligent function
module parameter set on GX Configurator differs
from the actual I/O number.
 Collateral information
3300  Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No. (gained
by dividing the head I/O number of parameter
in the intelligent function module set by GX
Configurator by 10H)
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 66
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SP. PARA. ERROR Change the file register file for the one which OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The refresh setting of the intelligent function allows refresh in the whole range. Qn(H)
module exceeded the file register capacity. Check the parameter setting. (Function
The intelligent function module set in GX Con- version is B or
figurator differs from the actually mounted later)
module. QnPH
 Collateral information QnPRH
 Common Information: File name QnU
 Individual Information: Parameter No. (gained
by dividing the head I/O number of parameter
in the intelligent function module set by GX
Configurator by 10H)
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
SP. PARA. ERROR Check the parameter setting. OFF Flicker Stop )
The intelligent function module's refresh para-
meter setting is outside the available range.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
3301  Individual Information: Parameter No. (gained
by dividing the head I/O number of parameter
in the intelligent function module set by GX
Configurator by 10H)
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
SP. PARA. ERROR Set the refresh parameter range so that it does OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The setting of the refresh parameter range not cross over the boundary between the internal
crosses over the boundary between the internal user device and the extended data register (D) or
user device and the extended data register (D) or extended link register (W).
extended link register (W).
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
 Individual Information: Parameter No. (gained
by dividing the head I/O number of parameter
in the intelligent function module set by GX
Configurator by 10H)
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to
programmable controller
SP. PARA. ERROR Check the parameter setting. OFF Flicker Stop )
The intelligent function module's refresh para-
meter are abnormal.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
3302  Individual Information: Parameter No. (gained
by dividing the head I/O number of parameter
in the intelligent function module set by GX
Configurator by 10H)
 Diagnostic Timing
At writing to programmable controller
SP. PARA. ERROR Delete the automatic refresh setting or other OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the automatic refresh parameter setting of the intelligent function (Function
setting or other parameter setting was made to module under control of another CPU. version is B or
the intelligent function module under control of Change the setting to the automatic refresh later)
another station. setting or other parameter setting of the intel- Qn(H)
ligent function module under control of the (Function
3303  Collateral information host CPU. version is B or
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
later)
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing
QnU (except
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/At writing to Q00UJCPU)
programmable controller

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 67

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
REMOTE PASS. ERROR Change the head I/O number of the target mod- OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The head I/O number of the target module of the ule to be within the 0H to 0FF0H range. (Function
remote password is set to other than 0H to version is B or
0FF0H. later)
 Collateral information QnPH
 Common Information: QnPRH
 Individual Information: QnU (first 5
 Diagnostic Timing digits of serial
No. is 09012 or
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN later)
REMOTE PASS. ERROR Change the head I/O number of the target mod- Q02U
The head I/O number of the target module of the ule to be within the 0H to 07E0H range.
remote password is set to other than 0H to
07E0H.
 Collateral information
3400  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
REMOTE PASS. ERROR Change the head I/O number of the target mod- Q00J/Q00/Q01
The head I/O number of the target module of the ule of the remote password for the number (Function
remote password is outside the following range: within the following range: version is B or
 Q00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H BQ00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H later)
 Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
REMOTE PASS. ERROR Mount serial communication module, modem OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Position specified as the head I/O number of the interface module or Ethernet module of function (Function
remote password file is incorrect due to one of version B or later in the position specified in the version is B or
the following reasons: head I/O No. of the remote password file. later)
Module is not loaded. QnPH
Other than a the intelligent function module (I/ QnPRH
O module) QnU
Intelligent function module other than serial
communication module, modem interface
module or Ethernet module
Serial communication module or Ethernet
module of function version A
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
REMOTE PASS. ERROR OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Any of the following modules is not mounted on (Function
the slot specified for the head I/O number of the version is B or
remote password: later)
3401
Serial communication module of function ver-
sion B or later
Ethernet module of function version B or later
Modem interface module of function version
B or later
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
REMOTE PASS. ERROR Change it for the Ethernet module of function OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Serial communication module, modem interface version B or later connected by the host CPU. (Function
module or Ethernet module of function version B Delete the remote password setting. version is B or
or later controlled by another CPU was specified later)
in a multiple CPU system. QnPH
 Collateral information QnU (except
 Common Information: Q00UJCPU)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-5: Error code list (3000 to 3999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 68
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3.4 Error code list (4000 to 4999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
INSTRCT CODE. ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The program contains an instruction code GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
that cannot be decoded. sponding to its numerical value (program error
An unusable instruction is included in the pro- location), and correct the problem.
gram.
4000  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
When instruction executed
INSTRCT CODE. ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The program contains a dedicated instruction for GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- (Function
SFC although it is not an SFC program. sponding to its numerical value (program error version is B or
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. later)
4001  Common Information: Program error location Qn(H)
 Individual Information: QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing QnPRH
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/ QnU
When instruction executed
INSTRCT CODE. ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The name of dedicated instruction specified GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
by the program is incorrect. sponding to its numerical value (program error
The dedicated instruction specified by the location), and correct the problem.
program cannot be executed by the specified
module.
4002  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
When instruction executed
INSTRCT CODE. ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The number of devices for the dedicated instruc- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
tion specified by the program is incorrect. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4003  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
When instruction executed
INSTRCT CODE. ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The device which cannot be used by the dedica- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
ted instruction specified by the program is speci- sponding to its numerical value (program error
fied. location), and correct the problem.
 Collateral information
4004  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
When instruction executed
MISSING END INS. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
There is no END (FEND) instruction in the pro- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
gram. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4010  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 69

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CANT SET (P) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The total number of internal file pointers used by GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
the program exceeds the number of internal file sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
pointers set in the parameters. location), and correct the problem.
QnU
4020  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT SET (P) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
 The common pointer Nos. assigned to files GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
overlap. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 The local pointer Nos. assigned to files over- location), and correct the problem.
lap.
4021  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
CANT SET (I) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The allocation pointer Nos. assigned by files GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
overlap. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4030  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
The instruction cannot process the contained GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
data. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. in the
parameters
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Take noise reduction measures. Qn(H)
Access error of ATA card occurs by SP.FREAD/ Reset and restart the CPU module. QnPH
SP.FWRITE instructions. When the same error is displayed again, the QnPRH
 Collateral information ATA card has hardware failure.
QnU (except
4100 Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information: Program error location Q00UJ-, Q00U-
 Individual Information: and Q01UCPU)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Stop the file accessed with other functions to QnU (except
The file being accessed by other functions was execute SP.FWRITE instruction. Q00UJ-, Q00U-
accessed with SP.FWRITE instruction. Stop the access with other functions and the and Q01UCPU)
 Collateral information SP.FWRITE instruction execution at the same
time.
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 70
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ )
The number of setting data dealt with the GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
instruction exceeds the applicable range. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
The storage data and constant of the device location), and correct the problem. in the
specified by the instruction exceeds the appli- parameters
cable range. at error
When writing to the host CPU shared mem- occur-
ory, the write prohibited area is specified for rence)
the write destination address.
The range of storage data of the device speci-
fied by the instruction is duplicated.
The device specified by the instruction
exceeds the range of the number of device
points.
The interrupt pointer No. specified by the
instruction exceeds the applicable range.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
4101 OPERATION ERROR QnU (except
The storage data of file register specified by Q00UJCPU)
the instruction exceeds the applicable range.
Or, file register is not set.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR QnU
Block data that crosses over the boundary
between the internal user device and the
extended data register (D) or extended link regis-
ter is specified (including 32-bit binary, real
number (single precision, double precision),
indirect address, and control data).
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 71

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
OPERATION ERROR Delete from the program the link direct device OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, the link direct device which specifies the network module under ON Continue (Function
(J\), was specified for the network module control of another CPU. (can be set version is B or
under control of another station. Using the link direct device (J\), specify in the later)
the network module under control of the host parameters Qn(H)
 Collateral information
CPU. at error (Function
 Common Information: Program error location occur- version is B or
 Individual Information: rence) later)
 Diagnostic Timing QnPH
When instruction executed QnU (except
Q00UJCPU)
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using )
The network No. or station No. specified for GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
the dedicated instruction is wrong. sponding to its numerical value (program error
The link direct device (J\) setting is incor- location), and correct the problem.
rect.
The module No./ network No./number of
4102 character strings exceeds the range that can
be specified.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using QnU
The specification of character string (" ") speci- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
fied by dedicated instruction cannot be used for sponding to its numerical value (program error
the character string. location), and correct the problem.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00J/Q00/Q01
The configuration of the PID dedicated instruc- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue (Function
tion is incorrect. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set version is B or
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. in the later)
4103 parameters Qn(H)
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: QnPRH
occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence) QnU
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Delete the program memory check setting. OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnPH (first 5
PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP instructions were When using the program memory check, ON Continue digits of serial
executed while setting program memory check. delete PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP instruc- (can be set No. is 07032 or
 Collateral information tions. in the later)
4105 parameters
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00/Q01
33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions completion bit, provide interlocks to prevent one ON Continue (Function
were executed from one CPU module. CPU module from executing 33 or more multiple (can be set version is B or
 Collateral information CPU dedicated instructions. in the later)
parameters Qn(H)
 Common Information: Program error location at error
4107 (Function
 Individual Information: occur- version is B or
 Diagnostic Timing rence) later)
When instruction executed QnPH
Q00U/Q01U/
Q02U

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 72
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
OPERATION ERROR Delete the high-speed interrupt setting. When OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H) (first 5
With high speed interrupt setting PR, PRC, using high-speed interrupt, delete the PR, PRC, ON Continue digits of serial
UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY or PWM instruction is UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY and PWM instructions. (can be set No. is 04012 or
executed. in the later)
 Collateral information parameters
4109 at error
 Common Information: Program error location occur-
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00/Q01
An attempt was made to perform write/read to/ GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue (Function
from the CPU shared memory write/read sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set version is B or
disabled area of the host station CPU module location), and correct the problem. in the later)
with the instruction. parameters QnU
4111 at error
 Collateral information occur-
 Common Information: Program error location rence)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Q00/Q01
A CPU module that cannot be specified with the GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue (Function
multiple CPU dedicated instruction was speci- sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set version is B or
fied. location), and correct the problem. in the later)
 Collateral information parameters QnU (except
4112 at error
 Common Information: Program error location Q00UJCPU)
occur-
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Check that the number of execution of the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnU
When the SP.DEVST instruction is executed, SP.DEVST instruction is proper. ON Continue
the number of writing to the standard ROM of Execute the SP.DEVST instruction again the (can be set
the day exceeds the value specified by SD695. following day or later day. Or, arrange the in the
A value outside the specified range is set to value of SD695. parameters
SD695. Correct the value of SD695 so that it does not at error
4113 occur-
 Collateral information exceed the range.
rence)
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR To execute control system switching by the SP. OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnPRH
Since the manual system switching enable flag CONTSW instruction, turn ON the manual sys- ON Continue
(special register SM1592) is OFF, manual system tem switching enable flag (special register (can be set
switching cannot be executed by the control SM1592). in the
system switching instruction (SP. CONTSW). parameters
4120 at error
 Collateral information
occur-
 Common Information: Program error location rence)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Reexamine the interlock signal for the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnPRH
In the separate mode, the control system SP.CONTSW instruction, and make sure that ON Continue
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW) was exe- the SP.CONTSW instruction is executed in the (can be set
cuted in the standby system CPU module. control system only. (Since the SP. CONTSW in the
In the debug mode, the control system instruction cannot be executed in the standby parameters
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW) was exe- system, it is recommended to provide an at error
4121 cuted. interlock using the operation mode signal or occur-
like. Refer to the manual of the redundant sys- rence)
 Collateral information tem).
 Common Information: Program error location As the SP. CONTSW instruction cannot be
 Individual Information: executed in the debug mode, reexamine the
interlock signal related to the operation mode.
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 73

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
OPERATION ERROR Delete the dedicated instruction for the mod- OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnPRH (first 5
The dedicated instruction was executed to the ule mounted on the extension base unit. ON Continue digits of serial
module mounted on the extension base unit Delete the instruction for accessing the intelli- (can be set No. is 09012 or
in the redundant system. gent function module mounted on the exten- in the later)
The instruction for accessing the intelligent sion base unit from the standby system. parameters
function module mounted on the extension at error
base unit from the standby system at separate occur-
4122 mode was executed. rence)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Target comment file has to be other than the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H) (first 5
Instructions to read SFC step comment comment file in ATA card. ON Continue digits of serial
(S(P).SFCSCOMR) and SFC transition condition (can be set No. is 07012 or
comment (S(P).SFCTCOMR) are executed for in the later)
the comment file in ATA card. parameters QnPH (first 5
4130  Collateral information at error digits of serial
occur- No. is 07032 or
 Common Information: Program error location rence) later)
 Individual Information:
QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Check the SFC program specified by the OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnU
The SFC program is started up by an instruction instruction. ON Continue
while another SFC program has not yet been Or, check the executing status of the SFC pro- (can be set
completed. gram. in the
 Collateral information parameters
4131 at error
 Common Information: Program error location occur-
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnU
Operation with non-allowed input data ("-0", GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
unnormalized number, nonnumeric, ) is per- sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
formed. location), and correct the problem. in the
 Collateral information parameters
4140 at error
 Common Information: Program error location occur-
 Individual Information: rence)
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
OPERATION ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ QnU
Overflow occurs at operation. GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
 Collateral information sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
in the
4141  Common Information: Program error location location), and correct the problem. parameters
 Individual Information: at error
 Diagnostic Timing occur-
When instruction executed rence)
FOR NEXT ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
No NEXT instruction was executed following the GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
execution of a FOR instruction. sponding to its numerical value (program error
Alternatively, there are fewer NEXT instructions location), and correct the problem.
than FOR instructions.
4200  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
FOR NEXT ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
A NEXT instruction was executed although no GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
FOR instruction has been executed. sponding to its numerical value (program error
Alternatively, there are more NEXT instructions location), and correct the problem.
than FOR instructions.
4201  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 74
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
FOR NEXT ERROR Keep nesting levels at 16 or under. OFF Flicker Stop )
More than 16 nesting levels are programmed.
 Collateral information
4202  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
FOR NEXT ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
A BREAK instruction was executed although no GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
FOR instruction has been executed prior to that. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4203  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (P) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The CALL instruction is executed, but there is no GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
subroutine at the specified pointer. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4210  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (P) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
There was no RET instruction in the executed GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
subroutine program. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4211  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (P) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The RET instruction exists before the FEND GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
instruction of the main routine program. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4212  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (P) Keep nesting levels at 16 or under. OFF Flicker Stop )
More than 16 nesting levels are programmed.
 Collateral information
4213  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (I) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
Though an interrupt input occurred, the corre- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
sponding interrupt pointer does not exist. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4220  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (I) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
An IRET instruction does not exist in the exe- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
cuted interrupt program. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4221  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 75

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CANT EXECUTE (I) Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The IRET instruction exists before the FEND GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
instruction of the main routine program. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
4223 CANT EXECUTE (I) QnU
The IRET instruction was executed in the fixed
scan execution type program.
The STOP instruction was executed in the
fixed scan execution type program.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
CANT EXECUTE (I) Delete the setting of interrupt pointer for the OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH (first 5
The interrupt pointer for the module mounted on module mounted on the extension base unit, digits of serial
the extension base unit is set in the redundant since it cannot be used. No. is 09012 or
system. later)
4225  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
INST. FORMAT ERR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The number of CHK and CHKEND instructions is GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
not equal. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4230  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
INST. FORMAT ERR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop )
The number of IX and IXEND instructions is not GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
equal. sponding to its numerical value (program error
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4231  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
INST. FORMAT ERR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The configuration of the check conditions for the GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
CHK instruction is incorrect. sponding to its numerical value (program error
Alternatively, a CHK instruction has been used in location), and correct the problem.
a low speed execution type program.
4235  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 76
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The multiple CPU high-speed transmission GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
dedicated instruction used in the program sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
specifies the wrong CPU module. Or, the set- location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
ting in the CPU module is incompatible with
the multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instruction.
The reserved CPU is specified.
The uninstalled CPU is specified.
The head I/O number of the target CPU/16
(n1) is outside the range of 3EH to 3E3H.
The CPU module where the instruction cannot
4350 be executed is specified.
The instruction is executed in a single CPU
system.
The host CPU is specified.
The instruction is executed without setting the
"Use multiple CPU high speed communica-
tion".
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The multiple CPU high-speed transmission GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
dedicated instruction specified by the pro- sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
gram cannot be executed to the specified tar- location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
get CPU module.
The instruction name is wrong.
4351 The instruction unsupported by the target
CPU module is specified.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The number of devices for the multiple CPU GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
highspeed transmission dedicated instruction sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
specified by the program is wrong. location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
4352  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The device which cannot be used for the multiple GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruc- sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
tion specified by the program is specified. location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
4353  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The character string which cannot be handled by GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
the multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedi- sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
cated instruction is specified. location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
4354  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 77

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MULTI-COM.ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The number of read/write data (number of GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
request/receive data) for the multiple CPU high- sponding to its numerical value (program error Q01U- and
speed transmission dedicated instruction speci- location), and correct the problem. Q02UCPU)
fied by the program is not valid.
4355  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
SFCP. CODE ERROR Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC pro- using GX (IEC) Developer. QnPH
gram. QnPRH
 Collateral information
4400  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
CANT SET (BL) Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The block number designated by the SFC pro- using GX (IEC) Developer. (Function
gram exceeds the range. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
4410  Common Information: Program error location Qn(H)
 Individual Information: QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
STOP RUN
CANT SET (BL) Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
Block number designations overlap in SFC pro- using GX (IEC) Developer.
gram.
 Collateral information
4411  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
CANT SET (S) Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
A step number designated in an SFC program using GX (IEC) Developer.
exceeds the range.
 Collateral information
4420  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
CANT SET (S) Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Total number of steps in all SFC programs using GX (IEC) Developer. (Function
exceed the maximum. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
4421  Common Information: Program error location Qn(H)
 Individual Information: QnPRH
 Diagnostic Timing QnU
STOP RUN
CANT SET (S) Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
Step number designations overlap in SFC pro- using GX (IEC) Developer.
gram.
 Collateral information
4422  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 78
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CANT SET (S) Correct the total number of step relays so that it OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The total number of (maximum step No.+1) of does not exceed the total number of (maximum (Function
each block exceeds the total number of step step No.+1) of each block. version is B or
relays. later)
4423  Collateral information QnU
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC EXE. ERROR Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
The SFC program cannot be executed. using GX (IEC) Developer.
The data of the block data setting is illegal. After correcting the setting of the SFC data
The SFC data device of the block data setting device, write it to the CPU module.
is beyond the device setting range set in the After correcting the device setting range set in
PLC parameter. the PLC parameter, write it to the CPU mod-
4430 ule.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC EXE. ERROR Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
The SFC program cannot be executed. The block using GX (IEC) Developer.
parameter setting is abnormal.
 Collateral information
4431  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFC EXE. ERROR Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
The SFC program cannot be executed. using GX (IEC) Developer.
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
 Collateral information
4432  Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The numbers of BLOCK and BEND instructions in using GX (IEC) Developer. QnPH
an SFC program are not equal. QnPRH
 Collateral information
4500  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The configuration of the STEP* to TRAN* to using GX (IEC) Developer. QnPH
TSET to SEND instructions in the SFC program is QnPRH
incorrect.
4501  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 79

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The structure of the SFC program is illegal. using GX (IEC) Developer. (Function
STEPI* instruction does not exist in the block of version is B or
the SFC program. later)
4502  Collateral information Qn(H)
 Common Information: Program error location QnPRH
 Individual Information: QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
The structure of the SFC program is illegal: using GX (IEC) Developer.
The step specified in the TSET instruction Read the common information of the error
does not exist. using GX (IEC) Developer, check error step
In jump transition, the host step number was corresponding to its numerical value (pro-
specified as the destination step number. gram error location), and correct the problem.
4503
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Write the program to the CPU module again OFF Flicker Stop
The structure of the SFC program is illegal. using GX (IEC) Developer.
The step specified in the TAND instruction does
not exist.
4504  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The structure of the SFC program is illegal. GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- (Function
In the operation output of a step, the SET Sn/ sponding to its numerical value (program error version is B or
BLmSn or RST Sn/BLmSn instruction was speci- location), and correct the problem. later)
fied for the host step. QnU
4505  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. FORMAT ERR. Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop
The structure of the SFC program is illegal. GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
In a reset step, the host step number was speci- sponding to its numerical value (program error
fied as the destination step. location), and correct the problem.
4506  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 80
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
SFCP. OPE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/ Qn(H)
The SFC program contains data that cannot be GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue QnPH
processed. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. in the
4600 parameters
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When instruction executed
SFCP. OPE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/
Exceeds device range that can be designated by GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
the SFC program. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. in the
4601 parameters
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When instruction executed
SFCP. OPE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF/ON Flicker/ Stop/
The START instruction in an SFC program is pre- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- ON Continue
ceded by an END instruction. sponding to its numerical value (program error (can be set
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem. in the
4602 parameters
 Common Information: Program error location at error
 Individual Information: occur-
 Diagnostic Timing rence)
When instruction executed
SFCP. EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using ON ON Continue Qn(H)
GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre-
The active step information at presumptive start QnPH
of the SFC program is incorrect. sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4610  Common Information: Program error location The program is automatically subjected to an
initial start.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
SFCP. EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using ON ON Continue Qn(H)
Key-switch was reset during RUN when pre- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
sumptive start was designated for SFC program. sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4611  Common Information: Program error location The program is automatically subjected to an
initial start.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
STOP RUN
BLOCK EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Startup was executed at a block in the SFC pro- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
gram that was already started up. sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4620  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
BLOCK EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Startup was attempted at a block that does not using GX (IEC) Developer, check error step (Function
exist in the SFC program. corresponding to its numerical value (pro- version is B or
gram error location), and correct the problem. later)
 Collateral information
4621 Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF. Qn(H)
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information: QnPH
 Diagnostic Timing QnPRH
When instruction executed QnU
STEP EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Startup was executed at a block in the SFC pro- GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
gram that was already started up. sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
4630  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 81

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
STEP EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
Startup was attempted at the step that does using GX (IEC) Developer, check error step (Function
not exist in the SFC program. corresponding to its numerical value (pro- version is B or
Or, the step that does not exist in the SFC pro- gram error location), and correct the problem. later)
gram was specified for end. Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF. Qn(H)
Forced transition was executed based on the QnPH
transition condition that does not exist in the
SFC program. QnPRH
4631 Or, the transition condition for forced transi- QnU
tion that does not exist in the SFC program
was cancelled.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
STEP EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
There were too many simultaneous active steps GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
in blocks that can be designated by the SFC pro- sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
gram. location), and correct the problem.
QnU
4632  Collateral information
 Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
STEP EXE. ERROR Read the common information of the error using OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
There were too many simultaneous active steps GX (IEC) Developer, check error step corre- QnPH
in all blocks that can be designated. sponding to its numerical value (program error QnPRH
 Collateral information location), and correct the problem.
QnU
4633  Common Information: Program error location
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed

Tab. 11-6: Error code list (4000 to 4999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 82
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3.5 Error code list (5000 to 5999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
WDT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
The scan time of the initial execution type pro- from GX (IEC) Developer, check its value QnPH
gram exceeded the initial execution monitoring (time), and shorten the scan time.
QnPRH
time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC Change the initial execution monitoring time QnU
parameter. or the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of
the PLC parameter.
 Collateral information
Resolve the endless loop caused by jump
 Common Information: Time (value set) transition.
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
WDT ERROR Since power-off of the standby system OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
5000 The power supply of the standby system is increases the control system scan time, reset
turned OFF. the WDT value, taking the increase of the con-
The tracking cable is disconnected or con- trol system scan time into consideration.
nected without turning off or resetting the When the tracking cable is disconnected dur-
standby system. ing operation, securely connect it and restart
The tracking cable is not secured by the con- the CPU module. If the same error is dis-
nector fixing screws. played again, the tracking cable or CPU mod-
ule has a hardware fault.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
WDT ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop )
The scan time of the program exceeded the WDT from GX (IEC) Developer, check its value
value specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC (time), and shorten the scan time.
parameter. Change the initial execution monitoring time
 Collateral information or the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of
the PLC parameter.
 Common Information: Time (value set)
Resolve the endless loop caused by jump
 Individual Information: Time (value actually transition.
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
WDT ERROR Since power-off of the standby system OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
5001 The power supply of the standby system is increases the control system scan time, reset
turned OFF. the WDT value, taking the increase of the con-
The tracking cable is disconnected or con- trol system scan time into consideration.
nected without turning off or resetting the When the tracking cable is disconnected dur-
standby system. ing operation, securely connect it and restart
The tracking cable is not secured by the con- the CPU module. If the same error is dis-
nector fixing screws. played again, the tracking cable or CPU mod-
ule has a hardware fault.
 Collateral information Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-7: Error code list (5000 to 5999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 83

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
PRG. TIME OVER Review the constant scan setting time. ON ON Continue Qn(H)
The program scan time exceeded the constant Review the constant scan setting time and QnPH
scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS set- low speed program execution time in the PLC QnPRH
ting of the PLC parameter. parameter so that the excess time of constant
scan can be fully secured. QnU
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
PRG. TIME OVER Qn(H)
The low speed program execution time specified QnPH
in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter QnPRH
exceeded the excess time of the constant scan.
 Collateral information
5010
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
PRG. TIME OVER Review the constant scan setting time in the Q00J/Q00/Q01
The program scan time exceeded the constant PLC parameter so that the excess time of con-
scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS set- stant scan can be fully secured.
ting of the PLC parameter.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
PRG. TIME OVER Read the individual information of the error ON ON Continue Qn(H)
The scan time of the low speed execution type using GX (IEC) Developer, check the numeri- QnPH
program exceeded the low speed execution cal value (time) there, and shorten scan time
watch time specified in the PLC RAS setting of if necessary.
the PLC parameter dialog box. Change the low speed execution watch time in
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter
5011  Collateral information dialog box.
 Common Information: Time (value set)
 Individual Information: Time (value actually
measured)
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-7: Error code list (5000 to 5999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 84
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3.6 Error code list (6000 to 6999)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
FILE DIFF. Match the programs and parameters of the OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the control system and control system and standby system.
standby system do not have the same programs Verify the systems by either of the following
and parameters. procedures 1), 2) to clarify the differences
The file type detected as different between the between the files of the two systems, then
two systems can be checked by the file name of correct a wrong file, and execute "Write to
PLC" again.
the error common information.
1) After reading the programs/parameters of
System A using GX (IEC) Developer or PX
The program is different. Developer, verify them with those of Sys-
(File name = ********.QPG) tem B.
The PLC parameters/network parameters/ 2) Verify the programs/parameters of GX
redundant parameters are different. (IEC) Developer or PX Developer saved in
(File name = PARAM.QPA) the offline environment with those written
The remote password is different. to the CPU modules of both systems.
(File name = PARAM.QPA) When the capacity of each write destination
The intelligent function module parameters within the CPU for online change of multiple
are different. program blocks is different between the two
6000 (File name = IPARAM.QPA) systems, take corrective action 1) or 2).
The device initial values are different. 1) Using the memory copy from control sys-
(File name = ********.QDI) tem to standby system, copy the program
The capacity of each write destination within memory from the control system to the
the CPU for online pchange of multiple pro- standby system.
gram blocks is different. 2) Format the CPU module program memo-
(File name = MBOC.QMB) ries of both systems. (For the capacity of each
(This can be detected from the standby sys- write destination within the CPU for online
tem of the redundant system.) change of multiple program blocks, set the
same value to both systems.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: File name
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/At changing to backup mode/At completion
of write during RUN/At Switching execution/At
switching both systems into RUN
FILE DIFF. Match the valid parameter drive settings (SW2, OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the valid parameter drive SW3) by the DIP switches of the control system
settings (SW2, SW3) made by the DIP switches and standby system.
are not the same.
 Collateral information
6001  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/At operation mode change
OPE. MODE DIFF. Synchronise the operation statuses of the con- ON ON Continue QnPRH
The operational status of the control system and trol system and standby system.
standby system in the redundant system is not
the same.
(This can be detected from the standby system
6010 of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
OPE. MODE DIFF. Set the RUN/STOP switches of the control sys- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
At power ON/reset, the RUN/STOP switch set- tem and standby system to the same setting.
tings of the control system and standby system
are not the same in a redundant system. (This
can be detected from the control system or
6020 standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 85

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
UNIT LAY. DIFF. Match the module configurations of the con- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the module configura- trol system and standby system.
tion differs between the control system and In the redundant setting of the network
standby system. parameter dialog box, match the mode setting
The network module mode setting differs of System B to that of System A.
between the two systems.
(This can be detected from the control system or
6030 standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/At operation mode change
UNIT LAY. DIFF. Match the model names of the control system OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the CPU module model and standby system.
name differs between the control system and
standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby system
of the redundant system.)
6035  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/At operation mode change
UNIT LAY. DIFF. Check the network cables of the MELSECNET/H OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A difference in the remote I/O configuration of multiplexed remote I/O network for disconnec-
the MELSECNET/H multiplexed remote I/O net- tion.
work between the control system and standby
system of a redundant system was detected.
(This can be detected from the control system or
6036 standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
CARD TYPE DIFF. Match the memory card installation statuses OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the memory card instal- (installed/not installed) of the control system and
lation status (installed/not installed) differs standby system.
between the control system and standby system.
6040  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
CARD TYPE DIFF. Match the memory card types of the control sys- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the memory card type tem and standby system.
differs between the control system and standby
system.
6041  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
CAN'T EXE. MODE. Execute the function in the debug mode or oper- ON ON Continue QnPRH
The function inexecutable in the debug mode or ation mode (backup/separate mode).
operation mode (backup/separate mode) was
executed.
(This can be detected from the control system or
6050 standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 86
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CPU MODE DIFF. Match the operation modes of the control sys- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the operation mode tem and standby system.
(backup/separate) differs between the control
system and standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby system
of the redundant system.)
6060  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/
CPU MODE DIFF. Match the operation modes of the control sys- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
In a redundant system, the operation mode tem and standby system.
(backup/separate) differs between the control
system and standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby system
6061 of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
CPU MODE DIFF. Power the CPU module (System B) which OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
Both System A and B are in the same system sta- resulted in a stop error, OFF and then ON.
tus (control system).
(This can be detected from the system B of the
redundant system.)
6062  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
in tracking data transmission. module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
6100 followed.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Tracking transmission
data classification
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A timeout error occurred in tracking (data the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
transmission). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
6101
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Tracking transmission
data classification
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 87

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
reception). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This can be detected from the control system or Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
standby system of the redundant system.) Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
6102 dure, and execute a startup again.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A data error (other than sum value error) the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
occurred in tracking (data reception). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
6103 followed.
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
in tracking (data transmission). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
6105 (This can be detected from the control system
or standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Tracking transmission
data classification
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A timeout error occurred in tracking (data the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
transmission). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
6106
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Tracking transmission
data classification
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
reception). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This can be detected from the control system or Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
standby system of the redundant system.) Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
6107 dure, and execute a startup again.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 88
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
TRK. TRANS. ERR. Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If ON ON Continue QnPRH
A data error (other than sum value error) the error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
occurred in tracking (data reception). module or tracking cable is faulty.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
removal or other system power-off (including Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
reset).) dure, and execute a startup again.
The error occurred at a startup since the
redundant system startup procedure was not
6108 followed.
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK. SIZE ERROR Reexamine the tracking capacity. ON ON Continue QnPRH
The tracking capacity exceeded the allowed
range.
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
6110  Collateral information
 Common Information: Tracking capacity
excess error factor
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
TRK. SIZE ERROR Switch to the file registers of which capacity is ON ON Continue QnPRH
The control system does not have enough file greater than the file registers specified in the
register capacity for the file registers specified in tracking settings.
the tracking settings.
(This can be detected from the control system or
6111 standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
TRK. SIZE ERROR Switch to the file registers of which capacity is ON ON Continue QnPRH
File registers greater than those of the standby greater than the file registers specified in the
system were tracked and transmitted from the tracking settings.
control system.
(This can be detected from the standby system
6112 of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
When an END instruction executed
TRK. CABLE ERR. Make a start after connecting the tracking cable. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
A start was made without the tracking cable If the same error still occurs, this indicates the
being connected. tracking cable or CPU module side tracking
A start was made with the tracking cable transmission hardware is faulty.
faulty. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
As the tracking hardware on the CPU module
side was faulty, communication with the other
system could not be made via the tracking
6120 cable.
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 89

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
TRK. DISCONNECT If the tracking cable was removed, connect ON ON Continue QnPRH
The tracking cable was removed. the tracking cable to the connectors of the
The tracking cable became faulty while the CPU modules of the two systems.
CPU module is running. When the error is not resolved after connect-
The CPU module side tracking hardware ing the tracking cable to the connectors of the
became faulty. CPU modules of the two systems and reset-
ting the error, the tracking cable or CPU mod-
6130 (This can be detected from the control system or ule side tracking hardware is faulty.
standby system of the redundant system.) Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
TRK.INIT. ERROR Power the corresponding CPU module OFF OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The other system did not respond during ini- and then ON again, or reset it and then unre-
tial communication at power ON/reset. set. If the same error still occurs, this indi-
The error occurred at a startup since the cates the CPU module is faulty.
redundant system startup procedure was not Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
followed. Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
(This can be detected from the control system or dure, and execute a startup again.
6140
standby system of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
CONTROL EXE. ON OFF No error QnPRH
The standby system has been switched to the
control system in a redundant system. (Detected
by the CPU that was switched from the standby
system to the control system). Since this error
code does not indicate the error information of
the CPU module but indicates its status, the
error code and error information are not stored
into SD0 to SD26, but are stored into the error
6200 log every system switching. (Check the error
information by reading the error log using GX
(IEC) Developer.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Reason(s) for system
switching
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
STANDBY ON OFF No error QnPRH
The control system has been switched to the
standby system in a redundant system.
(Detected by the CPU that was switched from the
standby system to the control system). Since
this error code does not indicate the error infor-
mation of the CPU module but indicates its sta-
tus, the error code and error information are not
stored into SD0 to SD26, but are stored into the
6210 error log every system switching. (Check the
error information by reading the error log using
GX (IEC) Developer.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Reason(s) for system
switching
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 90
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CAN'T SWITCH Check the status of the standby system and ON ON No error QnPRH
System switching cannot be executed due to resolve the error.
standby system error/ tracking cable error/ Complete the online module change.
online module change in execution at separate
mode.
Causes for switching system at control system
are as follows:
System switching by SP. CONTSW instruction
6220 System switching request from network mod-
ule
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Reason(s) for system
switching
 Individual Information: Reason(s) for system
switching failure
 Diagnostic Timing
At switching execution
STANDBY SYS. DOWN Check whether the standby system is on or ON ON Continue QnPRH
Any of the following errors was detected in the not, and if it is not on, power it on.
backup mode. Check whether the standby system has been
The standby system has not started up in the reset or not, and if it has been reset, unreset
redundant system. it.
The standby system has developed a stop Check whether the standby system has devel-
error in the redundant system. oped a stop error or not, and if it has devel-
The CPU module in the debug mode was con- oped the error, remove the error factor and
6300 nected to the operating control system. restart it.
(This can be detected from the control system of When the CPU module in the debug mode
was connected to the control system operat-
the redundant system.) ing in the backup mode, make connection so
 Collateral information that the control system and standby system
 Common Information: are combined correctly.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
CONTROL SYS. DOWN The standby system exists but the control OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
Any of the following errors was detected in the system does not exist.
backup mode. Check whether the system other than the
The control system has not started up in the standby system is on or not, and if it is not
redundant system. on, power it on.
The control system has developed a stop Check whether the system other than the
error in the redundant system. standby system has been reset or not, and if it
The CPU module in the debug mode was con- is has been reset, unreset it.
nected to the operating standby system. Check whether the system other than the
The error occurred at a startup since the standby system has developed a stop error or
6310 not, and if has developed the error, remove
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed. the error factor, set the control system and
standby system to the same operating status,
(This can be detected from the standby system and restart.
of the redundant system.) When the CPU module in the debug mode
 Collateral information was connected to the control system operat-
 Common Information: ing in the backup mode, make connection so
 Individual Information: that the control system and control system
are combined correctly.
 Diagnostic Timing Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
Always dure, and execute a startup again.
6311 CONTROL SYS. DOWN Replace the tracking cable. OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
As consistency check data have not been If the same error still occurs, this indicates
transmitted from the control system in a the CPU module is faulty.
redundant system, the other system cannot Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
start as a standby system. Confirm the redundant system startup proce-
The error occurred at a startup since the dure, and execute a startup again.
redundant system startup procedure was not
followed.
6312 (This can be detected from the standby system
of the redundant system.)
 Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 91

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CONTROL SYS. DOWN Restart the system after checking that the con- OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The control system detected the error of the sys- nection between base unit and the system con-
tem configuration and informed the standby sys- figuration (type/number/parameter of module)
tem (host system) in the redundant system. are correct.
6313  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
PRG. MEM. CLEAR After the memory copy from control system to OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The memory copy from control system to standby system is completed, switch power OFF
standby system was executed, and the program and then ON, or make a reset.
memory was cleared.
 Collateral information
6400  Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At execution of the memory copy from control
system to standby system
MEM.COPY EXE] After the memory copy from control system to ON ON Continue QnPRH
The memory copy from control system to standby system is completed, switch power OFF
standby system was executed. and then ON, or make a reset.
(This can be detected from the control system of
the redundant system.)
6410  Collateral information
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At execution of the memory copy from control
system to standby system
TRK. PARA. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The file register file specified in the tracking set- using GX (IEC) Developer, and check and correct
ting of the PLC parameter dialog box does not the drive name and file name.
exist. Create the specified file.
6500  Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
TRK. PARA. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop QnPRH
The file register range specified in the device using GX (IEC) Developer, and increase the file
detail setting of the tracking setting of the PLC register capacity.
parameter dialog box exceeded the specified file
register file capacity.
6501  Collateral information
 Common Information: File name/Drive name
 Individual Information: Parameter No.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset

Tab. 11-8: Error code list (6000 to 6999) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 92
Error code list Troubleshooting

11.3.7 Error code list (7000 to 10000)

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MULT CPU DOWN Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In the operating mode of a multiple CPU sys- using GX (IEC) Developer, identify the error of (Function
tem, a CPU error occurred at the CPU where the CPU module, and remove the error. version is B or
"All station stop by stop error of CPU " was Remove the CPU module incompatible with later)
selected. the multiple CPU system from the main base Qn(H)
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module unit. (Function
incompatible with the multiple CPU system Check the mounting status of CPU modules version is B or
was mounted. other than CPU No.1 and whether the CPU later)
CPU modules other than CPU No.1 were modules were reset. QnPH
removed from the base unit in operation, or
reset. QnU (except
Q00UJCPU)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
7000  Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always
MULT CPU DOWN Read the individual information of the error
In a multiple CPU system, CPU other than CPU using GX (IEC) Developer, identify the error of
No.1 cannot be started up due to stop error of the CPU module, and remove the error.
the CPU No.1 at power-on, which occurs to CPU
No.2 to No.4.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
MULT CPU DOWN Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
There is no response from the target CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests (Function
module in a multiple CPU system during ini- the hardware fault of any of the CPU modules. version is B or
tial communication. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.) later)
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module Remove the CPU module incompatible with Qn(H)
incompatible with the multiple CPU system the multiple CPU system from the main base (Function
was mounted. unit. version is B or
Or, replace the CPU module incompatible with
 Collateral information the multiple CPU system with the compatible
later)
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) one. QnPH
 Individual Information:
7002  Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULT CPU DOWN Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the QnU (except
There is no response from the target CPU mod- same error is displayed again, this suggests the Q00UJCPU)
ule in a multiple CPU system during initial com- hardware fault of any of the CPU modules.
munication. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULT CPU DOWN Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
There is no response from the target CPU same error is displayed again, this suggests the (Function
module in a multiple CPU system at initial com- hardware fault of any of the CPU modules. version is B or
munication stage. Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. later)
7003  Collateral information Qn(H)
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) (Function
version is B or
 Individual Information: later)
 Diagnostic Timing QnPH
At power ON/ At reset
MULT CPU DOWN Check the system configuration to see if mod- OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, a data error occurred ules are mounted in excess of the number of (Function
in communication between the CPU modules. I/O points. version is B or
 Collateral information When there are no problems in the system later)
7004 configuration, this indicates the CPU module Qn(H)
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) hardware is faulty. (Function
 Individual Information: Contact your local Mitsubishi representative. version is B or
 Diagnostic Timing later)
Always

Tab. 11-9: Error code list (7000 to 10000) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 93

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MULTI EXE. ERROR Read the individual information of the error OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
In a multiple CPU system, a faulty CPU mod- using GX (IEC) Developer, and replace the (Function
ule was mounted. faulty CPU module. version is B or
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module Replace the CPU module with the one com- later)
incompatible with the multiple CPU system patible with the multiple CPU system. Qn(H)
was mounted. (The CPU module compatible Do not reset any of the No. 2 to 4 CPU mod- (Function
with the multiple CPU system was used to ules. version is B or
detect an error.) Reset CPU No. 1 and restart the multiple CPU later)
In a multiple CPU system, any of the CPU No. system. QnPH
2 to 4 was reset with power ON. (The CPU
whose reset state was cancelled was used to QnU (except
detect an error.) Q00UJCPU)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI EXE. ERROR Change the version of the PC CPU module-com- Q00/Q01
The PC CPU module-compatible software pack- patible software package (PPC-DRV-01) to 1.07 (Function
age (PPC-DRV-01) whose version is 1.06 or ear- or later. version is B or
lier is used in a multiple CPU system. later)
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
7010  Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI EXE. ERROR Replace the Q172(H)CPU(N) and Qn(H) (first 5
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is Q173(H)CPU(N) with the Motion CPU compati- digits of serial
mounted on the multiple CPU high-speed main ble with the multiple CPU high-speed main base No. is 09082 or
base unit (Q3DB). unit. later)
(This may result in a module failure.) QnPH (first 5
 Collateral information digits of serial
No. is 09082 or
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) later)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI EXE. ERROR Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can be Qn(H) (first 5
The Universal model QCPU (except Q02UCPU) used in a multiple CPU system, and change the digits of serial
and Q172(H)CPU(N) are mounted on the same system configuration. No. is 09082 or
base unit. later)
(This may result in a module failure.) QnPH (first 5
 Collateral information digits of serial
No. is 09082 or
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
later)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI EXE. ERROR Correct the settings. OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
Either of the following settings was made in a (Function
multiple CPU system. version is B or
Multiple CPU automatic refresh setting was later)
made for the inapplicable CPU module. QnU (except
"I/O sharing when using multiple CPUs" set- Q00UJCPU)
7011 ting was made for the inapplicable CPU mod-
ule.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-9: Error code list (7000 to 10000) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 94
Error code list Troubleshooting

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
MULTI EXE. ERROR Change the system configuration to meet the OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The system configuration for using the Multiple conditions for using the Multiple CPU high Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
CPU high speed transmission function is not speed transmission function. Q01U- and
met. Set the send range of CPU, that does not cor- Q02UCPU)
The QnUCPU is not used for the CPU No.1. respond to multiple CPU compatible area, at 0
point, when performing automatic refreshing
The Multiple CPU high speed main base unit in multiple CPU compatible area.
Q3BD is not used.
Points other than 0 is set to the send range
for the CPU module incompatible with the
7011 multiple CPU high speed transmission func-
tion.
Points other than 0 is set to the send range
for the CPU module incompatible with the
multiple CPU.
 Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI EXE. ERROR Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can be OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is used in a multiple CPU system, and change
mounted to the CPU slot or slots 0 to 2. the system configuration.
(The module may break down.) Remove the Motion CPU incompatible with
 Collateral information the multiple CPU system.
7013
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
MULTI CPU ERROR Read the individual information of the error ON ON Continue Q00/Q01
In the operating mode of a multiple CPU system, using GX (IEC) Developer, check the error of the (Function
an error occurred in the CPU where "system CPU module resulting in CPU module fault, and version is B or
stop" was not selected. remove the error. later)
(The CPU module where no error occurred was Qn(H)
used to detect an error.) (Function
7020
 Collateral information version is B or
later)
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
QnPH
 Individual Information:
QnU (except
 Diagnostic Timing Q00UJCPU)
Always
CPU LAY. ERROR Set the same value to the number of CPU OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
An assignment error occurred in the CPU-moun- modules specified in the multiple CPU setting (Function
table slot (CPU slot, I/O slot 0, 1) in excess of the of the PLC parameter dialog box and the version is B or
number of CPU modules specified in the multiple number of mounted CPU modules (including later)
CPU (empty)). QnU
CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
7030 Make the type specified in the I/O assignment
 Collateral information setting of the PLC parameter dialog box con-
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) sistent with the CPU module configuration.
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
CPU LAY. ERROR Set the same value to the number of CPU OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
An assignment error occurred within the range modules specified in the multiple CPU setting (Function
of the number of CPUs specified in the multiple of the PLC parameter dialog box and the version is B or
CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box. number of mounted CPU modules (including later)
CPU (empty)).
7031  Collateral information QnU
Make the type specified in the I/O assignment
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) setting of the PLC parameter dialog box con-
 Individual Information: sistent with the CPU module configuration.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
CPU LAY. ERROR Configure a system so that the number of OFF Flicker Stop Q00/Q01
The number of CPU modules mounted in a mul- mountable modules of each CPU module does (Function
tiple CPU system is wrong. not exceed the maximum number of mountable version is B or
 Collateral information modules specified in the specification. later)
7032  Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) QnU (except
Q00UJCPU)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset

Tab. 11-9: Error code list (7000 to 10000) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 95

Troubleshooting Error code list

LED status Corre-

Error Error contents and cause Corrective action CPU sponding
code RUN ERR. status
CPU
CPU LAY. ERROR Mount the CPU module on the applicable slot. OFF Flicker Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
The CPU module has been mounted on the (Function
inapplicable slot. version is B or
 Collateral information later)
7035  Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.) QnPRH
 Individual Information: QnU
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
CPU LAY. ERROR Mount the mounting slot of the CPU module OFF Flicker Stop QnU (except
The host CPU No. set by the multiple CPU setting correctly. Q00UJ-, Q00U-,
and the host CPU No. determined by the moun- Correct the host CPU No. set by the multiple Q01U- and
ting position of the CPU module are not the CPU setting to the CPU No. determined by the Q02UCPU)
same. mounting position of the CPU module.
7036  Collateral information
 Common Information: Module No. (CPU No.)
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset
INCORRECT FILE Write the file shown as SD17 to SD22 of individ- OFF Flicker Stop QnU
The error of stored file (enabled parameter file) is ual information to the drive shown as SD16(L) of
detected. individual information, and turn ON from OFF the
 Collateral information power supply of the CPU module or cancel the
 Common Information: reset.
8031
 Individual Information: File diagnostic infor- If the same error is displayed again, this indi-
mation cates the CPU module hardware is faulty.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/ At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to programmable controller
F**** Read the individual information of the error ON ON/OFF Continue )
Annunciator (F) was set ON. using GX (IEC) Developer, and check the pro- USER
 Collateral information gram corresponding to the numerical value LED:
9000  Common Information: Program error location (annunciator number). ON
 Individual Information: Annunciator number
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
<CHK> ERR ***_*** Read the individual information of the error ON OFF Continue Qn(H)
Error detected by the CHK instruction. using GX (IEC) Developer, and check the pro- USER QnPH
 Collateral information gram corresponding to the numerical value LED: QnPRH
9010  Common Information: Program error location (error number). ON
 Individual Information: Error number
 Diagnostic Timing
When instruction executed
BOOT OK Use the DIP switches to set the valid parameter OFF Flicker Stop Qn(H)
Storage of data onto ROM was completed nor- drive to the standard ROM. Then, switch power (Function
mally in automatic write to standard ROM. on again, and perform boot operation from the version is B or
(BOOT LED also flickers.) standard ROM. later)
9020  Collateral information QnPH
 Common Information: QnPRH
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
At power ON/At reset
CONT.UNIT ERROR Check the details of the generated error by con- OFF Flicker Continue Qn(H)
In the multiple CPU system, an error occurred in necting to the corresponding CPU module. (Function
the CPU module other than the Process CPU/ version is B or
High performance model QCPU. later)
10000  Collateral information QnPH
 Common Information:
 Individual Information:
 Diagnostic Timing
Always

Tab. 11-9: Error code list (7000 to 10000) for PLC CPUs of MELSEC System Q

11 96
I/O circuit troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11.4 I/O circuit troubleshooting

11.4.1 Input circuit troubleshooting

Exam-
Condition Cause Corrective action
ple
1 Input signal is not Leakage current of input switch Connect an appropriate CR so that the
turned off. (e.g. drive by non-contact switch). voltage across the terminals of the input
module becomes lower than the off volt-
age.
AC input AC input

C Input
Leakage current Input module
module

Power supply It is recommended to use 0.1 to 47 F

+47 to 120 (1/2 W) for the CR con-
stant.
2 Input signal is not Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp.  Same as Example 1 or
turned off.  Provide an independent display cir-
cuit separately.
AC input

Input
Leakage current module

Power supply

3 Input signal is not Leakage current due to line capacity Same as Example 1.
turned off. of wiring cable. (However, leakage current is not gener-
(Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is ated when the power supply is located
approx. 100 pF/m). in the input equipment side as shown
below.)

AC input
AC input
Input
module
Leakage Input
current module

Power supply
Power supply

4 Input signal is not Drive by a switch with LED display. Connect an appropriate resistor so that
turned off. the current across the input module
becomes lower than the off current.

DC input DC input

Input R Input
Leakage current module
module

* A calculation example of the resist-

ance to be connected is shown on the
following page.

Tab. 11-1: Input circuit troubleshooting

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 97

Troubleshooting I/O circuit troubleshooting

Exam- Condition Cause Corrective action

ple
5 Input signal is not Sneak path due to the use of two Use only one power supply.
turned off. power supplies. Connect a sneak path prevention diode.

Input
module

U1 U2
Input
module

U1 U2

U1 > U2

6 Input signal is not Stepwise distortion as shown below Improve input signal waveform by using
turned on (AC input appears to the zero cross voltage of the online system etc.
module) input signal (AC).

Zero cross
voltage

7 False input due to Depending on response time setting, Change the response time setting.
noise noise is imported as input. Example: 1 ms to 5 ms

Tab. 11-1: Input circuit troubleshooting

11 98
I/O circuit troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Calculation example of the resistance to be connected in Example 4

Connecting a switch with LED display, in which a maximum 4.0 mA leakage current flows when
24 V DC is supplied to the QX80.

QX80

Leakage current 4.0 mA Input module

3.6 k 24 V DC

QH00045C

Fig. 0-1: Signal input switch to module input

In this case, the circuit does not satisfy the condition that the off current of the QX80 is 1.7 mA
or less. Connect a resistance as follows.

QX80
I = 4 mA

Input
IR = 2.3 mA R IZ = 1.7 mA impedance
Z = 5.6 k

3.6 k
24 V DC

QH00045C

Fig. 0-2: Resistor R parallel to input

The current flowing through the resistor R must be minimum 2.3 mA.
IR = I IZ = 4 mA 1.7 mA = 2.3 mA
The ratio of the resistors is equivalent to the reverse ratio of the currents:
IR / IZ = Z / R
The result for resistor R is:
R = (IZ / IR) x Z = (1.7 mA / 2.3 mA) x 5.6 k = 4.14 k
The nearest resistor value of the E12 resistor series is 3.9 k . The electric power W of the resist-
ance R can be calculated by the following formula:
W = (Input voltage)2 / R = 28.82 V / 3.9 k = 0.2 W
The power dissipation of the resistor should be for safety reasons 3 to 5 times higher, as the real
value.
Therefore select a resistor 3.9 k / 1 W for this example.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 99

Troubleshooting I/O circuit troubleshooting

11.4.2 Output circuit troubleshooting

Exam- Condition Cause Corrective action

ple
1 When the external Erroneous output due to the stray capacitance (C) When turning on or off the external
power supply turns between collector and emitter of photocoupler. power, check that the external power
on, the load is turned (An erroneous output may occur at high sensitivity load supply rising edge is 10 ms or more,
on for a moment. (such as solid state relay). and switch S to the primary side of
external power supply.
Output module, Combined module
Primary side Secondary side
Photocoupler
External power
supply
C S
Tr1 To PLC
IC Y0
If the external power supply should be
switched on the secondary side, the rise

L
time of the voltage should be extended
by RC-circuit to minimum 10 ms.
Sink output

12/24VDC 
Constant S
voltage cir-
cuit COM
24 V Load

If the external power supply is turned on precipitously, IC

current flows to the next stage of transistor Tr1 gate and Y0 
output turns on by 100 s. 






Switch S ON
(External power supply at
On) Source output

10 ms 

Load

Output Y0

 



approx. 100 s 


Calculation of the components:

R1: Several tens of Ohms;
Power capacity
= (external power supply current)2
x R1 x (3 to 5)
C1:
Several hundreds of microfarads, 50 V
Example: R1= 40 , C1 = 300 F

Use the below expression to calculate a

time constant:
T = C1 x R1 = 300 x 10-6 x 40
= 12 x 10-3 = 12 ms

Measures will not be effective to the

Output module QY81P due to the char-
acterictic of external power supply cir-
cuit.

Tab. 11-1: Output circuit troubleshooting

11 100
I/O circuit troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Exam- Condition Cause Corrective action

ple
2 The load which was The load [2] which was turned OFF may be turned ON due Take either of the following measure:
turned off is turned on to back electromotive force at the time of power-off if an  To prevent the generation of the back
for a moment at inductive load [1] is used. electromotive force, connect diode in
power-off. parallel with load where the back
electromotive force has been gener-
Source output Back electromotive ated.
force
- + Source output

ON Y0 Load 1 Back electromotive force

Load

OFF Y1 Load 2

Shut off
Sink putput
COM Back electromotive force

0V
Load

Sink output Back electromotive  Connect diode between (+) and () of

force
+ - the external power supply so that a
sneak path circuit is porvided.
ON Y0 Load 1 Connect the diode to C1 and R1 in
parallel when example 1 is performed
simultaneously.
Source output
OFF Y1 Load 2
Back electromotive force
- +
Shut off ON Y0 Load 1

COM
OFF Y1 Load 2
12/24VDC
Shut off

COM D1
C1 R1
0V
Example 1

* Measures will not be effective to the Output module

QY81P due to the characterictic of external power
supply circuit.

Sink output
Back electromotive force
Load 1 + -
ON Y0 Load 1

OFF Y1 Load 2
Shut off

COM D1
C1 R1
12/24VDC
Example 1

As for D1, choose a diode with following

specifications:
Reverse current:
Approx. 10 times the rated voltage
of the spec.
Forward current:
More than 2 times the Max. load
current (common) of the spec.

Tab. 11-1: Output circuit troubleshooting

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 11 101

Troubleshooting I/O circuit troubleshooting

Exam- Condition Cause Corrective action

ple
3 Excessive voltage is The load (e. g. magnetic valve) contains a rectifier for one Connect a resistor of several ten k to
applied to load when way (diode). The internal capacitor of the output module is several hundred k at both ends of the
output turns off. charged by this diode during one sine halfwave. The load.
(Triac output) resulting voltage at the diode during the other halfwave is
the voltage of the power supply plus the charged voltage of
the capacitor.
(This usage does not pose problems to the output compo-
nents but may deteriorate the diode built in the load, caus-
ing burnout, etc.)
4 Load does not turn Leakage current due to the built-in surge suppressor Connect a resistor at both ends of the
off. (Triac output) load. (If the wiring from the output mod-
ule to the load is long, be careful since
there may be a leakage current due to
the line capacity.)
5 Load does not turn The load current is lower than the minimum load current of Connect a resistor to both ends of a
off. (Triac output) the output module. load so that the load current is higher
than the minimum load current.

Tab. 11-1: Output circuit troubleshooting

11 102
General specifications Specifications

12 Specifications
12.1 General specifications

Item Specification
Operating ambient temperature 0 to +55 C
Storage ambient temperature 25 to +75 C
Ambient relative humidity 5 to 95 % (non-condensing)
(Operating and Storage)
Vibration resistance Under intermittent vibration
Sweep count
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude
Compliant 5 to 9 Hz 3.5 mm 10 times each
with in X, Y, Z
JIS B 3502 9 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s2 (1 g) directions
and
IEC61131-2 Under continuous vibration
5 to 9 Hz 1.75 mm
9 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2 (0.5 g)
Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC61131-2:
147 m/s2 (15 g), 3 times in each of 3 directions X, Y, Z
Operating ambience No corrosive gases etc.
Insulation resistance 10 M
Noise durability By noise simulator (peak value of noise voltage: 500 V ,
noise width: 1 s, noise frequency: 25 to 60 Hz)
Operating altitude 2000 m max.
Installation location Inside control panel
Overvoltage category II max.
Pollution level 2 max.
Cooling system Self cooling

Tab. 12-1: General specifications

 With the models QX10, QX10-TS, QX28, QY10, QY10-TS, QY18A and QY22 the peak value of the noise voltage
is 1500 V.
 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the
public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category II applies to equipment
for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated
voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which
the equipment is used. Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity
caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.

CAUTION:

P Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the
atmospheric pressure of altitude 0 m. Doing so can cause a malfunction.
When using the programmable controller under pressure, please contact your sales
representative.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 1

Specifications Hardware specifications of the CPU modules

12.2 Hardware specifications of the CPU modules

12.2.1 Basic model QCPU

Item Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU

Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 200 160 100
MOV: 700 560 350
No. of I/O points Usable on 2048 2048
program
Accessible to 256 1024
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 1 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 1 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 8k 8k 14 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.1and 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.1
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 3.2 to +5.27 s (Typ. +1.98 s)/d at 0 C
2.57 to +5.2 7 s (Typ. +2.22 s)/d at 25 C
11.68 to +3.65 s (Typ. -2.64 s)/d at 55 C
Allowable momentary power fail- 20 ms or less Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC) 0.26 A  0.25 A 0.27 A
Weight 0.66 kg 0.13 kg 0.13 kg

Tab. 12-2: Performance specifications of CPU types Q00J, Q00 and Q01

 Current consumption of base unit, power supply module and CPU module

12 2
Hardware specifications of the CPU modules Specifications

12.2.2 High performance model QCPU

Item Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H

Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 79 34
MOV: 237 102
No. of I/O points Usable on 8192
program
Accessible to 4096
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 0.5 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 28 k 28 k 60 k 124 k 252 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.1, 2.2.2 and 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.2
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 3.18 to +5.25 s (Typ. +2.12 s)/d at 0 C
3.93 to +5.2 5 s (Typ. +1.90 s)/d at 25 C
14.69 to +3.53 s (Typ. -3.67 s)/d at 55 C
Allowable momentary power fail- Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC) 0.6 A 0.64 A 0.64 A 0.64 A 0.64 A
Weight 0.20 kg

Tab. 12-3: Performance specifications of CPU types Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H and Q25H

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 3

Specifications Hardware specifications of the CPU modules

12.2.3 Universal model QCPU

Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU and Q03U(E)CPU

Q03U
Item Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02U
Q03UE 
Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 120 80 60 40 20
MOV: 240 160 120 80 40
No. of I/O points Usable on 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
program
Accessible to 256 1024 1024 2048 4096
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 0.5 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 10 k 10 k 15 k 20 k 30 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.3 and 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.3
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 2.96 to +3.74 s (Typ. +1.24 s)/d at 0 C 2.96 to +3.74 s/d at 0 C
2.34 to +3.74 s (Typ. +1.63 s)/d at 25 C (Typ. +1.42 s/d)
11.48 to +2.12 s (Typ. -3.67 s)/d at 55 C 3.18 to +3.74 s/d at 25 C
(Typ. +1.50 s/d)
13.20 to +2.12 s/d at 55 C
(Typ. -3.54 s/d)
Allowable momentary power fail- 20 ms or less Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC) 0.37 A  0.33 A 0.33 A 0.23 A Q03UCPU:
0.33 A
Q03UECPU:
0.46 A
Weight 0.70 kg 0.15 kg 0.15 kg 0.20 kg Q03UCPU:
0.20 kg
Q03UECPU:
0.22 kg

Tab. 12-4: Performance specifications of CPU types Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U and
Q03U(E)

 With built-in ETHERNET port

 Current consumption of base unit, power supply module and CPU module

12 4
Hardware specifications of the CPU modules Specifications

Q04UD(E)CPU to Q26UD(E)CPU*
Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH
Item
Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH
Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 9.5
MOV: 19
No. of I/O points Usable on 8192
program
Accessible to 4096
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 0.5 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 40 k 60 k 100 k 130 k 200 k 260 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.3 and 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.3
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 2.96 to +3.74 s (Typ. +1.42 s)/d at 0 C
3.18 to +3.74 s (Typ. +1.50 s)/d at 25 C
13.20 to +2.12 s (Typ. -3.54 s)/d at 55 C
Allowable momentary power fail- Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC)  Modules without integrated ETHERNET interface: 0.39 A
 Modules with integrated ETHERNET interface: 0.49 A
Weight  Modules without integrated ETHERNET interface: 0.20 kg
 Modules with integrated ETHERNET interface: 0.22 kg

Tab. 12-5: Performance specifications of CPU types Q04UD(E)H to Q26UD(E)H

* The universal model PLC CPU modules with an "E" in the model name are equipped with an Ethernet interface.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 5

Specifications Hardware specifications of the CPU modules

12.2.4 Process CPU

Item Q02PH Q06PH Q12PH Q25PH

Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 34
MOV: 102
No. of I/O points Usable on 8192
program
Accessible to 4096
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 0.5 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 28 k 60 k 124 k 252 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.4 to 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.4
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 3.18 to +5.25 s (Typ. +2.12 s)/d at 0 C
3.93 to +5.2 5 s (Typ. +1.90 s)/d at 25
14.69 to +3.53 s (Typ. -3.67 s)/d at 55 C
Allowable momentary power fail- Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC) 0.6 A 0.64 A 0.64 A 0.64 A
Weight 0.20 kg

Tab. 12-6: Performance specifications of CPU types Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH and Q25PH

12 6
Hardware specifications of the CPU modules Specifications

12.2.5 Redundant CPU

Item Q12PRH Q25PRH

Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode
Program language Ladder (LD), Instruction (IN), Sequential function chart (SFC), Function block
(FB), Structured text (ST)
Processing speed (sequence instruction) [ns/step]
LD: 34
MOV: 102
No. of I/O points Usable on 8192
program
Accessible to 4096
the actual I/O
module
Constant scan (Function for keep- 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting available in 0.5 ms unit.)
ing regular scan time)
Program memory
No. of program steps 124 k 252 k
(Drive 0)
Memory size refer to sections 2.2.5 and 4.2
Devices refer to section 4.1.5
Self diagnostic Plausibility of program, Watch Dog Timer (WDT monitor), battery monitor,
memory check, CPU check, line voltage monitor, fuse monitor, etc.
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X000 to 7FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE
Operation mode in case of error Stop or continue (set by parameters)
Output status after switching from The outputs keep their status at the time, when the CPU stops, or they are
STOP to RUN refreshed to the current process status with a delay time of one cycle.
Clock function
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week (Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: 3.2 to +5.27 s (Typ. +2.07 s)/d at 0 C
2.77 to +5.2 7 s (Typ. +2.22 s)/d at 25 C
12.14 to +3.65 s (Typ. -2.89 s)/d at 55 C
Allowable momentary power fail- Varies depending on the power supply module
ure time
Current consumption (5 V DC) 0.89 A
Weight 0.3 kg

Tab. 12-7: Performance specifications of CPU types Q12PRH and Q25PRH

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 7

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3 Input/output module specifications

12.3.1 Digital input module QX10

Item QX10
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 110120 V AC (+10/15 %), 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz), distortion within 5 %
Rated input current approx. 7 mA (at 100 V AC, 50 Hz); approx. 8 mA (at 100 V AC, 60 Hz)
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current max. 200 mA within 1 ms (at 132V AC)
ON voltage/ON current 80 V AC / 5 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
OFF voltage/OFF current 30 V AC / 1.7 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Input impedance approx. 15 k at 50 Hz, approx. 12 k at 60 Hz
OFF ON 15 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Response time
ON OFF 20 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 1780 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3 x 6 screws)
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 core (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 50 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg
Terminal
External Connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB1 LED
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB5 X04
TB6 X05
Internal TB7 X06
circuit TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB12 X0B
TB13 X0C
TB17
TB14 X0D
100120 V AC Input module TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-8: Input module QX10

Fig.12-1:
% QX10 Derating chart
100
90
ON ratio

80 120 V AC
70
60 132 V AC
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00032C

12 8
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.2 Digital input module QX10-TS

Item QX10-TS
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 110120 V AC (+10/15 %), 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz), distortion within 5 %
Rated input current approx. 7 mA (at 100 V AC, 50 Hz); approx. 8 mA (at 100 V AC, 60 Hz)
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current max. 200 mA within 1 ms (at 132V AC)
ON voltage/ON current 80 V AC / 5 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
OFF voltage/OFF current 30 V AC / 1 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Input impedance approx. 15 k at 50 Hz, approx. 12 k at 60 Hz
OFF ON 15 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Response time
ON OFF 20 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: 17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 1780 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size Core cable 0.3 to 2.0 mm2, (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 50 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
1 X00
2 X01
1 LED 3 X02
4 X03
5 X04
6 X05
Internal 7 X06
circuit 8 X07
9 X08
10 X09
16 11 X0A
12 X0B
17 13 X0C
14 X0D
100120 V AC Input module
15 X0E
16 X0F
17 COM
18 Vacant

Tab. 12-9: Input module QX10-TS

Fig.12-2:
% QX10-TS Derating chart
100
90
ON ratio

80 120 V AC
70
60 132 V AC
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00032C

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 9

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.3 Digital input module QX28

Item QX28
Number of input points 8
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 110240 V AC (+10/15 %), 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz), distortion within 5 %
Rated input current approx. 7 mA (at 100 V AC, 50 Hz); approx. 8 mA (at 100 V AC, 60 Hz)
approx. 14 mA (at 200 V AC, 50 Hz); approx. 17 mA (at 200 V AC, 60 Hz
Max. simultaneously ON refer to the derating chart
Inrush current max. 500 A within 1 ms (at 264 V AC)
ON voltage/ON current 80 V AC / 5 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
OFF voltage/OFF current 30 V AC / 1 mA (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Input impedance approx. 15 k at 50 Hz, approx. 12 k at 60 Hz
OFF ON 10 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Response time
ON OFF 20 ms (100 V AC, 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Groups of input 1; 8 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 1780 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6 screws)
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 core (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 50 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.2 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 Vacant
TB1 LED TB3 X01
TB4 Vacant
Internal
circuit

TB5 X02
TB6 Vacant
TB7 X03
TB8 Vacant
TB9 X04
TB10 Vacant
TB15 TB11 X05
TB12 Vacant
TB17 TB13 X06
TB14 Vacant
Input module
110 to 240 V AC TB15 X07
TB16 Vacant
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-10: Input module QX28

Fig.12-3:
% 100 % 45 C
100 % 55 C (240 V)
QX28 Derating chart
100
90 87.5 % 55 C (264 V)
ON ratio

80
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00034_UK

12 10
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.4 Digital input module QX40

Item QX40
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6 screws)
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 core (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 50 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB1 LED TB3 X02
TB4 X03
Internal
circuit

TB5 X04
TB6 X05
TB7 X06
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB12 X0B
TB17 TB13 X0C
Input module TB14 X0D
24 V DC
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-11: Input module QX40

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 11

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.5 Digital input module QX40-TS

Item QX40-TS
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: 17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 2.0 mm2, core (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 50 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
1 X00
2 X01
1 LED 3 X02
4 X03
Internal
circuit

5 X04
6 X05
7 X06
8 X07
9 X08
10 X09
16 11 X0A
12 X0B
+ 17 13 X0C
Input module 14 X0D
24 V DC
15 X0E
16 X0F
17 COM
18 Vacant

Tab. 12-12: Input module QX40-TS

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

12 12
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.6 Digital input module QX40-S1

Item QX40-S1
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 6 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 4 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 3.9 k
Set value 0.1 ms 0.2 ms 0.4 ms 0.6 ms 1 ms
OFF ON typ. 0.05 ms 0.15 ms 0.30 ms 0.55 ms 1.05 ms
Response
max. 0.10 ms 0.20 ms 0.40 ms 0.60 ms 1.20 ms
time
ON OFF typ. 0.15 ms 0.20 ms 0.35 ms 0.60 ms 1.10 ms
max. 0.2 ms 0.30 ms 0.50 ms 0.70 ms 1.30 ms
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6 screws)
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 core (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 60 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.20 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB1 LED TB3 X02
TB4 X03
Internal
circuit

TB5 X04
TB6 X05
TB7 X06
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB12 X0B
TB17 TB13 X0C
Input module TB14 X0D
24 V DC
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-13: Input module QX40-S1

 Response time setting by parameters. Initial setting: 0.2 ms

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 13

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.7 Digital input module QX41

Item QX41
Number of input points 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 32 points/common
(common terminal: B01, B02)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption 75 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.15 kg
External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal
B20 X00 A20 X10
B19 X01 A19 X11
B18 X02 A18 X12
B17 X03 A17 X13
B20 A20 B16 X04 A16 X14
B15 X05 A15 X15
B20
Internal

B14 X06 A14 X16

circuit

B13 X07 A13 X17

B12 X08 A12 X18
B11 X09 A11 X19
B10 X0A A10 X1A
B09 X0B A09 X1B
A05
B08 X0C A08 X1C
B02
B07 X0D A07 X1D
- + B01
B06 X0E A06 X1E
24 V DC
B05 X0F A05 X1F
B1 A1
B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
B02 COM A02 Vacant
Please note, that the connector is Pin-Outs B01 COM A01 Vacant
no D-sub type. (Module front view)

Tab. 12-14: Input module QX41

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

%
Fig.12-4:
100 QX41 Derating chart
90
ON ratio

80 28,8 V DC
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00033C

12 14
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.8 Digital input module QX41-S1

Item QX41-S1
Number of input points 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/-15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
Set value 0.1 ms 0.2 ms 0.4 ms 0.6 ms 1.0 ms
OFF ON typ. 0.05 ms 0.15 ms 0.30 ms 0.55 ms 1.05 ms
Response
max. 0.10 ms 0.20 ms 0.40 ms 0.60 ms 1.20 ms
time
ON OFF typ. 0.15 ms 0.20 ms 0.35 ms 0.60 ms 1.10 ms
max. 0.20 ms 0.30 ms 0, 50 ms 0.70 ms 1.30 ms
Groups of input 1; 32 points/common
(common terminal: B01, B02)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
Internal current consumption 75 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.15 kg
External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal
B20 X00 A20 X10
B19 X01 A19 X11
B18 X02 A18 X12
B17 X03 A17 X13
B20 A20 B16 X04 A16 X14
B15 X05 A15 X15
B20
Internal

B14 X06 A14 X16

circuit

B13 X07 A13 X17

B12 X08 A12 X18
B11 X09 A11 X19
B10 X0A A10 X1A
B09 X0B A09 X1B
A05
B08 X0C A08 X1C
B02
B07 X0D A07 X1D
- + B01
B06 X0E A06 X1E
24 V DC
B05 X0F A05 X1F
B1 A1
B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
B02 COM A02 Vacant
Please note, that the connector is no Pin-Outs B01 COM A01 Vacant
D-sub type. (Module front view)

Tab. 12-15: Input module QX41-S1

 Response time setting by parameters. Initial setting: 0.2 ms

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 15

Specifications Input/output module specifications

% Fig.12-5:
100 QX41-S1 Derating chart
90

ON ratio
80 28.8 V DC
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00033C_UK

12 16
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.9 Digital input module QX42

Item QX42
Number of input points 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/-15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 2; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 1B01/1B02 and 2B01/2B02)
Input status display One LED per input of a group, Groups are switchable
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption 90 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.18 kg
External connections

1B20
Internal
circuit

LED
F
L

1A05 Indication selector switch

Used to switch the LED
1B01 indications:
1B02 F: Inputs X00 to X1F
L: Inputs X20 to X3F
24 V DC
Input module

Tab. 12-16: Input module QX42

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

%
Fig.12-6:
100 QX42 Derating chart
90
ON ratio

80
70
24 V DC
60
50 26.4 V DC
40 28.8 V DC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00080C_UK

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 17

Specifications Input/output module specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
Pin-Outs 1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
(Module front view)
1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-17: Connector pin outs of the module QX42

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

12 18
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.10 Digital input module QX42-S1

Item QX42
Number of input points 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 9.5 V DC / 1.5 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
Set value 0.1 ms 0.2 ms 0.4 ms 0.6 ms 1 ms
OFF ON typ. 0.05 ms 0.15 ms 0.30 ms 0.55 ms 1.05 ms
Response
max. 0.10 ms 0.20 ms 0.40 ms 0.60 ms 1.20 ms
time
ON OFF typ. 0.15 ms 0.20 ms 0.35 ms 0.60 ms 1.10 ms
max. 0.2 ms 0.30 ms 0.50 ms 0.70 ms 1.30 ms
Groups of input 2; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 1B01/1B02 and 2B01/2B02)
Input status display One LED per input of a group, Groups are switchable
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
Internal current consumption 90 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.18 kg
External connections

LED
1B20
Internal
circuit

LED
F
L

1A05 Indication selector switch

Used to switch the LED
1B01 indications:
1B02 F: Inputs X00 to X1F
L: Inputs X20 to X3F
24 V DC
Input module

Tab. 12-18: Input module QX42-S1

 Response time setting by parameters. Initial setting: 0.2 ms

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 19

Specifications Input/output module specifications

% Fig.12-7:
100 QX42-S1 Derating chart
90

ON ratio
80
70
24 V DC
60
50 26.4 V DC
40 28.8 V DC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature

QH00080C_UK

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
(Module front view)
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-19: Connector pin outs of the module QX42-S1

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

12 20
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.11 Digital input module QX70

Item QX70
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 5 V and 12 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current at 5 V DC: approx. 1.2 mA
at 12 V DC: approx. 3.3 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 3.5 V DC / 1 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 1 V DC / 0.1 mA
Input impedance approx. 3.3 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6 screws)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 , (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 55 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.14 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer For open collector (positive common) TB2 X01
(positive common) connections connection TB3 X02
TB1 TB4 X03
TB1 LED TB5 X04
&
Internal

TB6 X05
circuit

TB7 X06
TB17 TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
For sensor (negative
common) connections TB11 X0A
TB12 X0B
TB1 TB13 X0C
TB14 X0D
TB17
Input module TB15 X0E
5/12 V DC TB16 X0F
TB17 TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-20: Input module QX70

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 21

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.12 Digital input module QX71

Item QX71
Number of input points 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 5 V and 12 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current at 5 V DC: approx. 1.2 mA
at 12 V DC: approx. 3.3 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 3.5 V DC / 1 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 1 V DC / 0.1 mA
Input impedance approx. 3.3 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 32 points/common
(common terminal: B01 and B02)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption 70 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.12 kg
External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal
B20 X00 A20 X10
For open collector (positive com- B19 X01 A19 X11
mon) connection B18 X02 A18 X12
B20 LED B17 X03 A17 X13
Internal
circuit

B20 A20
B16 X04 A16 X14
B15 X05 A15 X15
B14 X06 A14 X16
B13 X07 A13 X17
B12 X08 A12 X18
Input module
B11 X09 A11 X19
B02
5/12 V DC B01 B10 X0A A10 X1A
B09 X0B A09 X1B
For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer
(positive common) connections For sensor (negative B08 X0C A08 X1C
common) connections
B2 B07 X0D A07 X1D
B20 B06 X0E A06 X1E
& B1 A1
B05 X0F A05 X1F
B02 B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
B02
Pin-Outs
B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
(Module front view) B02 COM A02 Vacant
B01 COM A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-21: Input module QX71

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

NOTE The connector is no D-sub type.

12 22
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.13 Digital input module QX72

Item QX72
Number of input points 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 5 V and 12 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current at 5 V DC: approx. 1.2 mA
at 12 V DC: approx. 3.3 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 3.5 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 1 V DC / 0.1 mA
Input impedance approx. 3.3 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 2; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 1B01/1B02 and 2B01/2B02)
Input status display One LED per input of a group, Groups are switchable
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption 85 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.13 kg
External connections

For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer For open collector (positive

(positive common) connections common) connection
1B20
1B20
&
Internal
circuit

1B02
LED
F
For sensor (negative L
common) connections
Indication selector switch
1B20 Used to switch the LED
indications:
F: Inputs X00 to X1F
L: Inputs X20 to X3F
5/12 V DC 1B01
1B02 Input module
1B02

Tab. 12-22: Input module QX72

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 23

Specifications Input/output module specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
(Module front view)
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-23: Connector pin outs of the module QX72

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

12 24
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.14 Digital input module QX80

Item QX80
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 K
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB18)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6 screws)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 , (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 55 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB1 LED TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB5 X04
TB6 X05
TB7 X06
Internal TB8 X07
circuit TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB12 X0B
TB18 TB13 X0C
TB14 X0D
24 V DC Input module TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 Vacant
TB18 COM

Tab. 12-24: Input module QX80

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 25

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.15 Digital input module QX80-TS

Item QX80-TS
Number of input points 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON All inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 K
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: 18)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 2.0 mm2 (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 55 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg
Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
1 X00
2 X01
1 LED 3 X02
4 X03
5 X04
6 X05
7 X06
Internal 8 X07
circuit 9 X08
10 X09
16 11 X0A
12 X0B
+ 18 13 X0C
14 X0D
24 V DC Input module 15 X0E
16 X0F
17 Vacant
18 COM

Tab. 12-25: Input module QX80-TS

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

12 26
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.16 Digital input module QX81

Item QX81
Number of input points 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 K
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 17, 18, 36)
Input status display One LED per input
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 37-pin D-sub connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption (5 V 75 mA (all input points ON)
DC)
Weight 0.16 kg
External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 X00 9 X10
20 X01 28 X11
2 X02 10 X12
21 X03 29 X13
18
3 X04 11 X14
24 V DC 36 Input module
17 22 X05 30 X15
4 X06 12 X16
23 X07 31 X17
35
5 X08 13 X18
24 X09 32 X19
6 X0A 14 X1A
Internal
circuit 25 X0B 33 X1B
7 X0C 15 X1C
LED
26 X0D 34 X1D
8 X0E 16 X1E
1 27 X0F 35 X1F
17 COM 37 Vacant
36 COM 19 Vacant
18 COM

Tab. 12-26: Input module QX81

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

Fig.12-8:
%
100
QX81 Derating chart
90
ON ratio

80 28.8 V DC
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00033C_UK

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 27

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.17 Digital input module QX82

Item QX82
Number of input points 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 2; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 1B01/1B02 and 2B01/2B02)
Input status display One LED per input of a group, Groups are switchable
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
Internal current consumption 90 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.18 kg
External connections

1B20
Internal
circuit

F
L

1A05 Indication selector switch

Used to switch the LED
1B01 indications:
1B02 F: Inputs X00 to X1F
+ L: Inputs X20 to X3F
24 V DC
Input module

Tab. 12-27: Input module QX82

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

%
Fig.12-9:
100 QX82 Derating chart
90
ON ratio

80
70
24 V DC
60
50 26.4 V DC
40 28.8 V DC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature

QH00080C_UK

12 28
Input/output module specifications Specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs
(Module front view) 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-28: Connector pin outs of the module QX82

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 29

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.18 Digital input module QX82-S1

Item QX82-S1
Number of input points 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 9.5 V DC / 1.5 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
Response Setting 0.1 ms 0.2 ms 0.4 ms 0.6 ms 1 ms
time values
Groups of input 2; 32 points/common
(common terminal: 1B01/1B02 and 2B01/2B02)
Input status display One LED per input of a group, Groups are switchable
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
Internal current consumption 90 mA (all input points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.18 kg
External connections

1B20
Internal
circuit

LED
F
L

1A05 Indication selector switch

Used to switch the LED
1B01 indications:
1B02 F: Inputs X00 to X1F
+ L: Inputs X20 to X3F
24 V DC
Input module

Tab. 12-29: Input module QX82-S1

 Refer to the manual of this module for details of the response time.
 Response time setting by parameters. Initial setting: 0.2 ms

Fig.12-10:
% QX82-S1 Derating chart
100
90
ON ratio

80
70
24 V DC
60
50 26.4 V DC
40 28.8 V DC
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00080C_UK

12 30
Input/output module specifications Specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs
(Module front view) 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant

Tab. 12-30: Connector pin outs of the module QX82-S1

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 31

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.19 Relay output module QY10

Item QY10
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Relay
Rated switching voltage, current 24 V DC, 2 A (resistive load) per output, 220 V AC, 2 A (cos = 1) per output
8 A/group
Minimum switching load 5 V DC, 1 mA
Maximum switching load 264 V AC, 125 V DC
Response time OFF ON 10 ms
ON OFF 12 ms
Mechanical 20 million times or more
Rated switching voltage/current load; 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 1.5 A; 240 V AC, 1 A (cos = 0.7) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.4 A; 240 V AC, 0.3 A (cos = 0.7) 300 thousand times or more
Life
Electrical 200 V AC, 1 A; 240 V AC, 0.5 A (cos = 0.35) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.3 A; 240 V AC, 0.15 A (cos = 0.35) 300 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 1 A; 100 V DC, 0.1 A (L/R = 7 ms) 100 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 0.3 A; 100 V DC, 0.03 A (L/R = 7 ms) 300 thousand times or more
Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour
Surge suppressor
Fuse
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common
(common terminal: TB17)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 , (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 430 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.22 kg

Tab. 12-31: Relay output module QY10

Terminal block
External connections Signal
number
TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
LED TB1 TB4 Y03
TB5 Y04
Internal
circuit

TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB11 Y0A
TB16
TB12 Y0B
TB13 Y0C
TB17 TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
100 V AC
TB16 Y0F
TB17 COM
TB18 NC

Tab. 12-32: Relay output module QY10 connections

12 32
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.20 Relay output module QY10-TS

Item QY10-TS
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Relay
Rated switching voltage, current 24 V DC, 2 A (resistive load) per output, 220 V AC, 2 A (cos = 1) per output
8 A/group
Minimum switching load 5 V DC, 1 mA
Maximum switching load 264 V AC, 125 V DC
Response time OFF ON 10 ms
ON OFF 12 ms
Mechanical 20 million times or more
Rated switching voltage/current load; 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 1.5 A; 240 V AC, 1 A (cos = 0.7) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.4 A; 240 V AC, 0.3 A (cos = 0.7) 300 thousand times or more
Life
Electrical 200 V AC, 1 A; 240 V AC, 0.5 A (cos = 0.35) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.3 A; 240 V AC, 0.15 A (cos = 0.35) 300 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 1 A; 100 V DC, 0.1 A (L/R = 7 ms) 100 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 0.3 A; 100 V DC, 0.03 A (L/R = 7 ms) 300 thousand times or more
Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour
Surge suppressor
Fuse
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common,
(common terminal: 17)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 2.0 mm2 (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 430 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.22 kg

Tab. 12-33: Relay output module QY10-TS

Terminal block
External connections Signal
number
1 Y00
2 Y01
3 Y02
LED 1 4 Y03
5 Y04
Internal
circuit

6 Y05
7 Y06
8 Y07
9 Y08
10 Y09
11 Y0A
16
12 Y0B
13 Y0C
17 T4 Y0D
15 Y0E
100 V AC
16 Y0F
17 COM
18 NC

Tab. 12-34: Relay output module QY10-TS connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 33

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.21 Relay output module QY18A

Item QY18A
Number of outputs 8
Isolation method Relay
24 V DC, 2 A (resistive load) per output,
Rated switching voltage, current
220 V AC, 2 A (cos = 1) per output
Minimum switching load 5 V DC, 1 mA
Maximum switching load 264 V AC, 125 V DC
OFF ON 10 ms
Response time
ON OFF 12 ms
Mechanical 20 million times or more
Rated switching voltage/current load; 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 1.5 A; 240 V AC, 1 A (cos = 0.7) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.4 A; 240 V AC, 0.3 A (cos = 0.7) 300 thousand times or more
Life
Electrical 200 V AC, 1 A; 240 V AC, 0.5 A (cos = 0.35) 100 thousand times or more
200 V AC, 0.3 A; 240 V AC, 0.15 A (cos = 0.35) 300 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 1 A; 100 V DC, 0.1 A (L/R = 7 ms) 100 thousand times or more
24 V DC, 0.3 A; 100 V DC, 0.03 A (L/R = 7 ms) 300 thousand times or more
Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour
Surge suppressor
Fuse
Groups of outputs 8; 1 point/common (all independent)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption (5 V
430 mA (all output points ON)
DC)
Weight 0.22 kg

Tab. 12-35: Relay output module QY18A

Terminal block
External connections Signal
number
TB1 Y00
TB2
TB3 Y01
LED TB1 TB4
TB5 Y02
Internal
circuit

TB6
TB2
TB7 Y03
24 V DV TB8
240 V AC
TB9 Y04
TB10
TB15 TB11 Y05
TB12
TB13 Y06
TB16
TB14
24 V DV TB15 Y07
240 V AC TB16
TB17 Vacant
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-36: Relay output module QY18A connections

12 34
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.22 Triac output module QY22

Item QY22
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 100240 V AC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.6 A per output, 4.8 A per module
Minimum switching load 24 V AC (100 mA); 100 V AC (25 mA); 240 V AC (25 mA)
Maximum inrush current 20 A
Leakage current at OFF 3 mA (120 V AC, 60 Hz), 1.5 mA (240 V AC, 60 Hz)
Maximum voltage drop at ON 1.5 V
OFF ON 1 ms + 0.5 cycles or less (rated load, resistance load)
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms + 0.5 cycles or less (rated load, resistance load)
Surge suppressor CR absorber
Fuse
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common,
(common terminal: TB17)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 250 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.40 kg

Tab. 12-37: Triac output module QY22

Terminal block
External connections Signal
number
TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
LED TB1 TB4 Y03
TB5 Y04
Internal
circuit

TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB11 Y0A
TB16
TB12 Y0B
TB13 Y0C
TB17 TB14 Y0D
~
100 to 240 V AC TB15 Y0E
TB16 YDF
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-38: Triac output module QY22 connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 35

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.23 Transistor output module QY40P

Item QY40P
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 1.6 A per module
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V at 0.1 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal/overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common,
(common terminal: TB18)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 10 mA (at 24 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 65 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg

Tab. 12-39: Transistor output module QY40P

 Sink type

External connections Terminal block Signal

number
TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB1
TB4 Y03
LED TB5 Y04
TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
Internal

TB8 Y07
circuit

TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB11 Y0A
TB16
TB12 Y0B
TB17 TB13 Y0C
TB18 TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
12/24 V DC
TB16 Y0F
TB17 12/24 V DC
TB18 COM

Tab. 12-40: Transistor output module QY40P connections

12 36
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.24 Transistor output module QY40P-TS

Item QY40P-TS
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 1.6 A per module
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V at 0.1 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal/overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common,
(common terminal: 18)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 2.0 mm2 (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 10 mA (at 24 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 65 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.16 kg

Tab. 12-41: Transistor output module QY40P-TS

 Sink type

External connections Terminal block Signal

number
1 Y00
2 Y01
3 Y02
1
4 Y03
LED 5 Y04
6 Y05
7 Y06
Internal

8 Y07
circuit

9 Y08
10 Y09
11 Y0A
16
12 Y0B
17 13 Y0C
18 + 14 Y0D
15 Y0E
12/24 V DC
16 Y0F
17 12/24 V DC
18 COM

Tab. 12-42: Transistor output module QY40P-TS connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 37

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.25 Transistor output module QY41P

Item QY41P
Number of outputs 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 2 A per module
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V at 0.1 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal/overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 1; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: A01, A02)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 20 mA (at 24 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 105 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.15 kg

Tab. 12-43: Transistor output module QY41P

 Sink type

External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal

B20 Y00 A20 Y10
B19 Y01 A19 Y11
B18 Y02 A18 Y12
B20 A20
B17 Y03 A17 Y13
B16 Y04 A16 Y14
B20
B15 Y05 A15 Y15
LED
B14 Y06 A14 Y16
B13 Y07 A13 Y17
Internal

B12 Y08 A12 Y18

circuit

B11 Y09 A11 Y19

B10 Y0A A10 Y1A
A05
B09 Y0B A09 Y1B
B01, B02
B08 Y0C A08 Y1C
A01, 12/24 V DC B07 Y0D A07 Y1D
A02 B1 A1 B06 Y0E A06 Y1E
B05 Y0F A05 Y1F
The connector is no D-sub type! B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
(Module front view) Pin-Outs B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
(Module front view) B02 12/24 V DC A02 COM
B01 12/24 V DC A01 COM

Tab. 12-44: Transistor output module QY41P connections

12 38
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.26 Transistor output module QY42P

Item QY42P
Number of outputs 64
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 2 A per module
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V at 0.1 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal/overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 2; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: 1A01, 1A02, 2A01, 2A02)
Output status display One LED per output/common, 32 point switch-over using switch
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 20 mA (at 24 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 150 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg

Tab. 12-45: Transistor output module QY42P

 Sink type

External connections

B20
Internal
circuit

A05
LED B01, B02
F Indication selector switch
L A01, A02 Used to switch the LED
indications:
Output module 12/24 V DC F: Outputs Y00 to Y1F
L: Outputs Y20 to Y3F

Tab. 12-46: Transistor output module QY42P connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 39

Specifications Input/output module specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 Y00 1A20 Y10 2B20 Y20 2A20 Y30
1B19 Y01 1A19 Y11 2B19 Y21 2A19 Y31
1B18 Y02 1A18 Y12 2B18 Y22 2A18 Y32
1B17 Y03 1A17 Y13 2B17 Y23 2A17 Y33
B20 A20 1B16 Y04 1A16 Y14 2B16 Y24 2A16 Y34
1B15 Y05 1A15 Y15 2B15 Y25 2A15 Y35
1B14 Y06 1A14 Y16 2B14 Y26 2A14 Y36
1B13 Y07 1A13 Y17 2B13 Y27 2A13 Y37
1B12 Y08 1A12 Y18 2B12 Y28 2A12 Y38
1B11 Y09 1A11 Y19 2B11 Y29 2A11 Y39
1B10 Y0A 1A10 Y1A 2B10 Y2A 2A10 Y3A
1B09 Y0B 1A09 Y1B 2B09 Y2B 2A09 Y3B
1B08 Y0C 1A08 Y1C 2B08 Y2C 2A08 Y3C
1B07 Y0D 1A07 Y1D 2B07 Y2D 2A07 Y3D
B1 A1
1B06 Y0E 1A06 Y1E 2B06 Y2E 2A06 Y3E
1B05 Y0F 1A05 Y1F 2B05 Y2F 2A05 Y3F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
(Module front view)
1B02 12/24V DC 1A02 COM1 2B02 12/24V DC 2A02 COM2
1B01 12/24V DC 1A01 COM1 2B01 12/24V DC 2A01 COM2

Tab. 12-47: Connector pin outs of the module QY42P

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

12 40
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.27 Transistor output module QY50

Item QY50
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.5 A per output, 4 A per group
Maximum inrush current 4 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V at 0.5 ,
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse Two fuses 4 A parallel (nominal fuse current = 6.7 A), unchangeable
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU
1; 16 points/common,
Groups of outputs
(common terminal: TB18)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/-15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 20 mA (at 24 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption
80 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg

Tab. 12-48: Transistor output module QY50

 Sink type
 The fuses inside the output module are unchangeable. They protect the external peripherals, if there occurs a
short circuit in the module.
The output module itself has no overload protection.

Terminal block
External connections number Signal

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB1 TB3 Y02
LED TB4 Y03
TB5 Y04
Internal
circuit

TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16 TB11 Y0A
TB17 TB12 Y0B
TB18 TB13 Y0C
TB14 Y0D
12/24 V DC
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 12/24 V DC
TB18 COM

Tab. 12-49: Transistor output module QY50 connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 41

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.28 Transistor output module QY68A

Item QY68A
Number of outputs 8
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 5/12/24 V DC (+20/10 %)
Maximum load current 2 A per output, 8 A per module
Maximum inrush current 8 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V at 2 A
OFF ON 3 ms
Response time
ON OFF 10 ms (resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode

Fuse
Attaching a fuse to external wiring is recommended.
Groups of outputs 8; 1 (all outputs are independent).
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
External power supply Not necessary
Internal current consumption (5 V
110 mA (all output points ON)
DC)
Weight 0.14 kg

Tab. 12-50: Transistor output module QY68A

 Sink/Source type.

Terminal block
External connections number Signal
TB1
Y00
Sink TB2
TB1 TB3
Y01
LED TB4
TB5
Y02
Internal

TB6
circuit

5/12V DC
TB2 TB7
Y03
TB8
TB9
Y04
QY68A TB10
TB15
TB11
5/12V DC Y05
TB12
TB13
Y06
TB16 TB14
TB15
Source Y07
TB16
TB17 Vacant
TB18 Vacant

Tab. 12-51: Transistor output module QY68A connections

12 42
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.29 Transistor output module QY70

Item QY70
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 5/12 V DC (+25/10 %)
Maximum load current 16 mA per output, 256 mA per module
Maximum inrush current 40 mA, 10 ms or less
Output voltage at OFF 3.5 V/ 0.4 mA at a switching voltage of 5 V
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V DC
OFF ON 0.5 ms
Response time
ON OFF 0.5 ms (resistive load)
Surge suppressor
Fuse 1.6 A (unchangeable)
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU
Groups of outputs 1; 16 points/common,
(common terminal: TB18)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
External power Voltage 5/12 V DC (+25/10 %), ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 90 mA (at 12 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 95 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.14 kg

Tab. 12-52: Transistor output module QY70

 Sink type

External connections Terminal block Signal

number
TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB1
TB4 Y03
LED TB5 Y04
TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
Internal
circuit

TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16
TB11 Y0A
TB17 TB12 Y0B
TB18 TB13 Y0C
5/12 V DC TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 5/12 V DC
TB18 COM

Tab. 12-53: Transistor output module QY470 connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 43

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.30 Transistor output module QY71

Item QY71
Number of outputs 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 5/12 V DC (+25/10 %)
Maximum load current 16 mA per output, 512 mA per module
Maximum inrush current 40 mA, 10 ms or less
Output voltage at OFF 3.5 V/ 0.4 mA at a switching voltage of 5 V
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V DC
Response time OFF ON 0.5 ms
ON OFF 0.5 ms (resistive load)
Surge suppressor
Fuse 1.6 A (unchangeable)
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU
Groups of outputs 1; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: A01, A02)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories  Connector A6CON
 Assembled cable Q40-CBL-3M/5M with 40 pin plug
External power Voltage 5/12 V DC (+25/10 %), ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 170 mA (at 12 V DC; all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 150 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.10 kg

Tab. 12-54: Transistor output module QY71

 Sink type

External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal

B20 Y00 A20 Y10
B19 Y01 A19 Y11
B18 Y02 A18 Y12
B20 A20
B17 Y03 A17 Y13
B20 B16 Y04 A16 Y14
LED B15 Y05 A15 Y15
B14 Y06 A14 Y16
Internal

B13 Y07 A13 Y17

circuit

B12 Y08 A12 Y18

B11 Y09 A11 Y19
A05
B10 Y0A A10 Y1A
B01, B02
B09 Y0B A09 Y1B
A01, B08 Y0C A08 Y1C
A02 5/12 V DC B07 Y0D A07 Y1D
B1 A1 B06 Y0E A06 Y1E
B05 Y0F A05 Y1F
The connector is no D-sub type!
(Module front view) B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
(Module front view) B02 5/12 V DC A02 COM
B01 5/12 V DC A01 COM

Tab. 12-55: Transistor output module QY71 connections

12 44
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.31 Transistor output module QY80

Item QY80
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.5 A per output, 4 A per group
Maximum inrush current 4 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V at 0.5 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse Two fuses 4 A parallel (nominal fuse current = 6.7 A), unchangeable
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU
1; 16 points/common,
Groups of outputs
(common terminal: TB17)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 20 mA (at 24 V DC, all output points ON)
Internal current consumption
80 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg

Tab. 12-56: Transistor output module QY80

 Source type
 The fuses inside the output module are unchangeable. They protect the external peripherals, if there occurs a
short circuit in the module. The output module itself has no overload protection.

Terminal block
External connections number Signal
TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
LED TB4 Y03
TB1 TB5 Y04
TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
Internal TB8 Y07
circuit TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16 TB11 Y0A
TB17 TB12 Y0B
TB18 TB13 Y0C
TB14 Y0D
12/24 V DC
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 COM
TB18 0V

Tab. 12-57: Transistor output module QY80 connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 45

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.32 Transistor output module QY80-TS

Item QY80-TS
Number of outputs 16
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.5 A per output, 4 A per group
Maximum inrush current 4 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V at 0.5 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse Two fuses 4 A parallel (nominal fuse current = 6.7 A), unchangeable
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU
1; 16 points/common,
Groups of outputs
(common terminal: 17)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Removable terminal block with spring terminals
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 2.0 mm2 (outside diameter: 1.45 mm max.)
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 20 mA (at 24 V DC, all output points ON)
Internal current consumption (5 V
80 mA (all output points ON)
DC)
Weight 0.17 kg

Tab. 12-58: Transistor output module QY80-TS

 Source type
 The fuses inside the output module are unchangeable. They protect the external peripherals, if there occurs a
short circuit in the module. The output module itself has no overload protection.

Terminal block
External connections number Signal
1 Y00
2 Y01
3 Y02
LED 4 Y03
1 5 Y04
6 Y05
7 Y06
Internal 8 Y07
circuit 9 Y08
10 Y09
16 11 Y0A
17 + 12 Y0B
18 13 Y0C
14 Y0D
12/24 V DC
15 Y0E
16 Y0F
17 COM
18 0V

Tab. 12-59: Transistor output module QY80-TS connections

12 46
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.33 Transistor output module QY81P

Item QY81P
Number of outputs 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 2 A per group
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1 V at 0.1 A
Response time OFF ON 1 ms
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal protection is activated in units of 2 points
Overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 1; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: 17, 18, 36)
Output status display One LED per output
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 37-pin D-sub connector
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 40 mA (at 24 V DC, all output points ON)
Internal current consumption 95 mA (all output points ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.17 kg

Tab. 12-60: Transistor output module QY81P

 Source type

External connections Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Y00 9 Y10
20 Y01 28 Y11
2 Y02 10 Y12
12/24 V DC
LED 21 Y03 29 Y13
17, 18, 3 Y04 11 Y14
36
22 Y05 30 Y15
19, 37 4 Y06 12 Y16

Internal 23 Y07 31 Y17

circuit 5 Y08 13 Y18
35
24 Y09 32 Y19
6 Y0A 14 Y1A
25 Y0B 33 Y1B
7 Y0C 15 Y1C
26 Y0D 34 Y1D
1
8 Y0E 16 Y1E
27 Y0F 35 Y1F
17 COM 37 0V
36 COM 19 0V
18 COM

Tab. 12-61: Transistor output module QY81P connections

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 47

Specifications Input/output module specifications

Fig.12-11:
Connector pin outs of D-sub 37-pin connector
of the module QY81P
QY81P
01 23 456 7
89ABCDEF
01 23 456 7
89ABCDEF

QY81P
12/24VDC
0.1A

19 37
18 36

2 21
1 20

QY81_2d

12 48
Input/output module specifications Specifications

12.3.34 Combined I/O module QH42P

Item QH42P
Input Specifications
Number of input points 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON Refer to the derating chart
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: 1B01 and 1B02)
Output specifications
Number of outputs 32
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %)
Maximum load current 0.1 A per output, 2 A per module
Maximum inrush current 0.7 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V at 0.1 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse
External power Voltage 1224 V DC (+20/15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 15 mA (at 24 VDC, all output points are ON)
Protection function Thermal and overload protections
Thermal/overload protection is activated in units of 1 point
Groups of outputs 1; 32 points/common,
(common terminal: 2A01 and 2A02)
Common specifications
Input/output status display One LED per input or output (switchable)
Number of I/O occupied points 32 points (Type setting in I/O-assignment: I/O-mix)
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections Two 40-pin connectors
Left connector: inputs, right connector: outputs
Applicable wire size 0.3 mm2
Accessories External wiring connector
Internal current consumption 130 mA (all input points are ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.20 kg

Tab. 12-62: Combined I/O module QH42P

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 49

Specifications Input/output module specifications

External connections

1B20

Internal
circuit
F
LED
L
1A05

2B20
- + 1B02

Internal
24 V DC

circuit
1B01

2A05

2B02
2B01
Indication selector switch 2A02
Used to switch the LED indications 2A01 - +
F: Inputs X00 to X1F
L: Outputs Y00 to Y1F 12/24 V DC

Fig. 12-12: External connections and circuit diagram of the input/output module QH42P

Fig.12-13:
% QH42P Derating chart
100
90
ON ratio

80 28,8 V DC
70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 [C]
Ambient temperature
QH00033C

12 50
Input/output module specifications Specifications

Left-hand side connector Right-hand side connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 Y00 2A20 Y10
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 Y01 2A19 Y11
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 Y02 2A18 Y12
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 Y03 2A17 Y13
B20 A20 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 Y04 2A16 Y14
1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 Y05 2A15 Y15
1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 Y06 2A14 Y16
1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 Y07 2A13 Y17
1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 Y08 2A12 Y18
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 Y09 2A11 Y19
1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 Y0A 2A10 Y1A
1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 Y0B 2A09 Y1B
1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 Y0C 2A08 Y1C
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 Y0D 2A07 Y1D
B1 A1
1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 Y0E 2A06 Y1E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 Y0F 2A05 Y1F
1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Pin-Outs
(Module front view) 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 12/24 V DC 2A02 COM2
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 12/24 V DC 2A01 COM2

Tab. 12-63: Connector pin outs of the module QH42P

NOTE The connectors are no D-sub type.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 51

Specifications Input/output module specifications

12.3.35 Combined I/O module QX48Y57

Item QX48Y57
Input Specifications
Number of input points 8
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC (+20/-15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
Rated input current approx. 4 mA
Max. simultaneously ON No limitation, all inputs can be switched on simultaneously.
Inrush current
ON voltage/ON current 19 V DC / 3 mA
OFF voltage/OFF current 11 V DC / 1.7 mA
Input impedance approx. 5.6 k
OFF ON 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Response time
ON OFF 1, 5, 10, 20, 70 ms
(Response time setting by parameters, initial setting: 10 ms)
Groups of input 1; 8 points/common,
(common terminal: TB9)
Output specifications
Number of outputs 7
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated load voltage 12/24 V DC (+20/-15 %)
Maximum load current 0.5 A per output, 2 A per module
Maximum inrush current 4 A, 10 ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3 V at 0.5 A
OFF ON 1 ms
Response time
ON OFF 1 ms (rated load, resistive load)
Surge suppressor Zener Diode
Fuse 4 A, unchangeable
Fuse blow indication LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU.
External power Voltage 12/24 V DC (+20/-15 %, ripple ratio within 5 %)
supply Current 10 mA (at 24 VDC)
Groups of outputs 1; 7 points/common
(common terminal: TB18)
Common specifications
Input/output status display One LED per input and output
Number of I/O occupied points 16 points (Type setting in I/O-assignment: I/O-mix)
Dielectric withstand voltage 560 V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000 m)
External connections 18-point removable terminal block with screws (M3x6)
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (outside diameter: 2.8 mm max.)
Internal current consumption 80 mA (with all inputs ON)
(5 V DC)
Weight 0.20 kg

Tab. 12-64: Combined I/O module QX48Y57

 The response times OFF > ON and ON > OFF cant be set to different values.
 The fuses inside the output module are unchangeable. They protect the external peripherals, if there occurs a
short circuit in the module. The output module itself has no overload protection.

12 52
Input/output module specifications Specifications

Terminal
External connections block Signal
number
TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB1 TB4 X03
LED TB5 X04

Internal circuit
TB10
TB6 X05
TB7 X06
TB8 X07
TB8 TB9 COM1
TB10 Y08
- + TB9
TB16
TB11 Y09
24 V DC
TB17
TB12 Y0A
TB18
- + TB13 Y0B
12/24 V DC
TB14 Y0C
TB15 Y0D
TB16 Y0E
TB17 12/24 V DC
TB18 COM2

Tab. 12-65: External connections and circuit diagram of the input/output module QX48Y57

12.3.36 Dummy module QG60

The module QG60 is a blank cover module used to protect the vacant slot (between I/O mod-
ules) of the base unit from dust.
Load the blank cover module with the connector cover of the base module fitted.

Item QG60
I/O points Set by parameters
Application Used to protect any vacant slots on the base unit from dust.
Weight [kg] 0.07
External dimensions (WxHxD) [mm] 27.4x98x9

Tab. 12-66: Dummy module specifications

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 53

Specifications Power supply module specifications

12.4 Power supply module specifications

Power supply modules Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D and Q61SP

Item Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q61P-D Q61SP

Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot "POWER"
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B Q3SB
Input power sup- V AC 100 to 120 200 to 240 100 to 240 100 to 240 100 to 240
ply (+10 %, 15 %)
V DC
(+30 %, 35 %)
Input frequency 50/60 Hz (5 %)
Maximum input apparent power 105 VA 105 VA 120 VA 130 VA 40 VA
Inrush current  20 A within 8 ms
Rated output cur- 5 V DC 6A 6A 6A 6A 2A
rent 24 V DC
External output voltage
Overcurrent pro- 5 V DC 6.6 A 2.2 A
tection  24 V DC
Overvoltage protection  5.5 to 6.5 V
Efficiency 70 %
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC, 1 min
(Across primary and secondary
connection)
Operation indication The "POWER" LED turns on in green, when the output voltage is present.
Application Error contact (refer to chapter 7)
Rated switching 24 V DC; 0.5 A
voltage, current
Minimum 5 V DC; 1 mA
switching load
Contact output Response time OFF ON: 10 ms
section ON OFF: 12 ms
Life Mechanical: More than 20 million times
Electrical: More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Overvoltage
protection
Fuse The signal output is not protected by fuse.
Terminal screw size M3.5x7 M3.5x7
Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89 Ncm
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2
External dimensions (HxWxD) [mm] 98x55.2x90 98x27.4x104
Weight 0.31 kg 0.31kg 0.40 kg 0.45 kg 0.18 kg
Allowable momentary power failure
20 ms
period

Tab. 12-67: Power supply module specifications (1)

 When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than
the specified value (2 ms or less) may flow.
Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off.
When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics
etc.
 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in
the circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when voltage is lowered. If this device is
activated, switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short.
Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart the system.

12 54
Power supply module specifications Specifications

 Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 V DC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5 V DC is
applied to the circuit.
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns off. If this happens, switch the input power off,
then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system to take place.
The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains off.
If the momentary power failure time is within 20 ms, the system detects an AC down and suspends the operation
processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
If the momentary power failure time exceeds 20 ms, the system either continues or initially starts operations
depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the system operates the
same as when the momentary power failure time is within 20 ms.
Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the input module (such as QX10) can
prevent the sensor connected to the input module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply
turns off.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on the AC line, which is connected to
the power supply, an AC down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor
of the input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30 mA per input module on the AC line.

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 55

Specifications Power supply module specifications

Power supply modules Q62P, Q63P, Q64P and Q64PN

Item Q62P Q63P Q64P Q64PN
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot "POWER"
Applicable base unit Q3B, Q3DB, Q6B
Input power sup- V AC 100 to 240 100 to 120 100 to 240
ply (+10 %, -15 %) 200 to 240

V DC 24
(+30 %, -35 %)
Input frequency 50/60 Hz (5 %) 50/60 Hz (5 %)
Maximum input apparent power 105 VA 45 W 160 VA
Inrush current  20 A within 8 ms 100 A within 1 ms 20 A within 8 ms
Rated output cur- 5 V DC 3A 6A 8.5 A
rent 24 V DC 0.6 A
External output voltage 24 V DC
(10 %)
Overcurrent pro- 5 V DC 3.3 A 6.6 A 9.9 A
tection  24 V DC 0.66 A
Overvoltage protection  5.5 to 6.5 V
Efficiency 65 % 70 % 70 %
Dielectric withstand voltage (Across 2830 V AC, 1 min 500 V AC, 1 min 2830 V AC, 1 min
primary and secondary connection)
Operation indication The "POWER" LED turns on in green, when the output voltage is present.
Application Error contact (refer to chapter 7)
Rated switching 24 V DC; 0.5 A
voltage, current
Minimum 5 V DC; 1 mA
switching load
Contact output Response time OFF ON: 10 ms
section ON OFF: 12 ms
Life Mechanical: More than 20 million times
Electrical: More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Overvoltage
protection
Fuse The signal output is not protected by fuse.
Terminal screw size M3.5x7 M3.5
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2
Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89 Ncm
External dimensions (HxWxD) 98x55.2x90
98x55.2x115
[mm]
Weight 0.39 kg 0.33 kg 0.40 kg 0.47 kg
Allowable momentary power failure 10 ms
20 ms 20 ms
period (at 24 V DC)

Tab. 12-68: Power supply module specifications (2)

 When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than
the specified value (2 ms or less) may flow.
Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off.
When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics
etc.
 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 V DC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in
the circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when voltage is lowered. If this device is
activated, switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short.
Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart the system.

12 56
Power supply module specifications Specifications

 Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 V DC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5 V DC is
applied to the circuit.
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns off. If this happens, switch the input power off,
then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system to take place.
The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains off.
If the momentary power failure time is within the period given in the table above, the system detects an AC down
and suspends the operation processing.
If the momentary power failure time exceeds the period given in the table above, the system either continues or
initially starts operations depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued,
the system operates the same as when the momentary power failure time is within 20 ms (resp. 10 ms for
Q63RP).

For AC input power supply:

Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the input module (such as QX10) can
prevent the sensor connected to the input module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply
turns off.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on the AC line, which is connected to
the power supply, an AC down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor
of the input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30 mA per input module on the AC line.

For DC input power supply:

The allowable momentary power failure period is the time when 24 V DC is input. If the input is less than 24 V DC,
the time will be shorter.)

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 57

Specifications Power supply module specifications

Redundant power supply modules Q63RP and Q64RP

Item Q63RP Q64RP
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot "POWER"
Applicable base unit Q3RB, Q6RB, Q6WRB,
Input power sup- V AC 100 to 240
ply (+10 %, -15 %)
V DC 24
(+30 %, -35 %)
Input frequency 50/60 Hz (5 %)
Maximum input apparent power 65 W 160 VA
Inrush current  150 A within 1 ms 20 A within 8 ms
Rated output cur- 5 V DC 8.5 A 8.5 A
rent 24 V DC
External output voltage
Overcurrent pro- 5 V DC 9.35 A
tection  24 V DC
Overvoltage protection  5.5 to 6.5 V
Efficiency 65 %
Dielectric withstand voltage (Across 500 V AC, 1 min 2830 V AC, 1 min
primary and secondary connection)
Operation indication The "POWER" LED turns on in green, when the output voltage is present.
Application Error contact (refer to chapter 7)
Rated switching 24 V DC; 0.5 A
voltage, current
Minimum 5 V DC; 1 mA
switching load
Contact output Response time OFF ON: 10 ms
section ON OFF: 12 ms
Life Mechanical: More than 20 million times
Electrical: More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Overvoltage
protection
Fuse The signal output is not protected by fuse.
Terminal screw size M3.5
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2
Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89 Ncm
External dimensions (HxWxD)
98x83x115
[mm]
Weight 0.60 kg 0.47 kg
Allowable momentary power failure
10 ms 20 ms
period

Tab. 12-69: Redundant power supply module of MELSEC System Q specifications

 When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than
the specified value (2 ms or less) may flow.
Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off.
When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics
etc.
 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 V DC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in
the circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when voltage is lowered. If this device is
activated, switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short.
Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart the system.
 Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5 V DC is
applied to the circuit.
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns on in red. If this happens, switch the input
power off, then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system to take place. The power supply
module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains red.

12 58
Power supply module specifications Specifications

If the momentary power failure time is within the period given in the table above, the system detects an AC down
and suspends the operation processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
In the system operating with two redundant power supply modules, the system does not initially start operations
when the momentary power failure exceeding 20 ms occurs in only one of the input power supplies. The system,
however, may initially start operations when the momentary power failure exceeding 20 ms occurs simultane-
ously in both input power supplies.

Q64RP only (AC input power supply):

Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the input module (such as QX10) can
prevent the sensor connected to the input module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply
turns off.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on the AC line, which is connected to
the power supply, an AC down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor
of the input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30 mA per input module on the AC line.

Q63RP only (DC input power supply):

The allowable momentary power failure period is the time when 24 V DC is input. If the input is less than 24 V DC,
the time will be shorter.)

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 59

Specifications Power supply module specifications

Power supplies are integrated into Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU

Item Q00JCPU Q00UJCPU
Input power supply 100 to 240 V AC (+10 %, 15 %)
Input frequency 50/60 Hz (5 %)
Maximum input apparent power 105 VA
Inrush current  40 A within 8 ms
Rated output cur- 5 V DC 3A
rent 24 V DC
External output voltage
Overcurrent pro- 5 V DC 3.3 A
tection  24 V DC
Overvoltage protection  5.5 to 6.5 V
Efficiency 65 %
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830 V AC, 1 min
(Across primary and secondary
connection)
Operation indication The POWER LED of the CPU part: Normal: On (green), Error: Off
Contact output section
Terminal screw size M3.5x7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2
Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89 Ncm
External dimensions (HxWxD)
[mm] Integrated into a combination of base unit, power supply and CPU
Weight
Allowable momentary power failure
20 ms
period

Tab. 12-70: Power supply modules of Q00J- and Q00UJCPU specifications

 When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than
the specified value (2 ms or less) may flow.
Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off.
When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics
etc.
 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in
the circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when voltage is lowered. If this device is
activated, switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short.
Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart the system.
 Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5 VDC is
applied to the circuit.
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns off.
If this happens, switch the input power off, then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system
to take place. The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains off.
If the momentary power failure time is within 20 ms, the system detects an AC down and suspends the operation
processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
If the momentary power failure time exceeds 20 ms, the system either continues or initially starts operations
depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the system operates the
same as when the momentary power failure time is within 20 ms.
Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the input module (such as QX10) can
prevent the sensor connected to the input module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply
turns off.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on the AC line, which is connected to
the power supply, an AC down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor
of the input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30 mA per input module on the AC line.

12 60
Base unit specifications Specifications

12.5 Base unit specifications

Slim type main base units Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB

Item Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB

Slots for power supply modules 1 1 1
Slots for I/O modules 2 3 5
Installation Installation holes 4.5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption 90 mA 90 mA 100 mA
(5 V DC)
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x114x18.5 98x142x18.5 98x197.5x18.5
Weight kg 0.12 0.15 0.21
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter Q6DIN3

Tab. 12-71: Slim type main base units Q3SB

Main base units Q33B-E, Q35B-E, Q38B-E, Q38RB-E, Q312B-E

Item Q33B-E Q35B-E Q38B-E Q38RB-E Q312B-E

Slots for power supply modules 1 1 1 2 1
Slots for I/O modules 3 5 8 8 12
Installation Installation holes 4,5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) 110 mA 110 mA 120 mA 120 mA 130 mA
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x189x44.1 98x245x44.1 98x328x44.1 98x439x44.1 98x439x44.1
Weight kg 0.21 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.45
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter

Tab. 12-72: Main base units Q3B-E and Q3RB-E

Main base units Q38DB and Q312DB

Item Q38DB Q312DB

Slots for power supply modules 1 1
Slots for I/O modules 8 12
Installation Installation holes 4,5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption 230 mA 240 mA
(5 V DC)
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x328x44.1 98x439x44.1
Weight kg 0.41 0.54
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter Q6DIN1

Tab. 12-73: Main base unit Q3DB

MELSEC System Q, Hardware 12 61

Specifications Base unit specifications

Extension base units Q52B, Q55B

Item Q52B Q55B

Slots for power supply modules
Slots for I/O modules 2 5
Power supply module Not necessary
Power supplied by the power supply of the main base unit.
Installation Installation holes 4,5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) 80 mA 100 mA
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x106x44.1 98x189x44.1
Weight kg 0.14 0.23
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter Q6DIN3

Tab. 12-74: Extension base unit (type not requiring power supply module)

Extension base units Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B

Item Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B

Slots for power supply modules 1 1 1 1
Slots for I/O modules 3 5 8 12
Power supply module Necessary
Installation Installation holes 4,5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) 110 mA 110 mA 120 mA 130 mA
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x189x44.1 98x245x44.1 98x328x44.1 98x439x44.1
Weight kg 0.23 0.28 0.38 0.48
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter

Tab. 12-75: Extension base unit (type requiring power supply module)

Extension base units Q65WRB and Q68RB

Item Q65WRB Q68RB

Slots for power supply modules 2 2
Slots for I/O modules 5 8
Power supply module Necessary
Installation Installation holes 4,5 mm, M4 screws
Use special adapters, when mounting the base unit on a DIN rail.
Internal current consumption (5 V DC) 160 mA 120 mA
External dimensions (HxWxD) mm 98x439x44.1 98x439x44.1
Weight kg 0.52 0.49
Accessories DIN rail mounting adapter Q6DIN1

Tab. 12-76: Extension base unit Q65WRB and Q68RB

12 62
External dimensions Appendix

A Appendix
A.1 External dimensions
A.1.1 CPU modules

Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU

98

245

Unit: mm
Q00JCPU_dim

Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,

Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU

Unit: mm
Q06HCPU_m

MELSEC System Q, Hardware A1

Appendix External dimensions

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,

Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU

98
4
23
27.4 115

Unit: mm
QnUDEHCPU_Abmessungen

Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,

Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU when battery Q3MEM-4MBS or
Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on the CPU module

98

89.3 24.5 5

27.4 118.8

Unit: mm
QnUD(E)HCPU_mit_Q3MEM

A2
External dimensions Appendix

Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU

Unit: mm
q12prhcpu_m

MELSEC System Q, Hardware A3

Appendix External dimensions

When Q7BAT-SET is mounted on the CPU module

 









98






30

 


 


27.4 89.3

Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU

  

  
 

 

 
 




 

98





30


 


 


27.4 89.3

Unit: mm
QnCPU_mit_Q7BAT

A4
External dimensions Appendix

A.1.2 Power supply modules

W
B D

Netzteil_Q_dim

Power supply
Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D) Tab. A-1:
module
Q61P-A1 External dimensions of Melsec Sys-
Q61P-A2 tem Q power supply modules
55.2 mm 90 mm
Q61P
Q61P-D
90 mm
Q61SP 27.4 mm (+ 14 mm for
98 mm terminals)
Q62P
55.2 mm 90 mm
Q63P
Q63RP 83 mm
Q64P
55.2 mm 115 mm
Q64PN
Q64RP 83 mm

MELSEC System Q, Hardware A5

Appendix External dimensions

A.1.3 Main base units and extension base units

98

X
Unit: mm
Q38B_m

Type X (mm) Tab. A-2:

Q32SB 114 External dimensions of Melsec System Q
Q33SB 142 main base units and extension base units
Q33B-E 189
Q35B-E 245
Q35SB 197.5
Q38B-E
328
Q38DB
Q38RB-E
Q312B-E 439
Q312DB
Q52B 106
Q55B 189
Q63B 189
Q65B 245
Q65WRB 439
Q68B 328
Q68RB
439
Q612B

A6
External dimensions Appendix

A.1.4 I/O modules and dummy module

QX81
01 23 45 6 7
89ABCD E F
01 23 45 6 7
89ABCD E F

QX81
24VDC
4mA

Unit: mm
QX81_dim

MELSEC System Q, Hardware A7

Appendix External dimensions

A8
 Index

INDEX

A DIN rail
Ambient environment Adapter for base units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Dummy module
Ambient humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
ATA cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
E
B
ERR. terminal of power supply modules
Base units
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 detected errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
for trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Extension base units
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61 External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
setting extension stage number . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Basic instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-62
Batteries
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Extension stage number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Installation into CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Installation into memory cards . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Lithium content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 F
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Flash cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
C Formatting of memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Compatibiliy of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 G
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CPU modules Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Detailed overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
H
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Heat generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
I
Current consumption
Q00J-, Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 I/O points
Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Q00J-, Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Q02- to Q25(P)(R)HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Q02- to Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Q02- to Q25(P)(R)HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . . . . .12-5
Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
D Input modules
Dedicated instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Devices of CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Diagnostic register Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
SD0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25 Selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
SD16 to SD26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25 Insulation resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
SD5 to SD15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25

MELSEC System Q, Hardware I

Index

L P
L.CLR switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
LED Power failure time
BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Q00J-,Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
BAT.ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
BOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Q02- to Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . . . . 12-5
LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Power supply modules
POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
POWER (Q00JCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . 12-54
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
RUN (Q00JCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
SYSTEM A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Processing speed
SYSTEM B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Q00J-, Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Q00UJ-, Q00U-, Q01U-,
Life detection Q02U- and Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
for power supply module Q61P-D . . . . . . . . 7-3 Q02- to Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
LIFE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
LIFE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . . . . 12-5
Lithium content of batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
LIVE OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Program capacity
Q00J-, Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
M Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Main base units Q02- to Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6 Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . . . . 12-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61 Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
R
Memory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Memory cards Range of instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 S
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Module Screws
install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 for fixing of CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Tightening torque range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mounting in a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Self diagnostic
Q00J-, Q00-, Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
N Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Noise durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Q02- to Q25HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
O Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . . . . 12-5
Operating ambience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Output modules Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7 Special register
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 SD0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 SD16 to SD26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 SD5 to SD15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 SD51 and SD52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 SM1592 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73

II
 Index

Special relay V
SM237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
SM321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-81
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
SM51 and SM52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
SRAM cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 W
Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Watch Dog Timer
System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
for Q00J-, Q00- and Q01CPU . . . . . . . . . .12-2
System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
for Q00UJ- to Q03U(E)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
for Q02- to Q25(P)(R)HCPU . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
System protection (DIP switches) . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
for Q02PH- to Q25PHCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
T for Q04UD(E)H- to Q26UD(E)HCPU . . . . .12-5
for Q12PRH- and Q25PRHCPU . . . . . . . .12-7
Tightening torque range Wiring
CPU module screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
General precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
I/O module screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Total power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Wiring of cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Troubleshooting
Write protect switch of memory cards . . . . . . . . .5-9
how to proceed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

MELSEC System Q, Hardware III

Index

IV
 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Strae 89 99, Paola Hill Ul. Zhambyla 28
Gothaer Strae 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-100017 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlick 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 46 60 04 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex TEXEL ELECTRONICS Ltd. ISRAEL
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS 2 Haumanut, P.O.B. 6272
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 IL-42160 Netanya
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
INEA BH d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Lebanon - Beirut
BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL
Viale Colleoni 7 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21 R. Joo Francisco do Casal 87/89
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia PT - 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6044 Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA Private Bag 2016
Poland Branch Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 ZA-1600 Isando
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770
PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA Technologick 374/6 Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86
52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-18106 Nis
RU-115054 oscow Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Fax: +7 495 721-2071
Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK INEA SR d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Lykkegrdsvej 17 Izletnicka 10
Spanish Branch DK-4000 Roskilde SER-113000 Smederevo
Carretera de Rub 76-80 Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valls (Barcelona) Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579 Beijer Electronics Eesti O ESTONIA SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Prnu mnt.160i Jna Derku 1671
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK EE-11317 Tallinn SK-911 01 Trencn
UK Branch Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72
Travellers Lane Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND PROCONT, spol. s r.o. Preov SLOVAKIA
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Peltoie 37 Kpeln 1/A
FIN-28400 Ulvila SK-080 01 Preov
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 540 Phone: +421 (0)51 7580 611
Office Tower Z 14 F Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 541 Fax: +421 (0)51 7580 650
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212 UTECO GREECE INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 5, Mavrogenous Str. Stegne 11
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 GR-18542 Piraeus SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 MELTRADE Kft. HUNGARY Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fert utca 14. Box 426
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 HU-1107 Budapest SE-20124 Malm
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND
Ritausmas iela 23 Im Schrli 5
LV-1058 Riga CH-8600 Dbendorf
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA GTS TURKEY
Savanoriu Pr. 187 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
LT-02300 Vilnius TR-34775 Yukar Dudullu-mraniye-STANBUL
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Strae 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com